®
M od el 801G C, 801G F & 801G X
Portable Video Signal Generators
Owner's and
Programmer's
Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
1. Introduction
2. Basic Operation
3. Built-In Formats
4. Built-In Images
5. Making Connections
6. Programming
7. Troubleshooting
8. Error Messages
To quickly find
information on the
topics shown on the
right, just match the
black bars with the
black markers on
the edges of the
pages in the
manual.
For more
information on the
contents of each
chapter,please
refer to the table of
contents starting on
the next page.
To locate
information on a
specificsubject,
please refer to the
index at the end of
thismanual.
9. Service
Appendices
Index
M o d e l 8 0 1 G C , 8 0 1 G F
OwnerÕs Programmers Manual
Part# 68-00157 (rev. 21-Feb-96)
&
8 0 1 G X
&
A
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TrademarkAcknowledgments:
Qu antu m Data is a registered trad em ark of Qu antu m Data Corp oration.
IBM is a registered trad em ark of International Bu siness Machines Corp oration.
Macintosh and Ap p le are registered trad em arks of Ap p le Com p u ter, Inc.
Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trad em arks of Microsoft Corp oration.
Mu ltiSync is a registered trad em ark of N EC H om e Electronics, Inc.
Rad io Shack is a registered trad em ark of Tand y Corp oration.
Other p rod u cts or com p any nam es m entioned are registered trad em arks or trad e-
m arks of their resp ective com p anies.
Models 801GC, 801GF & 801GX ¥ Rev. A
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter1: Introduction
1-1
Features ..................................................... 1-2
Product Overview ..................................... 1-3
Formats ................................................. 1-3
Images ................................................... 1-3
Controls ................................................. 1-3
Connectors ............................................ 1-4
Chapter2: BasicOperation
2-1
Introduction ............................................... 2-2
Operating Modes ...................................... 2-2
Front panel operation ............................ 2-2
Normal Format and Images Selection Mode
2-2
Test Sequence Mode ............................ 2-3
Switching operating modes ................... 2-3
Programming Mode ............................... 2-3
Displays and Indicators (Normal Mode) . 2-4
Knobs ......................................................... 2-5
Format Knob in Normal Mode ............... 2-5
Format Knob in Other Modes ................ 2-5
Image Knob in Normal Mode ................. 2-5
Image Looping in Normal Mode ............ 2-6
Image Knob in Other Modes ................. 2-6
Table of Contents
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Switches .................................................... 2-7
AC Select .............................................. 2-7
Power Switch ......................................... 2-7
Buttons ...................................................... 2-8
Image Button ......................................... 2-8
Video Gate Buttons ............................... 2-9
Analog Monochrome Operation ............ 2-9
Sync Gate Buttons .............................. 2-10
Outputs Button .................................... 2-10
Chapter3: Built-InFormats
3-1
5-1
Introduction ............................................... 3-2
Explanation of Terms Used in Charts .... 3-3
Built-in Formats ........................................ 3-4
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Introduction ............................................... 5-2
Descriptions of the Images ..................... 5-4
Acer1 ..................................................... 5-4
Acer2 ..................................................... 5-4
Acer3, Acer4, Acer5 and Acer6 ............ 5-4
Acer7 and Acer 8 ................................... 5-4
Acer9 ..................................................... 5-4
Models 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
iv
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLU_EM, GRN_EM, RED_EM, WHT_EM,
MEMESony, MESony_B, MESony_G, and
MESony_R ............................................ 5-5
BLU_EM+, GRN_EM+, RED_EM+,
WHT_EM+, MEMEPlus, MEPlus_B,
MEPlus_G, and MEPlus_R ................... 5-6
BLU_PIC, GRAY_PIC, GRN_PIC, RED_PIC,
WHT_PIC, Flat, Flat Gray, Flat_B, Flat_G,
and Flat_R ............................................. 5-7
Box_50mm and Box_64mm .................. 5-9
BriteBox ............................................... 5-10
Burst.............................................................
5-12
Check511 ............................................ 5-13
CheckBy3 ............................................ 5-14
Check_11 ............................................ 5-15
CirclesL ............................................... 5-16
CirclesS ............................................... 5-17
ColorBar .............................................. 5-18
Cubes .................................................. 5-19
Custom ................................................ 5-20
Dot_10, Dot_12, Dot_24 ...................... 5-21
EMITest1 ............................................. 5-23
EMITest2 ............................................. 5-23
EMITest3 ............................................. 5-23
EMITest4 ............................................. 5-23
Focus_@6, Focus_@7, Focus_@8 .... 5-24
Focus_Cx ............................................ 5-25
Focus_H .............................................. 5-26
Table of Contents
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus_Oo ............................................ 5-27
Format ................................................. 5-28
GrayBar ............................................... 5-29
Grill_11, Grill_22, Grill_33, Grill_44 ..... 5-30
Hatch_10i, Hatch_10o, Hatch_12i,
Hatch_12o, Hatch_24i, Hatch_24o,
Hatch_24s, Hatch_G, Hatch_M, GRN_HTCH,
and MAGENTA .................................... 5-31
Hatch4x3, Hatch5x4 and Hatch8x8 ..... 5-33
Hatch64W ............................................ 5-34
Hitachi1 ............................................... 5-35
KanjiKan .............................................. 5-36
Linearty(Linearity) ................................ 5-37
LinFocus .............................................. 5-39
Outline0 and Outline1 .......................... 5-41
P1 ........................................................ 5-46
P2 ........................................................ 5-46
P3 ........................................................ 5-46
P4 ........................................................ 5-46
P5 ........................................................ 5-46
P6 ........................................................ 5-46
P7 ........................................................ 5-46
P8 ........................................................ 5-46
Persist ................................................. 5-47
PulseBar .............................................. 5-49
QuartBox ............................................. 5-50
Ramp ................................................... 5-51
Raster .................................................. 5-52
Models 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
vi
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regulate .............................................. 5-53
Samsung1 ........................................... 5-54
Samsung2 ........................................... 5-54
SlideG .................................................. 5-54
SlideRGB ............................................. 5-54
SMPTE133 .......................................... 5-55
SMPTEbar ........................................... 5-61
Stairs20 ............................................... 5-66
Strokes0, Strokes1 .............................. 5-67
Text_9, Text_16 .................................. 5-68
Text_9 ................................................. 5-68
TVBar100 & TVBar_75 ........................ 5-70
TVHatch .............................................. 5-73
Chapter 5: Making Connections
5-1
Line Voltage Selector ............................... 5-2
Selecting a line voltage. ........................ 5-2
Fuse Requirements .................................. 5-3
AC Power Connection .............................. 5-3
DisplayConnection .................................. 5-4
D-Sub Output Connectors ..................... 5-4
BNC Output Connectors ........................ 5-6
S-VIDEO Connector (801GX Only) ....... 5-6
Display Codes ........................................... 5-6
What is a Display Code? ....................... 5-6
Table of Contents
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking a Display Code ...................... 5-7
SUN Display Codes ............................... 5-8
IBM VGA Display Codes ....................... 5-8
Apple Macintosh Display Codes ............ 5-8
External Programming Connections ..... 5-9
Serial Port Connection ............................. 5-9
PC / Terminal Wiring ........................... 5-11
Apple Macintosh Wiring ....................... 5-12
IEEE-488 (GPIB) Port Connection ......... 5-13
Chapter6: Programming
6-1
Programming Capabilities Overview ...... 6-2
Editing and adding signal formats ......... 6-2
Editing the format knob directory ........... 6-2
Creating custom test images ................. 6-3
Editing the image knob directory ........... 6-3
Creating a test sequence ...................... 6-3
Setting system parameters .................... 6-4
ProgrammerÕs utility disk ....................... 6-5
Operating via remote control .................. 6-6
Using the Built-In Editors ........................ 6-7
Format Editor ............................................ 6-9
Knob Functions ..................................... 6-9
Format Knob Directory Editor ............... 6-19
Models 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
viii
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Knob Directory Editor ................. 6-21
Custom Image Editor ............................. 6-24
What is a Sequence? ............................. 6-35
Sequence Knob Directory Editor .......... 6-36
Sequence Editor ..................................... 6-38
Running a Sequence .............................. 6-41
Cancelling the Sequence Mode ............ 6-42
Creating your own format file ............... 6-43
Entering the format parameters ........... 6-43
ANALOG_3.CMD Listing ..................... 6-44
Analog Video and Sync Parameters ... 6-45
Digital Video Parameters ..................... 6-48
Digital Sync Parameters ...................... 6-49
Timing Parameters .............................. 6-50
Calculated Rates ................................. 6-55
Active Video Physical Size .................. 6-56
Display Codes ..................................... 6-56
Outputs Control ................................... 6-57
Downloading formats using a DOS- compat-
ible computer ....................................... 6-60
Controlling via the Serial Port ............... 6-61
Controlling via the IEEE-488 Port ......... 6-62
Input Buffer .......................................... 6-62
Table of Contents
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Syntax .................................. 6-63
Commands .......................................... 6-63
Queries ............................................... 6-64
Output Queue ...................................... 6-64
Buffer Deadlock ................................... 6-65
The Status Byte .................................. 6-65
Requesting Service ............................. 6-65
Remote/Local Operation ..................... 6-66
IEEE-488 Status Reporting: ................................................. 6-67
Bus Commands ................................... 6-69
Common Commands .......................... 6-69
Command Language .............................. 6-75
Command and Query Finder ................. 6-75
Format Parameter Settings ................... 6-76
Format Editor Control ............................ 6-77
Format Memory Management ............... 6-78
Custom Image Primitives ...................... 6-79
Image Editor Control .............................. 6-82
Image Memory Management ................. 6-82
Sequence Editor Control ....................... 6-82
Sequence Memory Management ........... 6-83
Sequence Parameter Settings ............... 6-83
Models 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
x
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Directory Editor Control ........................ 6-83
Directory Memory Management ............ 6-84
System Parameter Settings ................... 6-84
Miscellaneous System Parameters ...... 6-85
Direct Processor Control (Reserved) ... 6-85
Alphabetical Listing of Commands ..................... 6-86
801G Memory (Information) Flow Diagram
6-177
Chapter7: Troubleshooting
7-1
Power-on ................................................... 7-2
Normal power-on ................................... 7-2
Power-on message remains .................. 7-2
Error message at power-on ................... 7-3
Unit will not power-on ............................ 7-3
ComputerInterfacing ............................... 7-3
If All Else Fails .......................................... 7-4
Chapter8:ErrorMessages
8-1
System Errors ........................................... 8-2
Power-on Self Test Messages .............. 8-2
Power Fail Message .............................. 8-4
Table of Contents
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Format Errors ............................................ 8-4
Invalid Data Error Messages ................. 8-4
Corrupt Data Error Messages ............... 8-5
System Error Message Summary ........... 8-6
Format Error Messages ........................... 8-7
Chapter9: Service
9-1
New Product Warranty ............................. 9-2
User Registration Card ............................ 9-2
Product Updates ....................................... 9-3
ServiceAgreements ................................. 9-3
In the U.S.A. .......................................... 9-3
In Europe ............................................... 9-4
Getting Your 801G* Repaired .................. 9-4
Authorized Service Centers .................... 9-4
Returning the 801G* .............................. 9-4
Models 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
xii
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AppendixA:Specifications
11-1
Model 801GC, 801GF and 801GX Specifica-
tions .................................................... 11-2
Additional Model 801GC and 801GX Specifi-
cations ................................................ 11-4
Additional Model 801GF Specifications 11-5
Index
Table of Contents
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
Models 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
xiv
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Introduction
Features
Product Overview
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features
✓ low cost
✓ p ortab le - fits in a b riefcase
✓ u ltra-sim p le con trols
✓ u ltra-fast form at-load in g & im age-d raw in g
✓ color N TSC an d PAL com p atib le com p osite an d
S-vid eo ou tp u ts on th e 801G X
✓ self calib ratin g an alog vid eo ou tp u ts
✓ in d u stry-stan d ard ou tp u t con n ectors
✓ d isp lay an d ed it form ats on th e u n it u n d er test
✓
over 100 in d u stry-stan d ard sign al form ats b u ilt-in
✓ room for u p to 300 u ser-d efin ed form ats
✓ p rogram m ab le p ixel rates u p to 150 M H z on th e
801G C an d 801G X; u p to 250 M H z on th e 801G F
✓ over 50 test im ages b u ilt-in
✓ cu stom test im ages can b e created an d saved
✓ u ser d efin ed form at-im age test seq u en cin g
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX ¥ Rev. A
1-2
Chapter 1: Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ProductOverview
The 801G series are low -cost p ortable vid eo signal
generators d esigned for basic testing and alignm ent
of variou s typ es of raster-scanned d isp lays. This
m anu al covers the 801GC, 801GF and 801GX m od -
els. Inform ation that m entions the “801G*” ap p lies
to all three m od els.
The generator is ship p ed w ith over 100 signal for-
m ats in place for d riving a variety of ind u stry-stan-
d ard d isp lays. Form ats for other d isp lays can be
added using the built-in graphics user interface editor
or a p ersonal com p u ter or term inal via the bu ilt-in
RS-232 and IEEE-448 interfaces.
Formats
A form at is a set of
sp ecification s th at
d escribe the vid eo
signal required by a
p articu lar typ e of
d isplay.
Form ats are stored in a non-volatile m em ory. This
m em ory has room for u p to 300 form ats. Perm anent
copies of industry-standard formats are stored (along
w ith the generator's operating cod e) in EPROM and
can be cop ied into form at m em ory and m od ified as
required .
The 801G* featu res over 50 test im ages that allow a
w id e variety of d isp lay criteria to be checked . The
generator has an image loop feature that can be used
for m onitor bu rn-in or at trad e show s to d isp lay a
series of im ages over and over. User d efined cu s-
tom test im ages can also be created and saved in
non-volatile m em ory.
Images
The num ber of controls on the 801G* has been m ini-
m ized to insu re sim p le op eration. Tw o knobs and 8
lighted push-buttons provide complete control of the
generator. One knob selects the vid eo signal format.
A second selects the test im age. Three pu sh-bu ttons
gate the ind ivid u al vid eo com p onents on and off.
Another three push-buttons select any of three avail-
able synchronizing signals. A seventh button allow s
all of the ou tp u ts of the generator to be tu rned on
or off w ith a single key stoke. Finally, an im age
step p ing bu tton is p rovid ed that calls u p alternate
versions of som e im ages.
Controls
Product Overview
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The ou tp u t connectors on the 801G* m atch those
fou nd on p op u lar com p u ters and vid eo system s.
These connectors elim inate the need for exp ensive
and bu lky conversion cables.
Connectors
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
1-4
Chapter 1: Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Operating Modes
Displays & Indicators
Knobs
Switches
Buttons
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
This chap ter gives you a basic overview of the
Qu antu m Data m od el 801G*’s front panel operating
m od es and how the d isp lays and controls fu nction
in the normal operating mode. Other chapters in this
m anu al cover top ics that you m ay need to know in
ord er to operate the unit. Please refer to the table of
contents or ind ex to locate ad d itional specific infor-
m ation on how to u se the 801G*.
OperatingModes
Front panel operation
The current firm w are supports three m ain m od es of
front p anel op eration:
• N ormal signal format and test image selection.
All knobs and pushbuttons function as labeled.
The u p p er knob is u sed to select form ats from
a list of formats stored in non-volatile memory.
The low er knob selects test im ages (p atterns)
from a list of built-in and user created im ages.
This is the factory d efau lt setting for how the
generator w ill op erate on norm al p ow er-u p .
This m od e is su itable for u se by engineering
and service grou p s that need to be able to
qu ickly select any com bination of form at and
test im age that they m ay need .
NormalFormat
and Images
SelectionMode
It is also p ossible to set the 801G* to continu -
ou sly cycle throu gh the test im age list u sing a
given form at in this m od e. This can be u sed
for bu rn-in testing or for ru nning single m od e
d isp lays at trad e show s.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX ¥ Rev. A
2-2
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Running a user defined test sequence. Each step
in a test sequ ence com bines one form at and
one test im age. The op erator can then go for-
w ard and backw ard s throu gh the step s u sing
a single knob. The 801G* can be p rogram m ed
so that it au tom atically enters a test sequ ence
m od e on p ow er-u p . This m od e of op eration is
su itable for a test p osition in a m anu factu ring
environment where the same series of tests and
adjustments need to be repeated on many iden-
tical d isp lays. There is less likelihood that an
op erator on the line w ill select the w rong for-
mat or skip an important alignment procedure.
TestSequence
Mode
It is also p ossible to set the 801G* to continu -
ously cycle through the steps in a test sequence.
Inform ation on creating and ru nning test se-
qu ences is contained in the “Program m ing”
chapter.
• Program m ing m od e. Form ats, the form at list,
custom images, the image list and test sequences
can be created and ed ited u sing the bu ilt-in
Grap hics User Interface (GUI). In ord er to u se
the GUI, a d isplay that is com patible w ith any
stored form at and has at least 640 active p ix-
els and 480 active lines need s to be connected
to the 801G*. The contents of the form at, cu s-
tom test im age or test sequ ence are show n on
the display. The 801G*’s knobs and buttons are
u sed to select and m od ify the d isp layed p a-
ram eters. The cu rrent bu tton fu nctions are
labeled at the bottom of the GUI screen. N o
other hard w are, other than the d isp lay, need s
to be connected to the 801GX.
Programming
Mode
Inform ation on u sing the GUI ed itors is in the
“Program m ing” chap ter.
Switching operating modes
The “Programming” chapter contains information on
sw itching betw een the op erating m od es.
Introduction and Operating Modes
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displays and Indicators (Normal Mode)
The figu re below show s a typ ical LCD d isp lay in
the normal operating mod e. Please see the “Trouble-
shooting” chapter of this manual if the LCD is show-
ing d ifferent typ es of inform ation.
This light is on w henever the 801G*; is plugged into
a live AC ou tlet and the p ow er sw itch is ON .
The horizontal scanning frequ ency rou nd ed to the
nearest kH z.
The form at’s p osition on the Form at knob list.
❖ A "=" sign ap p earing betw een the m em ory loca-
tion and name indicate the current state and saved
state exactly m atch. Pressing som e keys m ay
m od ify the cu rrent state so that it no longer
m atches the saved version.
The nam e of the cu rrent signal form at.
A ( ’ ) m ark at end ind icates a ju stified form at.
The nam e of the cu rrent test im age.
The im age’s p osition on the Im age knob list.
❖ An "m " ap p earing to the left of the im age loca-
tion ind icates m onochrom e analog vid eo.
The vertical scanning frequency (field rate) round ed
to the nearest hertz.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
2-4
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knobs
The form at knob is norm ally u sed to select a signal
form at. A form at is a set of p aram eters that sp ecify
the vid eo and sync signal requ irem ents of a p ar-
ticu lar d isp lay. Form at p aram eters inclu d e tim ing,
sync typ e, vid eo typ e, d isp lay size, etc. By tu rning
the knob, you can scroll throu gh a list of form ats
stored in non-volatile memory. The list includes many
factory d efault form ats. You can ed it the list as w ell
as ad d form ats that you create. A new form at is
load ed w ith each click of the knob. Load ing a for-
m at red raw s the cu rrent test im age and u pd ates the
LCD. If you select a form at containing erroneou s
inform ation, the ou tp u ts of the generator are au to-
m atically tu rned off and an error m essage is d is-
p layed . The knob p erform s other fu nctions w hen
the ed itors are being u sed .
Format Knob in
NormalMode
The form at knob perform s other functions w hen the
801G* is op erated in the either the test sequ ence or
GUI program m ing m od es. Please see the “Program -
m ing” chap ter for d etailed inform ation on op erat-
ing the 801G* in the other m od es.
Format Knob in
Other Modes
The im age knob is norm ally u sed to select a test
image. The exact behavior of the knob depends upon
the statu s of the “Im age” p u sh-bu tton. Tu rning the
knob w hen the bu tton is not lit scrolls throu gh the
m ain list of test im ages. The knob p erform s other
fu nctions w hen the ed itors are being u sed .
Image Knob in
NormalMode
❖ N ot all im ages are su p p orted by all signal for-
m ats. Som e im ages in the m ain im age list m ay
be skipped while certain formats are present. For
exam p le, the ColorBar im age w ill be skip p ed
w henever a m onochrom e form at is p resent. If
the cu rrently selected im age cannot be d raw n
given a new ly selected form at, the Ou tline im -
age is autom atically d raw n after the new form at
has finished load ing.
Displays, Indicators & Knobs
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Som e of the im age nam es in the m ain list m ay refer
to a su b-set of tw o or m ore d ifferent im ages. The
im ages in the su b-sets are selected by first selecting
the nam e of the d esired su b-set from the m ain im -
age list. If the su b-set consists of ju st tw o im ages,
pressing the “Image” button w ill toggle betw een the
tw o im ages. The bu tton is lit w hen the second im -
age is show ing.
If the su b-list consists of m ore than tw o im ages, the
“Im age” bu tton is first lighted by p ressing it one
tim e. The im age knob can then be u sed to select
im ages from w ithin the su b-set. The im age nam e on
the LCD w ill not change. Pressing the “Im age” bu t-
ton a second tim e w ill w ill retu rn the “Im age” knob
to norm al op eration.
❖ If there is only one test im age associated w ith a
nam e in the im age list, the “Im age” bu tton can
not be tu rned on for that im age.
All of the bu ilt-in test im ages (and their u ses) are
covered in d etail in the “Im ages” chap ter.
• A continuous cycling mode can be selected that
d raw s im ages one-after-another in an infinite
loop . This m od e is activated by rotating the
im age knob clockw ise beyond the last im age
in the im age list abou t one tu rn. When acti-
vated, the message “Loop Enabled” is displayed
on the u nit u nd er test. After a second or tw o,
the first im age in the cycle ap p ears. Tu rning
the im age knob cou nter-clockw ise w ill stop
im age loop ing.
Image Looping in
NormalMode
The im age knob p erform s other fu nctions w hen the
801G* is op erated in the either the test sequ ence or
programming mod es. Please see the “Programming”
chap ter for d etailed inform ation on op erating the
801G* in the other m od es.
Image Knob in
Other Modes
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
2-6
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Switches
The 801G* has tw o sw itches located on its left sid e.
Both sw itches are related to AC p ow er.
AC Select
This recessed slide switch sets the safe AC line voltage
operating range of the generator. The “Making Con-
nections” chap ter of this m anu al d escribes the cor-
rect p roced u re for setting this sw itch
❖ Do not change the voltage selector sw itch set-
ting while the 801G* is connected to the AC power
line. Make su re that the sw itch is in the correct
p osition before p lu gging in the 801G*.
Power Switch
This rocker switch turns the power on and off. Press-
ing the sid e of the sw itch w ith the color d ot or the
nu m ber “1” tu rns the p ow er on.
❖ CAUTIO N :H old ing d ow n any of the buttons on
the front p anel w hile tu rning on p ow er m ay
p rod u ce u nexp ected and extrem ely u nd esirable
resu lts. Please see the “Program m ing” chap ter
for inform ation on u sing sp ecial p ow er-u p bu t-
ton com binations.
Switches
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buttons
The 801G* has a total of eight push-button sw itches,
arranged into fou r fu nction grou p s: Im age, Vid eo
Gate, Sync Gate, and Ou tp u ts. All of the bu ttons
have built-in indicators. When illuminated, a button’s
fu nction is consid ered on (or enabled ).
This section of the m anu al d escribes the fu nctions
of the buttons when the 801G* is in the normal mode
of op eration The bu ttons are u sed for other fu nc-
tions w hen the 801G* is op erated in and a test se-
qu en ce or p rogram m in g m od e. Please see th e
“Programming” chapter for d etailed information on
op erating the 801G* in the other m od es.
❖ CAUTIO N :H old ing d ow n any of the buttons on
the front p anel w hile tu rning on p ow er m ay
p rod u ce u nexp ected and extrem ely u nd esirable
resu lts. Please see the “Program m ing” chap ter
for inform ation on u sing sp ecial p ow er-u p bu t-
ton com binations.
Image Button
The Im age p u sh-bu tton d eterm ines the behavior of
the “Im age” knob in the norm al op erating m od e.
Please see an earlier section on the “Im age” knob
for inform ation on how the bu tton interacts w ith
the knob.
❖ If there is only one test im age associated w ith a
nam e in the im age list, the “Im age” bu tton can
not be tu rned on for that im age.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
2-8
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Gate Buttons
The Vid eo Gate bu ttons tu rn ind ivid u al color ou t-
p u ts on and off. They also control the ad sd ition of
primary color information to the N TSC / PAL vid eo
ou tp u ts on the 801GX.
• The R p u sh-bu tton tu rns all of the red vid eo
ou tp u ts on and off.
• The G p u sh-bu tton norm ally tu rns all of the
green vid eo ou tp u ts on and off. When a 2-bit
d igital m onochrom e (MDA) signal is being
generated , the G p u sh-bu tton tu rns the I (in-
tensity) signal of the vid eo p air on and off.
• The B p u sh-bu tton norm ally tu rns all of the
blu e vid eo ou tp u ts on and off. When a 1 or 2-
bit d igital m onochrom e signal is being gener-
ated , the B p u sh-bu tton tu rns the V (vid eo)
signal on and off.
❖ The m aster ou tp u t gating bu tton overrid es the
settings of these bu ttons w hen tu rned off.
Many of the built-in analog vid eo signal formats are
stored w ith the RGB vid eo signal typ e selected . If
you are testing a monochrome monitor with the same
tim ing, you can toggle betw een color and m ono-
chrom e m od es by p ressing both R and B p u sh-bu t-
tons sim u ltaneou sly.
Analog
Monochrome
Operation
❖ An “m ” ap p earing to the left of the im age loca-
tion on the LCD w ind ow ind icates that m ono-
chrom e analog vid eo has been selected .
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sync Gate Buttons
The bu ttons in this grou p select the typ e of sync
signal that is u sed to synchronize the d isp lay. De-
pend ing on a particular format’s settings, more than
one typ e of sync can be selected by p ressing tw o
bu ttons at a tim e.
• The ACS (Analog Com p osite Sync) p u sh-bu t-
ton cau ses analog sync to be ou tp u t on one or
m ore of the analog vid eo ou tp u ts.
• The DCS (sep arate Digital Com p osite Sync)
push-button causes a separate d igital com pos-
ite sync signal (CS) to be ou tp u t.
• The DSS (separate Digital Separate Sync) push-
bu tton cau ses sep arate d igital horizontal and
vertical sync signals to be ou tp u t.
❖ A d efau lt sync typ e is au tom atically selected
w henever a new form at is selected . N ot all sync
types are available with all formats. For example,
d igital vid eo formats w ill not allow analog com-
p osite sync to be selected . If a bu tton w ill not
light u p w hen p ressed , then the corresp ond ing
sync typ e is u navailable.
Re-d epressing a sync gate button causes the selected
sync to be toggled either on or off. When toggled
off, no sync w ill be sent to the d isp lay and the d is-
p lay w ill be allow ed to free-ru n.
❖ The individual settings are overridden (gated off)
w henever the m aster ou tp u ts bu tton is tu rned
off.
Outputs Button
This is the m aster ou tp u t signal control. When the
m aster ou tp u t control is tu rned off, all of the signal
ou tp u ts of the generator are d isabled .
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
2-10
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Built-In Formats
Introduction
Format charts
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
The charts on the following pages list the generator’s
built-in formats library. These are stored in read only
m em ory (ROM) along w ith the generator’s op erat-
ing cod e. They can be u sed as starting p oints for
creating your own formats and new ones can be added
to the nonvolatile RAM. A m axim um of 300 form ats
can be stored in RAM.
The sam e form at library is u sed for all m od els in
the 801G series. Som e form ats are for d isp lays and
graphics system s that m ay not be com patible w ith a
specific generator m od el. If a form at has too high of
a pixel rate, a modified version of the format is placed
in RAM w ith red u ced horizontal tim ing p aram eters
that bring the p ixel clock rate below the lim it of the
generator. The horizontal and vertical rates how -
ever are correct. This lets you light-up a d isplay and
verify most of its operation. These mod ified formats
are created by the m em ory re-intialization rou tine.
In other cases the library form at m ay have a vid eo
type or sync type selection that m ay not be com pat-
ible w ith a sp ecific generator m od el. Attem p ting to
load an incom p atible form at w ill give you an error
message.
The charts give only a general d escrip tion of each
form at. More d etailed inform ation can be obtained
in one of the follow ing w ays.
■
■
You can u se the Format test im age to d isplay a
d etailed list of p aram eters of any form at in
firm w are or RAM.
You can u se the bu ilt-in Grap hics User Inter-
face to view and ed it the contents of any for-
m at. Also you can check, m od ify, and cop y
formats with a terminal or computer connected
to a generator’s com m u nications p ort.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX ¥ Rev. A
3-2
Chapter 3: Built-In Formats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The inform ation in the charts is believed to be accu-
rate and com p lete at the tim e that this m anu al w as
w rritten. Last m inu te firm w are changes and new
firm w are releases m ay affect the form at inform a-
tion stored in EPROM.
Explanation of Terms Used in Charts
File N am e N am e of th e form at file as saved in EPROM
Vid eo Typ e C3 = 3-bit d igital color
C4 = 4-bit d igital color (CGA)
C6 = 6-bit d igital color (EGA)
M2 = 2-bit d igital m onochrom e
RGB = sep arate red , green an d blu e an alog color
Mono = analog monochrome. EYC = analog color television
(w / su bcarrier) / S-vid eo (sep arate lu m i and chrom a).
H oriz x Vert N u m ber of active p ixels in th e h orizon tal d irection an d
Active Pixels the nu m ber of active scan lines in the vertical d irection
N OTE: Th e n u m ber of active p ixels sh ow n is for th e
original form at file as it’s stored in ROM. The firm w are
may red uce this number if the original value w ould cause
th e calcu lated p ixel clock rate to exceed th e p ixel clock
lim it for the generator.
Line Rate Horizontal scanning frequency in KHz rounded to 3 places
p ast the d ecim al
Fram e Rate Pictu re refresh rate in H z rou n d ed to 3 p laces p ast th e
d ecim al
A bu llet (• ) after the vertical rate ind icates the nu m ber is
th e fram e rate for a 2:1 in terlaced form at.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Built-inFormats
Frame
Rate
Video
Type
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
Line
Rate
File Name
IBM Digital
MDA_M7
HGC_text
HGCgraph
CGA_M14
EGA_m2
M2
M2
M2
C4
C6
C3
C3
720 x 350
720 x 350
720 x 348
640 x 200
640 x 350
640 x 400
640 x 400
18.432
18.141
18.519
15.700
21.851
25.560
27.648
49.816
49.030
50.051
59.924
59.702
60.000
64.749
IBM_3179
IBM_3164
Frame
Rate
Video
Type
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
Line
Rate
File Name
AT&T
AT&T_SVC
AT&T_IVC
AT&T_EVC
C6
C6
C6
640 x 400
640 x 400
640 x 350
25.862
25.862
25.862
59.866
59.866
59.866
Frame
Rate
Video
Type
RGB
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
640 x 400
Line
Rate
30.296
File Name
IBM Analog
PGA_400
PGA_480
VGA_m1
VGA_m2
VGA_m3
VGA_m4
XGA_m4a
XGA_m4b
XGA_m5
XGA_m6
XGA6475
XGA1076
59.638
59.638
70.087
70.087
59.941
43.478¥
43.453¥
43.470¥
70.008
51.476¥
75.000
75.782
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
640 x 480
720 x 350
720 x 400
640 x 480
1024 x 768
1053 x 754
1056 x 768
1024 x 768
1360 x 1024
640 x 480
1024 x 768
30.296
31.469
31.469
31.469
35.522
35.414
35.602
56.287
56.469
39.375
61.080
Frame
Rate
60.000
60.002
67.003
67.003
Video
Type
RGB
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
1024 x 1024
Line
Rate
63.360
File Name
IBM Workstation
IBM6Km1
IBM6Km2
IBM6Km3
IBM6Km4
RGB
RGB
RGB
1280 x 1024
1280 x 1024
1280 x 1024
63.363
70.755
70.755
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
3-4
Chapter 3: Built-In Formats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Built-in Formats Ð cont.
Frame
Rate
Video
Type
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
Line
Rate
File Name
VESA
(Video
Electronics
Standards
Association)
VG900601
VG900602
VS900603
VS901101
VG901101
VG910801
DMT6475
DMT648A
DMT648B
DMT6485
DMT7285
DMT8075
DMT8085
DMT1075
DMT1085
DMT1170
DMT1175
DMT1185
DMT1243
DMT126A
DMT1260
DMT127A
DMT1275
DMT128A
DMT1285
DMT1648
DMT1660
DMT1665
DMT1670
DMT1675
DMT1680
DMT1685
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
800 x 600
800 x 600
35.156
37.879
48.077
37.861
48.363
56.476
37.500
37.861
37.861
43.269
37.927
46.875
53.674
60.023
68.677
63.851
67.500
77.094
46.433
60.000
63.981
75.000
79.976
85.938
91.146
62.500
75.000
81.250
87.500
93.750
100.000
106.259
56.250
60.317
72.188
72.809
60.004
70.069
75.000
85.080
85.080
85.008
85.083
75.000
85.061
75.029
84.997
70.012
75.000
84.999
43.436¥
60.000
60.020
75.000
75.025
85.002
85.024
48.040¥
60.000
65.000
70.000
75.000
80.000
85.000
800 x 600
640 x 480
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
640 x 480
640 x 350
640 x 400
640 x 480
720 x 400
800 x 600
800 x 600
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1152 x 864
1152 x 864
1152 x 864
1280 x 1024
1280 x 960
1280 x 1024
1280 x 960
1280 x 1024
1280 x 960
1280 x 1024
1600 x 1200
1600 x 1200
1600 x 1200
1600 x 1200
1600 x 1200
1600 x 1200
1600 x 1200
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Built-in Formats Ð cont.
Frame
Rate
Video
Type
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
Line
Rate
File Name
Macintosh
MAC_TVus RGB
MAC_TVos RGB
MAC_12m Mono
640 x 480
512 x 384
512 x 384
512 x 384
560 x 384
640 x 480
640 x 480
640 x 480
640 x 870
832 x 624
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1152 x 870
15.734
15.734
24.480
24.480
24.480
34.975
35.000
35.000
68.850
49.107
48.193
60.241
68.681
29.970¥
29.970¥
60.147
60.147
60.147
66.619
66.667
66.667
75.000
75.087
59.278
74.927
75.062
MAC_12c
RGB
RGB
MAC_12ce
MAC_13LC RGB
MAC_13m Mono
MAC_13c
MAC_15
MAC_16
RGB
Mono
RGB
MAC_1960 RGB
MAC_19
MAC_21
RGB
RGB
Frame
Rate
Video
Type
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
Line
Rate
File Name
Japanese NEC
NECPC400 RGB
NECPC750 RGB
640 x 400
24.823
32.857
56.416
1120 x 750
40.021¥
Frame
Rate
Video
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
Line
Rate
File Name
Type
Sun
Microsystems
Workstation
SUN1061
SUN1077
SUN1166
SUN116B
SUN1176
SUN117B
SUN1267
SUN126B
SUN1276
SUN1667
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
1024 x 1024
1024 x 768
1152 x 900
1152 x 900
1152 x 900
1152 x 900
1280 x 1024
1280 x 1024
1280 x 1024
1600 x 1280
65.267
62.040
61.796
61.846
71.713
71.809
71.722
71.678
81.130
89.286
61.399
77.069
65.950
66.004
76.047
76.149
66.718
66.677
76.107
66.931
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
3-6
Chapter 3: Built-In Formats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Built-in Formats Ð cont.
Frame
Rate
Video
Type
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
Line
Rate
File Name
Hewlett Packard
HP1060
HP1070
HP1075A
HP1075B
HP1260
HP1272
HP1275
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1280 x 1024
1280 x 1024
1280 x 1024
47.700
56.476
62.937
60.241
63.338
78.125
79.976
60.000
70.069
74.925
75.020
59.979
72.005
75.025
Frame
Rate
71.799
Video
Type
RGB
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
1024 x 768
Line
Rate
57.870
File Name
Japanese Sony
Monitor
SON1072
SON1274
SON1276
RGB
RGB
1280 x 1024
1280 x 1024
78.855
81.206
74.112
76.179
Frame
Rate
Video
Type
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
Line
Rate
File Name
Intercolor
Workstation
INT1160
INT1176
INT1660
INT1676
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
1184 x 884
1184 x 884
1664 x 1248
1664 x 1248
55.200
71.712
77.940
100.73
60.000
76.047
60.00
76.020
Frame
Rate
Video
Type
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
Line
Rate
File Name
Barco
BAR2060
BAR2080
BAR2560
RGB
RGB
RGB
2048 x 2048
2048 x 1536
2560 x 2048
126.86
126.86
126.91
60.008
79.187
60.034
Frame
Rate
Video
Type
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
Line
Rate
File Name
PAL Component
Video
PAL_Y
PAL_Yus
PAL_Yos
RGB
RGB
RGB
920 x 574
768 x 575
640 x 480
15.625
15.625
15.625
25.000¥
25.000¥
25.000¥
Frame
Rate
29.970¥
29.970¥
29.970
Video
Type
RGB
RGB
RGB
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
752 x 484
640 x 480
512 x 384
Line
Rate
15.734
15.734
15.734
File Name
RS 170 Video
RS170Y
RS170Yus
RS170Yos
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Built-in Formats Ð cont.
Frame
Rate
Video
Type
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
Line
Rate
File Name
PAL Encoded
PAL_4xSC
EYC
EYC
EYC
EYC
EYC
910 x 574
720 x 574
768 x 574
640 x 480
910 x 574
15.625
15.625
15.625
15.625
15.625
25.000¥
25.000¥
25.000¥
25.000¥
25.000¥
Video
PALTV601
PAL_TVus
PAL_TVos
PAL_N
Frame
Rate
Video
Type
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
Line
Rate
File Name
NTSC Encoded
NTSC_443
EYC
752 x 484
752 x 484
720 x 484
640 x 480
512 x 384
15.734
15.734
15.734
15.734
15.734
29.970¥
29.970¥
29.970¥
29.970¥
29.970¥
Video
NTSC4xSC EYC
NTSC_601
NTSCTVus
NTSCTVos
EYC
EYC
EYC
Frame
Rate
Video
Type
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
Line
Rate
File Name
HDTV Component
Video
HDTV_1J
HDTV_2J
HDTV_4J
RGB‡
RGB‡
RGB‡
1920 x 1035
1920 x 1035
1920 x 1035
1920 x 1152
1920 x 1152
1872 x 1152
33.750
33.750
33.750
31.250
31.250
31.250
30.000¥
30.000¥
30.000¥
25.000¥
25.000¥
25.000¥
HDTV_1E RGB‡
HDTV_2E RGB‡
HDTV_4E RGB‡
Frame
Rate
Video
Horiz x Vert
Active Pixels
Line
Rate
File Name
Type
Generator
Diagnostics
TEST150
TEST250
RGB
RGB
2048 x 1024
2048 x 2048
50.403
79.719
46.887
35.861¥
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
3-8
Chapter 3: Built-In Formats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Description of the test images
and how to use them
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
This chap ter covers all of the bu ilt-in test im ages
(p atterns) in a stand ard m od el 801G* generator. It
is also p ossible to ad d cu stom , u ser d efined test
im ages to thegenerator. Inform ation on m od ifying
and ad d ing cu stom test im ages can be fou nd in the
“Program m ing” chap ter.
Information on how to select the various images can
be fou nd in the “Basic Op eration” chap ter of this
m a n u a l. Th e “ Tr o u b le s h o o t in g ” ch a p t e r h a s
inform ation on resetting the 801GX to its factory
d efau lt cond itions.
The rem aind er of this chap ter d escribes each of the
im ages in d etail. The p u rp ose of each im age is
included in the description. The images are presented
in the sam e ord er as they are in the table. Most of
the im ages are p resented in the form at show n on
the next p age.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX ¥ Rev. X1
4-2
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Im ageN am e
Description
This tells how the im age is d raw n on the d isplay. A
black and w hite d raw ing of the im age is inclu d ed
as p art of the d escrip tion.
Drawing of the Image
Test
N am e of the test to be d one
The nam e of the test d escribes the typ e of test to
be d one.
Pu rp ose
Method
Why this typ e of test shou ld be d one
A general gu id e on how to p erform the test
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Descriptions of the Images
Acer1
Description
Sp ecia l test im a g e sp ecified by som e d isp la y
m anu factu rers. Consists of tw o sets of color bars
and five blocks of “#” characters on a white crosshatch
w itha black backgrou nd .
Acer2
Description
Sp ecia l test im a g e sp ecified by som e d isp la y
m anu factu rers. Consists of colorbars, lines of “#”
characters and a green bord er.
Acer3, Acer4, Acer5 an d Acer6
Description
Sp ecial test im ages sp ecified by som e d isp lay
m anu factu rers. Consists of a large and sm all w hite
circles centered on either a yellow (Acer3), m agenta
(Acer4), cyan (Acer5) or w hite (Acer6) crosshatch
on a black backgrou nd .
Acer7 an d Acer 8
Description
Sp ecia l test im a g e sp ecified by som e d isp la y
manufacturers. Consists of five blocks of either white
“#” (Acer7) or “H ” (Acer8) characters on a black
background .
Acer9
Description
Sp ecia l test im a g e sp ecified by som e d isp la y
manufacturers. Consists of mostly a w hite field w ith
tw o row s of color bars at the bottom .
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-4
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLU_EM , G RN _EM , RED _EM , WH T_EM ,
M EM ESon y, M ESon y_B, M ESon y_G , an d
M ESon y_R
Descrip tion
In the p rim ary version, the screen is filled w ith
blu e (BLU and B), green (GRN and G), red (R), or
w hite (WH T and MEMESony) EM characters on a
black backgrou nd . A bit m ap of a single character
is show n here.
Only the w hite character has a second ary version.
It ’s d r a w n w it h b la ck ch a r a ct er s o n a w h it e
backgrou nd .
Test
Focu s
Pu rp ose
This p attern is sp ecified by one or m ore d isp lay
m anu factu rers for checking and ad ju sting focu s
on their p rod u cts one color at a tim e.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLU_EM +, G RN _EM +, RED _EM +, WH T_EM +,
M EM EPlu s, M EPlu s_B, M EPlu s_G , an d
M EPlu s_R
Descrip tion
In the p rim ary version, the screen is filled w ith
blu e (BLU and B), green (GRN and G), red (R), or
w hite (WH T and MEMEPlu s) EM character block
on a black backgrou n d . A bit m ap of a sin gle
character block is show n here.
Only the w hite character has a second ary version.
It ’s d r a w n w it h b la ck ch a r a ct er s o n a w h it e
backgrou nd .
Test
Focu s
Pu rp ose
This p attern is sp ecified by one or m ore d isp lay
m anu factu rers for checking and ad ju sting focu s
on their p rod u cts one color at a tim e.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-6
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLU_PIC, G RAY_PIC, G RN _PIC, RED _PIC,
WH T_PIC, Flat, Flat G ray, Flat_B, Flat_G , an d
Flat_R
Descrip tion
A solid blu e (BLU), gray, green (GRN ), red , or
w hite (WH T) box fills the active vid eo area.
Only the w hite fill has a second ary version. It can
be changed to a black fill.
Test
Pu rity ad ju stm ent
Pu rp ose
To p rod u ce correct colors in a d isp layed im age,
the electron beam s from each of the three (3) gu ns
in th e CRT sh ou ld strike on ly th eir m atch in g
phosphors. A w hite image show s patches of various
colors on a m onitor w ith bad p u rity. The p u rity
ad ju stm ent(s) shou ld be p erform ed before d oing
any brightness or color tests. In som e cases, p u rity
ad ju stm ents involve loosening and rep ositioning
the yoke, in w hich case p u rity shou ld be ad ju sted
p rior to d oing any geom etry tests.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLU_PIC, G RAY_PIC, G RN _PIC, RED _PIC,
WH T_PIC, Flat, Flat G ray, Flat_B, Flat_G , an d
Flat_R — con td .
Method
The m ethod s u sed for ad ju sting p u rity on a color
m onitor d ep end on the typ e of m onitor and CRT
you ’re u sing (for exam p le; Delta, In-Line or Single
Gu n). In m ost cases, the first step is to d egau ss
the CRT.
N ote – For a Delta Gu n CRT, tu rn on on ly th e Red ou tp u t. A
solid u n iform field of red sh ou ld be d isp layed . If th e color is
n ot u n iform , ad ju st th e yoke an d th e Pu rity Tabs assem bly.
If p u rity cannot be corrected to accep table lim its,
the m onitor m ay not have been p rop erly d egau ssed
or there m ay be a d efect in the CRT or p u rity
assem bly.
Test
Shad ow m ask w arp ing
Pu rp ose
The p u rity characteristics of you r CRT can change
over tim e if you leave it on w ith a lot of vid eo
being d isp layed . This m ay be d u e to the CRT’s
electron beam s strikin g its sh ad ow m ask w ith
enou gh energy to cau se the m ask to heat. This
in ter n al h eatin g m ay be en ou gh to cau se th e
shad ow m ask to w arp and give bad p u rity.
Method
Set the purity im age to w hite and allow the m onitor
to ru n for a few m inu tes. Any m ask w arp ing show s
u p as a change in p u rity. You can u se a color
m eter to m easu re the change. The BriteBox p attern
also m ay be u sefu l for m easu ring shad ow m ask
w arp ing.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-8
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Box_50m m an d Box_64m m
Descrip tion
The p rim ary version has a solid w hite box in the
center of the active vid eo. Dep end ing on the im age
selected , th e box is eith er 50 m illim eters (1.97
inches) or 64 m illim eters (2.52 inches) squ are. If
there’s room , inform ation on the cu rrent form at
appears below and to the left of the box. This show s
the nu m ber of active p ixels and lines as w ell as
the horizontal and vertical scan rates. An I after
the nu m ber of active lines ind icates the form at is
interlaced . The second ary version d raw s a black
box and black text on a w hite backgrou nd .
N ote – Th e box w ill be th e correct size on ly if th e correct
p h ysical active vid eo size is set in th e form at.
640 x 480
H= 31.469 KHz
V= 59.940 Hz
Test
Brightness control ad ju stm ent
Pu rp ose
The w rong brightness setting m ay cau se other tests
su ch as Contrast, Focus and Beam Size to be invalid .
An accurate brightness setting helps give repeatable
m easu rem ents throu ghou t other tests.
Method
Center you r light m eter p robe w ithin the center
squ are and ad ju st the m onitor’s brightness control
to obtain the requ ired light m eter read ing.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BriteBox
Descrip tion
The p rim ary version has a single w hite box in the
center of active vid eo. The box size is controlled
by th e MSIZ system p aram eter. Th e secon d ary
version (sh ow n below ) ad d s fou r boxes in th e
corners of active vid eo.
Test
Brightness control ad ju stm ent
Pu rp ose
The w rong brightness setting m ay cau se other tests
su ch as Contrast, Focus and Beam Size to be invalid .
An accurate brightness setting helps give repeatable
m easu rem ents throu ghou t other tests.
Method
Center you r light m eter p robe w ithin the center
squ are and ad ju st the m onitor’s brightness control
to obtain the requ ired light m eter read ing.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-10
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BriteBox — con td .
Test
Brightness u niform ity
Pu rp ose
Th e ligh t ou tp u t of m ost p ictu re tu bes v aries
slightly w hen m easu red across the CRT face. This
test can be u sed to verify that the light ou tp u t
variation is w ithin you r sp ec lim its.
Method
Select t h e in v er t ed v er sio n a n d p er fo r m t h e
Brightness Control Adjustment test on the center
box. Then center the light m eter p robe in each of
the corner squ ares and note the read ing you get
for each squ are. The d eviation betw een each of
the corner read ings and the center read ing shou ld
be w ithin you r sp ec lim its.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bu rst
(TV form ats on ly)
Description:
The left sid e start w ith reference w hite (+100 IRE)
and black (+7.5 IRE) levels. This is follow ed by six
bu rsts of sine w aves. Each bu rst is at a d ifferent
frequ ency form ing vertical lines of variou s w id ths.
The frequ encies, going from left to right, are 0.5, 1,
2, 3, 3.58 and 4.43 MH z.
Frequ ency Resp onse
Test:
Method :
When view ed on a TV screen, the p eak intensities
of the all of the bu rsts shou ld m atch the w hite
reference level. The d arkest p ortions betw een the
p eaks shou ld m atch the black reference level.
The im age can also be u sed w ith a TV w aveform
analyzer to check the frequ ency response of a vid eo
system. One scan line of the image, as it would appear
on a w aveform analyzer, is show n at the top of the
next page. High frequency roll-off (loss) would show
u p as a d ecrease in the p eak-to-p eak sw ings on the
right sid e of the w aveform . Low frequ ency roll-off
w ou ld show u p as a d ecrease in the p eak-to-p eak
sw ings on the left sid e of the w aveform .
Som e w aveform analyzers can be set to d etect and
d isp lay th e am p litu d e of th e p eaks. A typ ical
am p litu d e w aveform for a good system is show n at
the bottom of the next p age.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-12
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch eck 511
Descrip tion
Five sm all boxes are p laced in the corners and at
the center of active vid eo. The boxes are on a black
backgrou nd . Each box consists of alternating black
a n d w h it e p ixe ls t h a t fo r m
a
v e r y fin e
checkerboard . The second ary version inverts the
im age, creating a w hite backgrou nd . The colors
of th e in d ivid u al p ixels in th e boxes also are
inverted .
Test
Verify m onitor resolu tion
Pu rp ose
The resolu tion of you r m onitor shou ld m eet or
exceed the d esign sp ecs.
Method
First ad ju st the brightness, contrast, and focu s to
their correct settings. You shou ld be able to see
ind ivid u al and d istinct p ixels in each of the boxes.
Failu re to see d istinct p ixels m ay ind icate you have
a d efective vid eo am p lifier, focu s correction circu it
or p ictu re tu be.
N ote – If m u lticolored areas ap p ear on
a
m ask-typ e color
p ictu re tu be, you m ay h ave a p roblem w ith con vergen ce or
you m ay be exceed in g th e resolu tion of th e p ictu re tu be.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch eck By3
Descrip tion
The active vid eo area is equ ally d ivid ed into a
three by three checkerboard of black and w hite
boxes. The p rim ary version has fou r w hite boxes
as show n in the figu re on the left. The second ary
version has five w hite boxes as show n in the figu re
on the right.
Test
Contrast ratio
Pu rp ose
The p attern is based on a p rop osed AN SI m ethod
of m easu ring the contrast ratio of vid eo p rojection
system s.
Method
Using a su itable light m eter p robe, m easu re and
record the light-level read ing (in foot lam berts)
in the center of each of the black and w hite boxes.
The contrast ratio is exp ressed as the average of
all of the w hite read ings d ivid ed by the average
of all of the black read ings.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-14
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch eck _11
Descrip tion
The active vid eo area is filled w ith alternating black
a n d w h it e p ixe ls t h a t fo r m v e r y fin e
a
checkerboard . The second ary version inverts the
colors in th e im age. Th e in verted im age looks
alm ost the sam e as the non-inverted version.
Test
Verify m onitor resolu tion
Pu rp ose
The resolu tion of you r m onitor shou ld m eet or
exceed the d esign sp ecs.
Method
Ad ju st the brightness, contrast, and focu s to their
correct settings first. You shou ld be able to see
ind ivid u al and d istinct p ixels in each of the boxes.
Failu re to see d istinct p ixels m ay ind icate you have
a d efective vid eo am p lifier, focu s correction circu it
or p ictu re tu be.
N ote – If m u lticolored areas ap p ear on
a
m ask-typ e color
p ictu re tu be, you m ay h ave a p roblem w ith con vergen ce or
you m ay be exceed in g th e resolu tion of th e p ictu re tu be.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CirclesL
Descrip tion
Th is im age m ay be called for by som e d isp lay
m anu factu rers’ test p roced u res. The im age consists
of five large w hite circles on a black backgrou nd .
The circles are p ositioned in the center and in the
corners of the active vid eo area.
The second ary version inverts the im age to black
circles on a w hite backgrou nd .
Pu rp ose
This p attern is sp ecified by one or m ore m onitor
m anu factu rers for checking and ad ju sting vid eo
scan size, linearity and over scanning.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-16
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CirclesS
Descrip tion
Th is im age m ay be called for by som e d isp lay
m anu factu rers’ test p roced u res. The im age consists
of eight sm all w hite circles on a black backgrou nd .
The circles are p ositioned in the corners of the
active vid eo area and centered on each ed ge of
the active vid eo area.
The second ary version inverts the im age to black
circles on a w hite backgrou nd .
Pu rp ose
This p attern is sp ecified by one or m ore m onitor
m anu factu rers for checking and ad ju sting vid eo
scan size, linearity and over scanning.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ColorBar
Descrip tion
The primary version has 16 full-height vertical color
bars. The ord er of the bars is show n below . The
second ary version sp lits the field into a top and
bottom half. The bars in the bottom half of the
screen are in reverse ord er.
Wh en d igital vid eo is bein g ou tp u t, 33% Gray
changes to 50% Gray and 67% Gray becom es either
Black or som e gray level d ep end ing on how the
d isp lay interp rets the vid eo inform ation.
Test
Verify that all vid eo channels is fu nctional
Pu rp ose
To verify that none of the vid eo channels are bad
or hooked u p incorrectly
Method
Com p are the sequ ence of color bars w ith the table.
Missing bars m ay ind icate a d ead or u nconnected
channel. The transition betw een the bars shou ld
be sharp and d istinct. Each bar also shou ld be
u niform in color and intensity across its entire
w id th. N on-u niform ity m ay ind icate problem s w ith
the resp onse of the vid eo am p lifiers. If all the bars
are p resent bu t in the w rong ord er, one or m ore
inp u ts m ay be sw ap p ed .
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-18
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cu b es
Descrip tion
This is an anim ated im age consisting of one sm all
m u lt ico lo r e d cu b e o r b it in g a r o u n d a la r g e r
m u lticolored cu be. Each cu be also is sp inning on
its ow n axis. The d efau lt text string says Quantum
Data. The text can be m od ified and saved u sing
com m and s sent over the com m u nications p orts.
The p rim ary version has a black backgrou nd and
a thick green bord er. The second ary version u ses
ju st a w hite backgrou nd .
Quantum Data
Pu rp ose
Can be u sed for show d em onstrations w ith you r
ow n text.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cu stom
Descrip tion
This im age has a w hite bord er arou nd the active
vid eo, a centered sm aller yellow box, and green
d iagonals.
Pu rp ose
This im age is an exam p le of som e of the available
d raw ing primitives. It’s not intend ed to be an image
su itable for testing or ad ju sting a d isp lay. Rather,
it can be u sed as a starting p oint for d evelop ing
a cu stom im age of you r ow n.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-20
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D ot_10, D ot_12, D ot_24
Descrip tion
The active vid eo area is filled w ith m u ltip le row s
of w hite single p ixel d ots. The d ots d efine the
corners of w hat w ou ld ap p ear to be squ are boxes
if all the connecting p ixels w ere lit. The nu m ber
of row s of boxes and the nu m ber of boxes p er
row d ep end s on w hich version of the im age is
selected and the screen asp ect ratio of the cu rrently
load ed form at. The nu m ber in the im age’s nam e
refers to the nu m ber of boxes that w ill be form ed
along the m inor axis for m ost asp ect ratios. The
firm w are calcu lates the ratio and then find s the
closest m atch from the follow ing table.
Aspect Ratio
Dot_10
Dot_12
Dot_24
Number
of Rows
Boxes
per Row
Number
of Rows
Boxes
per Row
Number
of Rows
Boxes
per Row
W : H
Decimal
16 : 9
5 : 3
1.777É
1.666 É
10
16
16
10
16
16
18
32
30
10
10
18
4 : 3
1 : 1
3 : 4
1.333 É
1.000
10
10
14
14
10
10
12
12
16
16
12
12
24
24
32
32
24
24
0.750
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D ot_10, D ot_12, D ot_24 — con td .
Pu rp ose
In ord er to accu rately p rod u ce an im age on a color
m onitor, the three electron beam s in the CRT m u st
m eet (converge) at the exact sam e location at the
sam e tim e. Sm all d ots d isplayed on a m isconverged
m onitor ap p ear as a grou p of m u lticolored d ots.
Method
Th e co n v e r g e n ce a d ju s t m e n t s o f m o s t co lo r
m onitors fall into tw o m ain categories.
The first set of ad ju stm ents, u su ally called Static
Convergence, aligns the three beam s in the center
of the d isp lay. The id ea is to tu rn on all three
g u n s a n d a d ju st th e v a r iou s m a g n ets on th e
convergence assem bly to p rod u ce all w hite d ots
in th e cen ter of th e d isp lay. Th e con vergen ce
a ssem b ly is loca ted on th e n eck of th e CRT.
Different m onitors and CRT types m ay each require
their ow n m agnet-ad ju stm ent sequ ence.
A ft e r t h e ce n t e r o f t h e d is p la y is p r o p e r ly
converged , the ou ter areas are ad ju sted by u sing
the m onitor’s Dynamic Convergence controls. The
nu m ber of controls, the area of the screen they
affect, and their ad ju stm ent p roced u re d ep end s
on the m onitor you ’re testing.
Test
Focu s ad ju stm ent(s)
Pu rp ose
An ou t-of-focu s m on itor d isp lays fu zzy p ixels
w hich, in tu rn, resu lt in p oorly form ed and hard -
to-read characters.
Method
On m onitors w ith a single (static) focus ad justm ent,
ad ju st the control for the best average focu s over
the entire screen. The focu s at certain locations
shou ld be w ithin sp ecified lim its.
Som e m on itors h ave a static an d on e or m ore
d ynam ic focu s controls. The sequ ence for ad ju sting
them and the areas of the screen they affect d ep end
on the m onitor you ’re testing.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-22
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EM ITest1
Description
Sp ecia l test im a g e u sed for Electr o-M a g n etic
Interference (EMI) testing of d isp lays. The entire
active video area is filled with a small “H” character.
The p rim ary version of the im age d raw s w hite
characters on a black backgrou nd . The second ary
v e r s io n d r a w s b la ck ch a r a ct e r s o n a w h it e
background .
EM ITest2
Description
Sam e as EMITest1 bu t w ith th e bottom row of
characters contstantly being d raw n left to right and
then cleared .
EM ITest3
Descrip tion
Sam e as EMITest1 bu t w ith a sm aller version of the
“H ” character.
EM ITest4
Descrip tion
Sam e as EMITest2 bu t w ith a sm aller version of the
“H ” character.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focu s_@6, Focu s_@7, Focu s_@8
Descrip tion
In the p rim ary versions, the screen is filled w ith
w hite “@” characters on a black backgrou nd . Bit
m ap s of a single character for the three d ifferent
im ages are show n here.
Th e secon d ary v ersion s are d raw n w ith black
characters on a w hite backgrou nd .
Test
Focu s ad ju stm ent(s)
Pu rp ose
An ou t-of-focu s m onitor d isp lays fu zzy grap hic
im a g es a n d p oor ly for m ed , h a r d -to-r ea d text
characters.
Method
On m onitors w ith a single (static) focus ad justm ent,
ad ju st the control for the best average focu s over
the entire screen. The focu s at certain locations of
the screen shou ld be w ithin sp ecified lim its.
Som e m on itors h ave a static an d on e or m ore
d ynam ic focu s controls. The sequ ence for ad ju sting
them and the areas of the screen that they affect
d ep end on the m onitor you ’re testing.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-24
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focu s_Cx
Descrip tion
In the p rim ary version, the screen is filled w ith
w hite Cx characters on a black backgrou nd . A bit
m ap of a single character is show n here.
Th e s e co n d a r y v e r s io n is d r a w n w it h b la ck
characters on a w hite backgrou nd .
Test
Focu s ad ju stm ent(s)
Pu rp ose
An ou t-of-focu s m onitor d isp lays fu zzy grap hic
im a g es a n d p oor ly for m ed , h a r d -to-r ea d text
characters.
Method
On m onitors w ith a single (static) focus ad justm ent,
ad ju st the control for the best average focu s over
the entire screen. The focu s at certain locations of
the screen shou ld be w ithin sp ecified lim its.
Som e m on itors h ave a static an d on e or m ore
d ynam ic focu s controls. The sequ ence for ad ju sting
them and the areas of the screen that they affect
d ep end on the m onitor you ’re testing.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focu s_H
Descrip tion
In the p rim ary version, the screen is filled w ith
w hite H characters on a black backgrou nd . A bit
m ap of a single character is show n here.
Th e s e co n d a r y v e r s io n is d r a w n w it h b la ck
characters on a w hite backgrou nd .
Test
Focu s ad ju stm ent(s)
Pu rp ose
An ou t-of-focu s m onitor d isp lays fu zzy grap hic
im a g es a n d p oor ly for m ed , h a r d -to-r ea d text
characters.
Method
On m onitors w ith a single (static) focus ad justm ent,
ad ju st the control for the best average focu s over
the entire screen. The focu s at certain locations of
the screen shou ld be w ithin sp ecified lim its.
Som e m on itors h ave a static an d on e or m ore
d ynam ic focu s controls. The sequ ence for ad ju sting
them and the areas of the screen that they affect
d ep end on the m onitor you ’re testing.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-26
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focu s_O o
Descrip tion
In the p rim ary version, the screen is filled w ith
w hite Oo characters on a black backgrou nd . A bit
m ap of a single character is show n here.
Th e s e co n d a r y v e r s io n is d r a w n w it h b la ck
characters on a w hite backgrou nd .
Test
Focu s ad ju stm ent(s)
Pu rp ose
An ou t-of-focu s m onitor d isp lays fu zzy grap hic
im a g es a n d p oor ly for m ed , h a r d -to-r ea d text
characters.
Method
On m onitors w ith a single (static) focus ad justm ent,
ad ju st the control for the best average focu s over
the entire screen. The focu s at certain locations of
the screen shou ld be w ithin sp ecified lim its.
Som e m on itors h ave a static an d on e or m ore
d ynam ic focu s controls. The sequ ence for ad ju sting
them and the areas of the screen that they affect
d ep end on the m onitor you ’re testing.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form at
Descrip tion
A listing of the d ata contained in any form at. This
p attern w orks best at d isp lay resolu tions of at least
640 p ixel by 480 lines. It’s qu ite sim ilar to the
form at ed itor’s GUI screen.
Name: MDA_m7
Location: 13
Pixel Rate:
16.257 MHz
61.512 ns
Entry Units: Time
Horizontal
18.432 KHz*
Vertical
49.816 Hz
Rate:
Active:
720 pixels
162 pixels
44.289 µs*
9.965 µs
54.253 µs*
300.000 mm
0.554 µs
350 lines
20 lines
18.989 ms*
Blank:
1.085 ms
20.074 ms*
225.000 mm
0.000 ms
Period:
882 pixels
370 lines
Physical size:
Pulse delay:
Pulse width:
EQ Before:
EQ After:
Scan:
11.811 inches
8.858 inches
9
pixels
0
lines
144 pixels
8.858 µs
16 lines
0.868 ms
0
0
lines
lines
Progressive (non-interlace)
none
ACS kind:
DCS kind:
DSS kind:
Sync select:
Video kind:
Video bias:
Video swing:
Sync swing:
Gamma:
On: -G-
American 0Red
American separate
DSS
DS Polarity: H+ V- C+
DS Gate: Hon Von Con
Pedestal: OFF 7.5 IRE
2-bit mono
0.000 volts blank minus ground
0.714 volts white minus blank
0.286 volts blank minus sync
OFF
2.200
Code read
Display code expected:
E
F
Test
View a form at’s p aram eter settings
Pu rp ose
Method
To verify p rogram m ed valu es or choose a form at
The m ain im age lists the settings of the form at
that’s d riving the d isp lay. The second ary im age
can be u sed to list th e con ten ts of an y stored
form at.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-28
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G rayBar
Descrip tion
Th e p rim ary version h as 16 fu ll-h eigh t vertical
graybars. The intensity of the bars is show n below .
The second ary version sp lits the field into a top
and bottom half. The bars in the bottom half of
the screen are in reverse ord er.
Test
Vid eo color tracking (color m onitors)
Pu rp ose
To check to see that a color m onitor accu rately
rep rod u ces colors at all intensities
Method
Perform th e Brightness Control Adjustment an d
Brightness Uniformity tests first.
Changes in brightness from bar to bar shou ld be
u n iform . All of th e bars sh ou ld ap p ear as an
u ntinted gray at all levels.
Test
Vid eo Gain Linearity (m onochrom e m onitors)
Pu rp ose
To ch eck t h e v id eo lin ea r it y ; i.e., g r a y sca le
m od u lation
Method
Perform th e Brightness Control Adjustment an d
Brightness Uniformity tests first.
Changes in brightness from bar to bar shou ld be
visible and u niform .
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G rill_11, G rill_22, G rill_33, G rill_44
Descrip tion
Th e e n t ir e a ct iv e v id e o a r e a is fille d w it h
alternating black and w hite strip es. The strip es
are d raw n at d ifferen t resolu tion s. Each of th e
strip es is fou r (4) p ixels w id e in the Grill_44 im age
and three (3) p ixels w id e in the Grill_33 im age.
Each of the strip es is tw o (2) p ixels w id e in the
Grill_22 image and one (1) pixel w id e in the Grill_11
im age.
The p rim ary versions d raw vertical strip es w hile
the second ary versions d raw horizontal strip es.
Test
Verify m onitor resolu tion
Pu rp ose
The resolu tion of you r m onitor shou ld m eet or
exceed the d esign sp ecs.
Method
First ad ju st the brightness, contrast, and focu s to
their correct settings. You shou ld be able to see
ind ivid u al and d istinct strip es in all areas of the
d isplay at all four resolutions. Failure to see d istinct
lin es at th e h igh est r esolu tion (Gr ill_11) m ay
ind icate you have a d efective vid eo am p lifier or
p ictu re tu be.
N ote – If m u lticolored lines ap p ear on a m ask-typ e color p ictu re
tu be, you m ay h ave a p roblem w ith con vergen ce or you m ay
be exceed in g th e resolu tion of th e p ictu re tu be.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-30
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H atch _10i, H atch _10o, H atch _12i, H atch _12o,
H atch _24i, H atch _24o, H atch _24s, H atch _G ,
H atch _M , G RN _H TCH , an d M AG EN TA
Description
The p rim ary versions consist of a w hite, green (G
and GRN ), or m agenta (M) crosshatch d raw n on a
black backgrou nd . The lines form squ are boxes.
A single p ixel d ot is located in the center of each
cr ossh a tch box. Th e n u m ber of boxes for m ed
d ep end s on the version of the im age selected and
th e screen asp ect ratio of th e cu rren tly load ed
form at. The nu m ber in the im age’s nam e refers to
the nu m ber of boxes that are form ed along the
m inor axis for m ost asp ect ratios. The firm w are
calcu lates the ratio and then find s the closest m atch
from the table on the next p age. Versions end ing
in i d raw from the insid e (center) ou t. Any p artial
boxes are placed around the perimeter of the image.
Versions end ing in o d raw from the ou tsid e in.
Any p artial boxes are p laced along the centerlines
of the image. Versions ending in s are the “i” version
p lu s a 1 p ixel thick bord er.
The second ary versions invert the im ages to black
lines and d ots on a w hite backgrou nd . H atch_G,
H atch_M, GRN _H TCH and Magenta d o not have
second ary versions.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aspect Ratio
Hatch_10
Hatch_12
Hatch_24
Boxes
Boxes
Boxes
Boxes
Boxes
Boxes
W : H
Decimal
Vertically Horizontally Vertically Horizontally Vertically Horizontally
16 : 9
5 : 3
4 : 3
1.777É
1.666 É
1.333 É
10
10
10
16
16
14
10
10
12
16
16
16
18
18
24
32
30
32
1 : 1
3 : 4
1.000
0.750
10
14
10
10
12
16
12
12
24
32
24
24
Test
Convergence ad ju stm ent (color m onitors only)
Purpose
In ord er to accu rately p rod u ce an im age on a color
m onitor, the three electron beam s in the CRT m u st
m eet (converge) at the exact sam e location at the
sam e tim e. Lin es d isp layed on a m iscon verged
m onitor ap p ear as several m u lticolored lines and
th e tran sition s betw een d ifferen t colored areas
contain fringes of other colors.
Method
Th e co n v e r g e n ce a d ju s t m e n t s o f m o s t co lo r
m onitors fall into tw o m ain categories.
The first set of ad ju stm ents, u su ally called Static
Convergence, aligns the three beam s in the center
of the d isp lay. The id ea is to tu rn on all three
g u n s a n d a d ju st th e v a r iou s m a g n ets on th e
convergence assem bly to p rod u ce all w hite d ots
in th e cen ter of th e d isp lay. Th e con vergen ce
a ssem b ly is loca ted on th e n eck of th e CRT.
Different m onitors and CRT types m ay each require
their ow n m agnet ad ju stm ent sequ ence.
After the center of the display is properly converged,
the ou ter areas are ad ju sted by u sing the m onitor’s
Dynamic Convergence controls. The number of controls,
the area of the screen they affect, and their adjustment
p roced u re d ep end s on the m onitor you ’re testing.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-32
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H atch 4x3, H atch 5x4 an d H atch 8x8
Descrip tion
These are d ifferent versions of a crosshatch p attern
that may be called for by some display manufacturers’
test procedures. The primary version consists of white
crosshatch on a black backgrou nd .
The second ary version inverts the im age to black
lines on a w hite backgrou nd .
Pu rp ose
This is a general p u rp ose test im age that can be
u sed to check and ad ju st vid eo scan linearity and
geom etry and color convergence.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H atch 64W
Descrip tion
This is still another version of a crosshatch p attern
that m ay be called for by som e m anu factu rers’
test p roced u res. The p rim ary version consists of
an 8 by 8 w hite crosshatch on a black backgrou nd .
A w hite rectangu lar p atch is ad d ed in the center.
The second ary version inverts the im age to black
lines and box on a w hite backgrou nd .
Pu rp ose
This is a general p u rp ose test im age that can be
u sed to check and ad ju st vid eo scan linearity and
geom etry and color convergence. The large w hite
rectangle also allow s for checking a d isp lay’s high
voltage regu lation. This is d one by observing the
vertical lines at the left and right ed ges of the
im age. They shou ld be fairly straight and not p u ll
in the area of the w hite rectangle.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-34
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H itach i1
Description
This is a special test image specified by some display
m anu factu rers. The im age consists of a 2x2 clu ster
of Microsoft Wind ow s® p rogram m anager screen
sim u lations u sing Jap anese characters.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Kan jiKan
Descrip tion
In the p rim ary version, the screen is filled w ith
w h it e Ja p a n e s e Ka n ch a r a ct e r s o n
backgrou nd .
a
b la ck
Th e s e co n d a r y v e r s io n is d r a w n w it h b la ck
characters on a w hite backgrou nd .
Test
Focu s ad ju stm ent(s)
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-36
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lin earty (Lin earity)
Descrip tion
The im age is m ad e u p of three p arts. The first
p art consists of six (6) w hite circles. A large circle
is d raw n in the center of the screen. Its d iam eter
equ als the lesser of the vid eo height or w id th of
the d isp lay. A sm aller circle is d raw n at half the
d iam eter and concentric w ith the larger circle. A
circle also is d raw n in each of the corners of the
screen. The d iam eter of the corner circles equ als
one-fifth of the d isp lay w id th. The second p art of
the im age consists of a w hite crosshatch im age.
The nu m ber of boxes in the crosshatch d ep end s
on the p hysical size of the d isp lay. The last p art
of the im age consists of w hite tic m arks on the
horizontal and vertical center lines of the im age.
The m arks are one p ixel thick and at every other
p ixel location. Every fifth m ark is slightly longer.
The color of the p attern can be changed w ith the
ind ivid u al vid eo ou tp u t controls.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lin earty (Linearity) — contd .
Detail showing
center of
linearity test
image. All
lines are one
pixel thick.
Test
Linearity ad ju stm ent
Pu rp ose
In ord er to p resent an u nd istorted d isp lay, the
horizontal and vertical sw eeps of the electron beam
across the face of the CRT shou ld be at u niform
sp eed s. Any non-u niform ity in the sw eep cau ses
portions of an im age to stretch w hile other portions
are com p ressed . N on-linearity in a m onitor show s
u p in several w ays. It m ay be p resent across the
entire screen, in a large p ortion of the screen, or
localized in a very sm all area.
Method
The circles in the im age can be u sed to d o a ball
p ark ad ju stm ent of a m onitor’s linearity controls.
Ad ju st the controls to form p erfectly rou nd circles.
Th e crossh atch im age can be u sed to m easu re
linearity and to m ake finer control ad ju stm ents.
All th e fu ll boxes in th e crossh atch sh ou ld be
id entical in size. Measu re them w ith a ru ler or a
gau ge m ad e for the m onitor you ’re testing. Any
d eviation shou ld be w ithin you r sp ec lim its. Use
the tic m arks and a ru ler or gau ge to m easu re
lin ear ity ov er a sm all p or tion of th e d isp lay.
Com p are th e n u m ber of tic m arks p er u n it of
m easu re w ith an ad jacent or overlap p ing area.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-38
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lin Focu s
Descrip tion
The im age consists of several p arts. It starts w ith
a lar ge cir cle in th e cen ter of th e scr een . Its
d iam eter equ als the lesser of the vid eo height or
w id th of the d isp lay. The second p art is a 10 by
10 box crosshatch p attern. The crosshatch is d raw n
in from the ou tsid e ed ges, w ith any extra p ixels
in t h e b o xe s p la ce d a lo n g t h e v e r t ica l a n d
horizontal axis. The vertical centerline is tw o pixels
thick if the form at has an even nu m ber of active
p ixels p er line. The horizontal centerline is tw o
p ixels thick if the form at has an even nu m ber of
active lines p er fram e. A sm aller box is ad d ed at
the center of the im age. The box is one-half the
h eigh t an d tw o-fifth s th e w id th of on e of th e
crosshatch boxes. Cu rrent form at d ata is show n
in the low er left qu ad rant of the im age. It show s
the nu m ber of active p ixels (H ) and lines (V) as
w ell as the vertical and horizontal scan rates.
640 x 480
H= 31.469 KHz
V= 59.940 Hz
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lin Focu s — con td .
The im age also inclu d es blocks of
533101
fo cu s -ch e ck in g ch a r a ct e r s a t
variou s locations. The blocks are
p osition ed in sid e th e crossh atch
/8 /7 /6 /5 /4 /3 /2 1X 2X 3X 4X 5X 6X 7X 8X
b o xe s a n d a r e u p t o 3 b y
3
characters in size. The size of the
blocks is lim ited by the nu m ber of
characters that can fit in one box. The bit m ap of
a single focu s character is show n here.
The p rim ary version consists of a w hite p attern
on a black backgrou nd . The second ary version has
a black p attern on a w hite backgrou nd .
Test
Linearity ad ju stm ent
Please see the d iscu ssion of the Linearity test im age
for inform ation on m easu ring linearity.
Test
Focu s ad ju stm ent(s)
Pu rp ose
An ou t-of-focu s m onitor d isp lays fu zzy grap hic
im ages and p oorly form ed , hard -to-read characters
w hen text is d isp layed on the screen.
Method
On m onitors w ith a single (static) focus ad justm ent,
ad ju st the control for the best average focu s over
the entire screen. The focu s at certain locations of
the screen shou ld be w ithin sp ecified lim its.
Som e m on itors h ave a static an d on e or m ore
d ynam ic focu s controls. The sequ ence for ad ju sting
them and the areas of the screen they affect d ep end
on the m onitor you ’re testing.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-40
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O u tlin e0 an d O u tlin e1
Descrip tion
The Ou tline0 im age consists of a rectangu lar w hite
bord er on a black backgrou nd . The bord er is one
(1) p ixel w id e and d efines the active vid eo area.
Tw o (2) d iagonal lines join the op p osite corners.
A fu ll size cross is centered in the im age. The
horizontal line of the cross is one (1) p ixel thick
for form ats w ith an od d nu m ber of active lines
and tw o (2) p ixels thick for form ats w ith an even
nu m ber of active lines. The vertical line of the
cross is one (1) p ixel thick for form ats w ith an
od d nu m ber of active p ixels p er line and tw o (2)
p ixels thick for form ats w ith an even nu m ber of
active p ixels.
In the Ou tline1 version, the tw o d iagonal lines
are rem oved and short m arker lines are ad d ed to
the bord er lines near to w here the cross lines m eet
the bord er lines. The m arkers ap p ear at both sid es
of the cross lines. The d istance betw een the m arker
lines and the cross lines is the greater of either
tw o (2) p ixels or one (1) m illim eter.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O u tlin e0 an d O u tlin e1 — con td .
Test
Yoke tilt correction
Purpose
The horizontal axis of a d isplayed image should line
u p w ith the horizontal axis of you r m onitor. Any
tilt is likely d u e to the yoke being rotated on the
neck of the CRT. A rotated yoke makes any displayed
im age ap p ear rotated .
Method
Place you r m onitor on a flat su rface so the face of
the CRT is p erp end icu lar to the su rface. Use a
ru ler or gau ge to m easu re the height of each end
of th e im age’s h orizon tal cen ter lin e from th e
su rface. The d ifference betw een the tw o read ings
shou ld be w ithin sp ec for the m onitor. If it’s ou t
of sp ec, the yoke need s to be ad ju sted . Loosen
the hard w are that clam p s the yoke to the neck of
th e CRT an d rotate th e yoke u n til th e lin e is
horizontal. Tighten the yoke-clam p hard w are.
Test
Yoke w ind ing orthogonality check
Pu rp ose
The horizontal and vertical d eflection coils on the
yoke shou ld have their axes cross at exactly 90
d egrees. Im p rop er orien tation of th e w in d in gs
cau ses d isp layed rectangles to look m ore like non-
orthogonal p arallelogram s. This typ e of d efect is
alm ost im p ossible to correct w ith ad ju stm ents. It’s
u su ally easier to rep lace the d efective yoke.
Method
First perform the previously d iscussed yoke tilt test.
The vertical center line of the im age shou ld be
p erp end icu lar to the w ork su rface. If the d eviation
is beyond sp ec, the m onitor shou ld be rejected and
sent back for repair before the operator w astes tim e
trying to m agnet a d efective yoke.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-42
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test
Disp lay size correction
Purpose
A too-large active video size adjustment on a monitor
m ay cau se inform ation to be lost arou nd the ed ges
of the screen. A too-small active video size adjustment
may make some d isplayed information hard to read .
The correct size is needed to obtain the correct aspect
ratio. You need the correct aspect ratio to get rou nd
circles and squ are squ ares.
Method
First you need to know the correct p hysical size of
the active video area for the display. This information
u su ally is given in a d isp lay’s sp ec sheet or service
manual. The size should match the sizes in the format
you ’re u sing. The size setting of the cu rrent form at
can be checked u sing the Format test im age.
Place a ru ler or gau ge along the horizontal line of
the im age and ad ju st the m onitor's horizontal size
control u ntil the d istance betw een the end p oints
m atches the sp ecified valu e.
Move the ru ler or gau ge to the vertical line and
ad ju st you r m onitor's vertical size control u ntil
the d istance betw een the end p oints m atches the
sp ecified valu e.
Test
Parallelogram d istortion check
Pu rp ose
Parallelogram d istortion is very d ifficu lt to correct
w ith m agnets becau se the correction often cau ses
barrel d istortion . Th erefore, you sh ou ld d ecid e
early w hether you r m onitor m eets this sp ec. The
p roblem u su ally can be traced to the im p rop er
w ind ing of the yoke coils. If the p roblem isn’t too
severe, it m ay be corrected by ad d ing or ad ju sting
m agnets on the yoke. H ow ever, if the d istortion
is excessive, it m ay be an ind ication of a d efective
yoke w hich cannot be corrected w ith m agnets.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O u tlin e0 an d O u tlin e1 — con td .
Method
Measu re the lengths of the tw o (2) d iagonal lines.
Any d ifference is an ind ication of p arallelogram
d istortion. The d ifference in read ings shou ld be
w ithin the sp ecifications of the m onitor.
If the d ifference in the read ings is too far beyond
sp ec, the m onitor shou ld be rejected and sent back
for rep air before the op erator w astes tim e trying
to m agnet a d efective yoke.
Test
Trap ezoid d istortion correction
Pu rp ose
This im age gives you a w ay to m easu re trap ezoid
d istortion in you r m onitor. If the d istortion isn’t
too severe, you m ay be able to correct it by ad d ing
or ad ju sting m agnets on the yoke.
Method
Perform the Yoke Winding Orthogonality Check and
Parallelogram Distortion Check tests first to p revent
an op erator from w asting tim e on a m onitor w ith
a d efective yoke.
Measu re the w id th of the im age at the top and
bottom of the d isp lay. Any d ifference in read ings
sh ou ld be w ith in th e sp ec lim its. Measu re th e
height of the im age at both sid es of the d isp lay.
Again, any d ifference in read ings shou ld be w ithin
sp ec lim its. If either of the d ifferences is ou t of
sp ec, the trap ezoid d istortion of the m onitor is
ou t of sp ec.
Ad d or ad ju st m agnets on the yoke to correct the
p roblem . The Pin & Barrel Correction test shou ld
be rep eated to m ake su re that it’s still in sp ec.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-44
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test
Pin and barrel d istortion correction
Purpose
If perfectly linear sweep signals are sent to a perfectly
w ou nd d eflection yoke that’s m ou nted on a p erfect
CRT, you would not necessarily get a perfectly formed
raster. Instead you w ou ld likely get a raster that
had its corners stretched aw ay from the center and
resem bled a p in cu sh ion . Th is d istortion occu rs
because the geometry of the d eflected electron beam
d oes not m atch the geom etry of the tu be facep late.
Also, im p erfections in the yoke or CRT m ay affect
this p roblem . In som e cases one or m ore corners
may be pulled towards the center of the raster causing
it to look like a barrel. Uncorrected raster d istortion
carries over as d istortion of the d isp layed im age.
Method
A slot gauge may be used to d etermine if the amount
of p incu shion or barrel d istortion is w ithin lim its.
A basic slot gau ge m ay consist of a p iece of op aqu e
film w ith at least tw o (2) transp arent slots in it.
One slot is u sed for top and bottom d istortion
and the other is u sed for the sid es. By p ositioning
the correct slot over each p ortion of the bord er
line, the entire line shou ld be visible. If this cannot
be d on e a t a ll fou r sid es, th e m on itor n eed s
correcting.
There are tw o m ain w ays of correcting p incu shion
d istortion. The first involves p lacing or ad ju sting
m agn ets on th e yoke. Th is is a trial-an d -error
m ethod . H ow ever, skilled op erators d evelop a feel
for how strong a m agnet to u se and how to p lace
it in ord er to get the d esired correction. If any
correction is p erform ed , the Trapezoid Distortion
Correction test shou ld be rep eated .
Th e oth er cor r ection m eth od in v olv es ad d in g
correction signals to the d eflection signal d riving
the yoke. This m ethod is u su ally fou nd in color
m onitors, w here ad d ing m agnets to the yoke w ou ld
cau se p roblem s w ith convergence and p u rity. The
typ e and nu m ber of ad ju stm ents d ep end s on the
m onitor being tested .
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P1
Description
6 by 6 w hite crosshatch w ithou t a bord er on a black
backgound .
P2
Description
4 by 4 w hite crosshatch w ith a bord er on a black
backgound .
P3
Description
4 by 4 w hite crosshatch w ith a bord er and a sm all
centered w hite p atch on a black backgou nd .
P4
Description
8 by 8 w hite crosshatch w ith a bord er on a black
backgound .
P5
Description
8 by 8 w hite crosshatch w ith a bord er and a sm all
centered w hite p atch on a black backgou nd .
P6
Description
16 by 12 w hite crosshatch w ith a bord er on a black
backgound .
P7
Description
16 by 12 w hite crosshatch w ith a bord er and a sm all
centered w hite p atch on a black backgou nd .
P8
Description
All black active vid eo area
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-46
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Persist
Descrip tion
In the p rim ary version, 15 sm all w hite boxes m ove
back and forth betw een d iagonal gu id e lines. The
lines form 15 sid e-by-sid e tracks. The size of each
box is scaled to the light m eter box size set by the
MSIZ system param eter. The box in the center track
m ov es on e scan lin e v er tically an d on e p ixel
horizontally for each vertical fram e of refresh. The
seven boxes in the tracks to the right of the center
track m ove 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 p ixels and lines
p er fram e. These boxes are m arked 2X throu gh
8X at the bottom of the tracks. The seven boxes to
the left of the center track m ove one scan line
vertically and one p ixel horizontally for every 2,
3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 vertical fram es of refresh. These
boxes are m arked / 2 throu gh / 8 at the bottom of
the tracks.
In cases w here the next m ove w ou ld cau se the
b ox t o m ov e b ey on d t h e en d of it s t r a ck , it
im m ed ia t ely r ev er ses a n d m o v es t h e co r r ect
d istan ce in th e op p osite d irection for th e n ext
fram e.
A continu ou sly ru nning cou nter ap p ears in the
u p p er left-hand corner of the im age. The nu m ber
show n is the nu m ber of vertical fram e refreshes
that have occu rred since the generator w as first
p ow ered u p .
The second ary version d raw s a black im age on a
w hite backgrou nd .
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
533101
/8 /7 /6 /5 /4 /3 /2 1X 2X 3X 4X 5X 6X 7X 8X
Test
Phosp hor p ersistence
Pu rp ose
The p hosp hors on the face of m ost CRTs continu e
to glow for a short p eriod of tim e after the electron
b e a m h a s s t o p p e d e n e r g iz in g t h e m . Th is
p henom enon is called persistence. A certain am ou nt
of p ersistence is d esirable in m ost ap p lications. It
p revents a flickering of a d isp layed im age that
m ost u sers w ou ld find objectionable. On the other
hand , a CRT w ith an overly long p ersistence tim e
cau ses m oving objects to leave a blu rred trail.
Method
A flickering in the slow er m oving boxes ind icates
that the com bination of refresh rate and p hosp hor
p ersistence is not su itable for long-term view ing.
A fad ing tail left behind by the faster m oving boxes
ind icates that the d isp lay m ay not be su itable for
view ing anim ated im ages.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-48
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pu lseBar (TV form ats on ly)
Description:
The im age looks like tw o vertical lines follow ed by
a w id e vertical bar on a d isp lay’s screen. The first
line is a sine-squ ared m od u lated p u lse that fad es
from black to red and back to black. The p u lse is
20T for PAL and 12.5 T for NTSC formats. The second
narrow er line is a 2T w hite sine-squ ared p u lse. T =
100 nSec for PAL and 125 nSec for N TSC form ats.
The w id e bar is w hite w ith sine-squ ared ed ges.
Test:
Vid eo System Testing
This m u lti-p u rp ose p attern can be u sed w ith other
in stru m en ts to ch eck television K factors. Th e
mod ulated pulse can be used to check chrominance-
to-lum inance d elay and gain. The narrow w hite line
can be u sed to m easu re short term linear d istortion
(K2T). One scan line of the image, as it would appear
on a w aveform analyzer, is show n here:
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q u artBox
Descrip tion
The p rim ary version has a single w hite box in the
center of active vid eo. The size of the box is one-
half the w id th and height of the active vid eo area
(a qu arter of the entire active vid eo area). The
second ary version d raw s a black box on a w hite
backgrou nd .
Test
Brightness control ad ju stm ent
Pu rp ose
The w rong brightness setting on you r m onitor m ay
cau se other tests su ch as Contrast, Focus and Beam
Size to be invalid . An accu rate brightness setting
help s give rep eatable m easu rem ents throu ghou t
oth er tests. Th is version of th e brigh tn ess box
shou ld be u sed if the d isp lay’s sp ecifications call
for the brightness to be set w ith one-fou rth of the
screen lit.
Method
Place you r light m eter p robe w ithin the center box
an d ad ju st th e m on itor’s brigh tn ess con trol to
obtain the requ ired light m eter read ing.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-50
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ram p
(TV form ats on ly)
Description:
The active vid eo area goes from full black (+7.5 IRE)
at the left ed ge of the screen to fu ll w hite (+100
IRE) at the right ed ge.
Test:
Vid eo Gain Linearity
Method :
When view ed on a TV screen, the full range of grays
shou ld be visible. There shou ld be no color shifts
visible.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Raster
Descrip tion
A totally black d isp lay (nothing being d isp layed )
Test
Raster centering
Pu rp ose
M a n y m o n it o r a p p lica t io n s r e q u ir e t h a t t h e
d isp layed im age or text fit com p letely w ithin a
bezel that su rrou nd s the CRT. This u su ally requ ires
that you first center the blank raster on the face
of the CRT and then center the im age w ithin the
raster. Use this im age for centering the raster on
the CRT.
Method
Tu rn u p you r m onitor’s brightness control u ntil
the raster is ju st visible. Ad ju st the raster’s position
a n d siz e u sin g t h e siz e a n d r a st er cen t er in g
controls. The raster centering ad ju stm ent for m any
m onochrom e m onitors consists of m oving m agnetic
rings on the d eflection yoke.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-52
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regu late
Descrip tion
The im age cycles betw een tw o (2) p atterns. In the
p rim ary version, the first p attern is a w hite ou tline
that d efines the ed ges of d isplayed vid eo. The other
p attern has the sam e ou tline p lu s a solid w hite
r ectan gle in th e cen ter . Th e size of th e solid
rectangle equ als 95% of the height and w id th of
d isp layed vid eo. The sp eed of the cycle cannot be
changed .
The second ary version has a thick w hite fram e
w ith a black center for the first p attern and a solid
w hite active vid eo area for the other p attern.
Test
H igh voltage regu lation
Method
The size of the bord er shou ld not change for each
h alf of th e im age. Th e ch an ge in bor d er size
betw een the tw o im ages shou ld be w ithin the sp ec
lim its of the m onitor.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sam su n g1
Description
Sp ecia l test im a g e sp ecified by som e d isp la y
m anu factu rers. The im age consists of three sm all
simulations of Microsoft WIndows® screens on a blue
background. A border and centered cross are formed
with repeating groups of the characters “e” and “m”.
The rep eating characters are also u sed to form a
rectangu lar p atch in the u p p er left hand corner and
a circu lar area in the center of the im age.
Sam su n g2
Description
Sam e as Sam su ng1 bu t w ith a black backgrou nd .
Slid eG
Description
Sp ecia l test im a g e sp ecified by som e d isp la y
m an u factu rers. Th e im age con sists of a green
crosshatch with moving lines on a black background.
The vertical lines m ove to the right and the vertical
lines m ove d ow n.
Slid eRG B
Description
Sp ecia l test im a g e sp ecified by som e d isp la y
m anu factu rers. The im age consists of a crosshatch
w ith m oving lines that also change color on a black
background . The vertical lines move to the right and
the vertical lines move d ow n. The colors of the lines
change after every move. The colors continuosly cycle
betw een red , green and blu e.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-54
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SM PTE133
Descrip tion
This im age is based on a recom m end ed p ractice
(RP-133) test p attern d esigned by the Society of
Motion Pictu re and Television Engineers (SMPTE).
The original ap p lication w as u sed in testing and
evalu ating m ed ical im aging m onochrom e d isp lays.
The im age now is u sed in m any d ifferent d isp lay
ap p lications. The im age is self scaling as to the
nu m ber of active p ixels and active lines u sed . Som e
of the im age’s elem ents have m inor d ifferences
fr om th e or igin al SM PTE sp ecification . Th ese
d iffer en ces a r e n o t ed in d escr ip t io n s o f t h e
ind ivid u al elem ents.
1) Th e im a g e is d r a w n o n
a
r e fe r e n ce
backgrou nd having a 50% intensity level. The
backgrou n d covers th e en tire active vid eo
area.
2) Crosshatch – There are 10 boxes vertically.
The nu m ber of horizontal boxes is based on
the p hysical asp ect ratio d eterm ined by the
H SIZ and VSIZ p aram eters in the cu rrently
load ed form at. The boxes are p erfectly squ are
w ith any fractional sp aces p laced arou nd the
ou tsid e ed ges of the im age. The vertical lines
are tw o (2) p ixels thick w hile the horizontal
lines are tw o (2) scan lines thick. Small crosses
ind icate the intersection of the horizontal and
vertical lines w hen they are covered by other
p arts of the im age. All p arts of the crosshatch
are norm ally d raw n u sing a 70% intensity
level. A 75% level is u sed in the second ary
version.
3) Resolu tion Patch – The p atch is m ad e u p of
six (6) sm aller boxes that are each about 6.25%
of the height of the d isp lay. The boxes are
m ad e of alternating intensity (0 and 100%)
s t r ip e s . Th e s t r ip e s r u n v e r t ica lly a n d
horizontally. The strip es m ay be one (1), tw o
(2) or three (3) p ixels w id e each. Details of
the p atch are show n in the low er half of the
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
follow ing illustration. The patches are located
in each corner of the m ain im age and in the
cen ter. Th ey’re orien ted w ith th e h igh est
resolu tion and contrast boxes closest to the
ou tsid e corners. The 48%-53%, 48%-51% and
50%-51% level p atch es are om itted in th e
second ary version.
4) Gr ay-Scale Boxes – Tw elv e (12) boxes at
elev en (11) in ten sity lev els ar e clu ster ed
arou nd the center of the m ain im age. They
start at 0% and increase in 10% step s to 100%
w ith tw o (2) boxes at a 50% level. All of the
gray-scale boxes are om itted in the second ary
version.
5) Gam m a Check Dither Box – A sm all box is
d raw n insid e the right-hand 50% gray-scale
box. The box is half the w id th and height of
the larger box. The box consists of a checker-
board of alternate one-on and one-off p ixels.
The alternate pixels have levels of 0 and 100%.
This sm aller box is not p art of the original
SMPTE sp ecification and is om itted in the
second ary version.
6) Contrast Boxes – Tw o (2) boxes are d raw n
ad jacent to the gray-scale boxes. They’re at
0 and 100% levels. There are sm aller boxes
d raw n insid e each box at 5 and 95% levels.
Th e co n t r a s t b o xe s a r e o m it t e d in t h e
second ary version.
7) Black & White Wind ow s – Tw o (2) horizontal
bars are located above and below the gray-
scale boxes. Their height equ als 8% of the
d isp la y h eig h t . Th er e a r e h a lf-siz e b a r s
centered in the larger bars. In the p rim ary
version, the d ark p ortion of the w ind ow s is
at a 5% level and the bright p ortion is at a
95% level. Zero and 100% levels are u sed in
the second ary version.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-56
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SM PTE — con td .
8) Bord er – A bord er line is d raw n arou nd the
im age. It’s set in from the ed ges of d isp layed
vid eo a d istance equ al to 1% of the d isp layed
height and has a thickness equ al to 0.5% of
the d isp layed height. The intensity level is
the sam e as that of the crosshatch lines.
9) Circle – A large circle is centered in the image.
It tou ches the top and bottom of the active
vid eo area w hen the asp ect ratio is w id er
than it is high (land scap e-typ e d isp lay). The
circle tou ches the left and right sid es of active
vid eo w hen the asp ect ratio is taller than it
is w id e (p ortrait-typ e d isp lay). The intensity
level is the sam e as that of the crosshatch
lines. The circle is not p art of the original
SMPTE sp ecification.
10) Resolu tion Data - The nu m ber of active p ixels
p er line and the nu m ber of active lines is
show n as text below the low er black-and -
w hite w ind ow . The p ixel d ep th also is show n.
The intensity level of the text is the sam e as
that of the crosshatch lines. The d isp laying
of the d ata is not p art of the original SMPTE
sp ecification.
The second ary version ad d s a row of six (6)
Color Bars above and below the black-and -
w hite w ind ow s. The ord er of the colors, from
left to right, is red , green, blu e, cyan (g+b),
m agenta (r+b) and yellow (r+g). The top row
is d raw n at 100% in ten sity levels an d th e
bottom row is d raw n at 50% intensity levels.
Color bars are not p art of the original SMPTE
sp ecification.
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Primary version of
(SMPTE) RP-133
Quantum Data
30
20
10
0
40
50
50
60
70
80
90
100
H: 720
V: 350
D: 4
Gamma Check
Dither Box
1 @ 100%
1 @ 0 %
Vertical
2 @ 51%
2 @ 50 %
Horizontal
1 @ 100%
1 @ 0 %
Horizontal
2 @ 51%
2 @ 50 %
Vertical
30
20
10
0
40
50
50
60
70
2 @ 100%
2 @ 0 %
Vertical
2 @ 51%
2 @ 48 %
Horizontal
80
2 @ 100%
2 @ 0 %
Horizontal
2 @ 51%
2 @ 48 %
Vertical
90
3 @ 100%
3 @ 0 %
Horizontal
2 @ 53%
2 @ 48 %
Vertical
100
3 @ 100%
3 @ 0 %
Vertical
2 @ 53%
2 @ 48 %
Horizontal
0% and 5%
Contrast Boxes
95% and 100%
Contrast Boxes
Center detail of
RP-133
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-58
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SM PTE — con td .
Test
Deflection linearity
Method
If the overall height and w id th of the d isp lay’s
active vid eo area m atch the sizes in the form at,
the large circle shou ld be p erfectly rou nd . Each
box in the crosshatch p attern shou ld be the sam e
size and shap e. For m ore inform ation on testing
linearity, p lease see the d iscu ssion on the Linearty
test im age.
Test
H igh contrast resolu tion
Method
All the 0 and 100% level stripes in all the resolu tion
p atches shou ld be sep arate and d istinct.
Test
Low contrast resolu tion and noise
Method
All the m id -level 2 on - 2 off strip es in all the
resolu tion p atches shou ld be visible and d istinct.
This is a sensitive test for noise in the d isp lay’s
vid eo am p lifiers.
Test
Qu ick gam m a check
Method
The average brightness level of the sm all gam m a
d ither box should match the brightness of the larger
su rrou nd ing box. This is a visu al check to see if
the d isp lay’s gam m a correction is p rod u cing the
correct m id -level resp onse.
Test
Vid eo gain linearity and gam m a
Method
The ind ivid u al gray-scale boxes all shou ld be at
their ind icated levels. A sm all ap ertu re p hotom eter
is u su ally requ ired to get accu rate and rep eatable
read ings.
Test
Contrast and brightness check
Method
On a d isp lay w ith p rop erly ad ju sted brightness
and contrast controls, both the 5% and 95% contrast
boxes shou ld be clearly visible insid e their larger
su rrou nd ing 0% and 100% boxes.
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SM PTE — con td .
Test
Vid eo am p lifier stability
Method
The tw o black-and -w hite w ind ow s shou ld show
sharp transitions betw een the sm aller box and the
s u r r o u n d in g w in d o w . St r e a k in g m a y b e a n
ind ication of u nd ershoot or overshoot w hile ghost
im ages m ay ind icate a ringing p roblem .
Test
Excessive overscan and off-center alignm ent
Method
The entire bord er shou ld be clearly visible on the
face of the tu be and not be hid d en by the ed ge of
the glass or by any bezel.
Test
Interlace flicker
Method
The horizontal 1 On - 1 Off strip es in the resolu tion
boxes shou ld not have objectionable flicker w hen
show n w ith an interlaced form at. Excessive flicker
ind icates that the com bination of the d isp lay’s CRT
p er sisten ce a n d fr a m e sca n r a te is below th e
p ersistence tim e of the hu m an eye.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-60
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SM PTEb ar
Description:
This im age is based on an engineering gu id eline
(EG 1-1990) test signal sp ecified by the Society of
Motion Pictu re and Television Engineers (SMPTE).
The SMPTE pattern, in tu rn, is d erived from an EIA
stand ard test p attern (RS-189-A). The im age, is set
u p to be generated by an 801GX as an encod ed TV
output. It is d esigned for ad justing the color settings
of a television m onitor by eye. It can also be u sed
w ith a TV w aveform analyzer and vectorscop e for
testing vid eo signal p rocessors and color d ecod ers.
The image is available on all mod els as a component
RGB signal. Some of the image’s elements have some
d ifferences from the original SMPTE sp ecification.
These d ifferences are given in d escrip tions of the
ind ivid u al elem ents.
1)
The upper 67% of the image consists of a series
of color b ars. These bars m atch the ord er of
the bars in the SMPTE and EIA p atterns. They
are sim ilar to the 801GX’s TVBar_75 im age
w ithou t the last black bar.
2)
The left hand side of the lower 25% of the image
contains isolated -I and Q color d ifference
signals that match the original EIA and SMPTE
patterns. The -I signal appears as a bluish gray
bar and the Q signal ap p ears as a p u rp le bar
on a TV m onitor. The bars are sep arated by a
w hite (+100 IRE) bar.
3)
4)
The right hand sid e of the low er 25% of the
im age contains a narrow 12.5 IRE gray b ar.
Du e to a hard w are lim itation on the 801GX,
this p ortion of the p attern d oes not m atch the
original EIA and SMPTE patterns. The original
patterns had +3.5 (blacker than black) and +11.5
IRE bars sep arated by a +7.5 IRE (black) bar.
The remaining central 8% of the image contains
a row of ch rom a set b ars. These bars are p art
of the SMPTE p attern bu t are not in the EIA
pattern. The ord er of the alternating color and
black bars matches those in the SMPTE pattern.
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blue
Mag
Cyan
Gray
5% Gray Bar
-I
+Q
(Blue White
Gray)
(Purple)
SMPTEbar Image
as it would appear on a TV monitor
A single scan line from the upper portion of the SMPTEbar
Image as it would appear on a TV waveform analyzer
connected to the 801GXÕs TV output
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-62
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Vectorscope signature of the upper color bar portion of
the SMPTEbar Image using NTSC color encoding on the
801GX’s TV output
TV Vectorscope signature of the lower portion of the
SMPTEbar Image showing -I and Q color difference signals
using NTSC color encoding on the 801GX’s TV output
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test:
Color Vid eo Perform ance
Purpose:
This general p u rp ose p attern can be u sed to check
the vid eo hand ling cap abilities of m ost p arts of a
television system .
Method :
When view ed on a TV screen, all of the u p p er color
bars shou ld be correct and in the ord er show n. The
hu e and intensity of each bar shou ld be u niform
over the entire bar.
The image can be used with a TV waveform analyzer
to check the p erform ance of a vid eo system . The
upper color bars, as they would appear on a waveform
analyzer, are show n on a p reviou s p age.
Test:
Color Decod er Perform ance
Pu rp ose:
The im age can u sed w ith a TV vectorscop e to check
for p rop er op eration of a vid eo color d ecod er.
Vectorscop e sign atu res of th e u p p er an d low er
p ortions of the im age u sing N TSC encod ing can be
fou nd on the p reviou s p ages.
Method :
The vectorscop e signatu re for the color bars shou ld
h it th e target test p oin t for each color on th e
vectorscope’s graticule. If you are using PAL encoded
video, the signature w ill be similar to the one show n
for the TVBar_75 test im age on an earlier p age.
The three “legs” of the vectorscop e signatu re for
the -I and Q color d ifference signals shou ld m atch
the Burst, -I and Q reference lines on the vectorscope’s
graticule.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-64
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The follow ing tests are based on the original SMPTE
quid eline:
Test:
Visu al Chrom a Gain Ad ju stm ent
Method :
In ord er to p erform this test, you m u st have a w ay
of turning off the red and green guns in the monitor
u nd er test. Tu rning off the red and green vid eo
com p onents of the 801GX’s vid eo ou tp u t w ill not
w ork for this test.
This test uses the upper and central color bars. Switch
off the red and green guns on the m onitor. This w ill
p rod u ce fou r blu e bars, sep arated by black bars.
Ad ju st the chrom a gain so that the brightness of
each ou ter blu e bar is u niform over the entire bar.
The gain is correct w hen the bottom 10% of each
bar is the sam e brightness as the rest of the bar.
Test:
Visu al Chrom a Phase Ad ju stm ent
Method :
In ord er to p erform this test, you m u st have a w ay
of turning off the red and green guns in the monitor
u nd er test. Tu rning off the red and green vid eo
com p onents of the 801GX’s vid eo ou tp u t w ill not
w ork for this test.
This test uses the upper and central color bars. Switch
off the red and green guns on the m onitor. This w ill
p rod u ce fou r blu e bars, sep arated by black bars.
Ad ju st the chrom a p hase so that the brightness of
each of the tw o central blu e bars is u niform over
the entire bar. The phase is correct w hen the bottom
10% of each bar is the sam e brightness as the rest of
the bar.
Test:
Visu al Black Level Ad ju stm ent
Method :
This test u ses the low er right hand p ortion of the
im age. Red u ce the black level u ntil the gray bar
d isappears. Slow ly increase the black level until the
bar ju st becom es clearly visible.
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stairs20
Descrip tion
The active vid eo area goes from fu ll black at the
left ed ge of the screen to fu ll w hite at the right
ed ge. There are six (6) step s. The step levels are
7.5 (black), 20, 40, 60, 80 and 100 IRE.
Test
Vid eo gain linearity
Method
When view ed on a m onitor’s screen, a black bar
p lu s five (5) gray bars shou ld be visible. There
shou ld be no color shifts and each of the bars
shou ld be u niform in color.
The im age also can be u sed w ith an oscilloscop e
or TV w aveform analyzer to check the gain linearity
and gam m a correction of a vid eo system .
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-66
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Strok es0, Strok es1
Descrip tion
This im age m ay be called ou t by som e d isp lay
m a n u fa ct u r er s’ t est p r o ced u r es. Th e St r okes0
version consists of m u ltip le grou p s of sep arated
red , green and blu e horizontal lines d raw n on a
black backgrou nd . The Strokes1 version consists
of m u ltip le grou p s of sep arated red , green and
blu e d iagonal lines d raw n on a black backgrou nd .
Pu rp ose
These are sp ecial-p u rp ose test p atterns u sed in
test and alignm ent p roced u res sp ecified by one
or m ore d isp lay m anu factu rers.
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Text_9, Text_16
Descrip tion
In the p rim ary versions, the screen is filled w ith
r a n d om p a r a g r a p h s of w h ite text on a b la ck
backgrou nd . The second ary versions u se black text
on a w h ite backgrou n d Th e am ou n t of text is
d eterm ined by the size of the font u sed and the
horizontal and vertical resolu tion of the form at.
The Text_16 image uses a larger font than the Text_9
im age.
Text_9
In this paper we will demonstrate that by using optimal management
engineering to offset partial incremental time phasing it leaves a few
random context sensitive capacity to produce partial management control.
Nevertheless, stressing the systematic digital programming to offset
functional unilateral superstructures it leaves a few unresponsive context
sensitive flexibility to produce representative organizational
functionality. Often invoking optional transitional interaction as well as
partial third generation superstructures it is necessary for all qualified
context sensitive time phasing to generate a high level of partial
reciprocal displays. Sometimes, by not distinguishing random context
sensitive outflow as well as partial reciprocal hardware it becomes not
infeasible for all but the least responsive third generation engineering
to maintain adequate random context sensitive devices. More likely, it is
that by developing integrated policy capability coordinated with random
unilateral engineering it emphasizes the very qualified incremental
projections to generate a high level of systematized well-documented
emulation. Also, invoking partial management concepts as well as
synchronized reciprocal hardware it is possible for even the most
transient transitional utilities to serve as integrated organizational
systems. On the other hand, to maintain random context sensitive devices
as well as reciprocal hardware the optimal management engineering offset
partial incremental time phasing. Often, optimal management engineering by
developing qualified incremental projections as well as adequate random
context. Therefore, in the representative organizational functionality
third generation superstructures become not feasible to generate
Portion of
secondary Text_16
In this paper we will demonstrate that b
using optimal management engineering to
partial incremental time phasing it leav
few random context sensitive capacity to
produce partial management control.
Nevertheless, stressing the systematic d
programming to offset functional unilate
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-68
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Text_9, Text_16 — con td .
Test
Word p rocessor sim u lation
Pu rp ose
If you r m onitor is u sed in w ord p rocessor w ork
stations or other ap p lications that call for large
am ou nts of text to be d isp layed , you can u se this
im age to sim u late actu al u ser cond itions.
Method
Select a su itable font size and text color. Ad ju st
you r m onitor’s brightness and contrast controls
to obtain the best im age. The characters in all areas
of the d isp lay shou ld be w ell form ed and in focu s.
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TVBar100 & TVBar_75 (TV form ats on ly)
Description:
The image consists of seven (7) vertical bars that fill
the entire active vid eo area. The color and ord er of
the bars is show n in the figure below . The TVBar100
im age has a p eak vid eo level of 100 IRE and the
TVBar_75 im age has a p eak vid eo level of 75 IRE.
Test:
Color Vid eo Perform ance
Purpose:
This general p u rp ose p attern can be u sed to check
the vid eo hand ling cap abilities of m ost p arts of a
television system .
Method:
When viewed on a TV screen, all of the colors should
be correct and in the ord er show n. The hu e and
intensity of each bar shou ld be u niform over the
entire bar.
The image can be used with a TV waveform analyzer
to check the performance of a video system. Indivdual
scan lines of each im age, as they w ou ld ap p ear on
a w aveform analyzer, are show n on the follow ing
page.
The im age is qu ite effective w hen u sed w ith a TV
vectorscop e to see how a vid eo system hand les an
encoded color signal. Vectorscope signatures of both
N TSC and PAL versions of the im age can be fou nd
on the follow ing p ages.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-70
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Horizontal Period of TVBar100 Image as it would appear
on a TV waveform analyzer connected to the 801GX’s TV output
1 Horizontal Period of TVBar_75Image as it would appear
on a TV waveform analyzer connected to the 801GX’s TV output
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Vectorscope signature of the TVBar_75 Image
using NTSC color encoding on the 801GX.
TV Vectorscope signature of the TVBar_75 Image
using PAL color encoding on the 801GX.
There are twice as many points as NTSC because the
color sub-carrier phase is reveresed every other scan line.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-72
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TVH atch (TV form ats on ly)
Descrip tion:
The im age consists of a w hite crosshatch on a black
backgrou nd . The lines form squ are boxes w hen the
d isp lay’s active vid eo area has a 4:3 asp ect ratio.
The vertical lines are m ad e u sing sine-squ ared (2T)
p u lses (T = 125 nSec for N TSC and T = 100 nSec for
PAL).
Test:
Convergence Ad ju stm ent
Purpose:
In ord er to accu rately p rod u ce an im age on a color
m onitor, the three electron beam s in the CRT m u st
m eet (converge) at the exact sam e location at the
sam e tim e. Lines d isp layed on a m is-converged
m onitor w ill ap p ear as several m u lticolored lines
and the transitions betw een d ifferent colored areas
w ill contain “fringes” of other colors.
Method:
The convergence adjustments of most color monitors
can be broken d ow n into tw o m ain categories.
The first set of ad ju stm ents, u su ally called “Static
Convergence”, calls for aligning the three beam s in
the center of the d isp lay. The id ea is to tu rn on all
three gu ns and ad ju st the variou s m agnets on the
convergence assembly to produce all white lines and
d ots in the center of the d isp lay. The convergence
assembly is located on the neck of the CRT. Different
monitors and CRT types may each require their ow n
m agnet ad ju stm ent sequ ence.
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After the center of the display is properly converged,
the outer areas can be adjusted by using the monitor’s
“Dynam ic Convergence” controls. The nu m ber of
controls, the area of the screen that they affect and
their ad ju stm ent p roced u re is d ep end ent u p on the
m onitor you ’re testing.
Test:
Sw eep Linearity Ad ju stm ent
Purpose:
In ord er to p resent an u nd istorted d isp lay, the
horizontal and vertical sw eeps of the electron beam
across the face of the CRT shou ld be at u niform
speed s. Any non-uniformity in the sw eep w ill cause
p ortions of an im age to be stretched w hile other
p ortions w ill be com p ressed . N on-linearity in a
m onitor can show u p in several w ays. It m ay be
p resent across the entire screen, a large p ortion of
the screen or it m ay be localized in a very sm all
area.
Method :
Ad ju st the d isp lay’s linearity controls so that all of
the boxes in the crosshatch are id entical in size. You
can m easu re the boxes w ith a ru ler or w ith a gau ge
m ad e for the m onitor you ’re testing. Any d eviation
shou ld be w ithin you r sp ec lim its.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. X1
4-74
Chapter 4: Built-In Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Making Connections
Line Voltage Selector
AC Power Connection
Display Connection
Display Codes
Computer Connection
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Line Voltage Selector
Make certain that the voltage selector sw itch is set
correctly before p lu gging the 801G* in.
❖ Op erating the 801G* w ith the w rong AC line
voltage setting or ad ju sting the line voltage se-
lector sw itch w hile the generator is p lu gged in
may cause serious d amage to the generator. This
typ e of d am age is not covered u nd er the p rod -
u ct w arranty nor service contracts.
You w ill find a recessed AC line voltage selector on
the left sid e of the 801G* cabinet. This selector has
tw o p ositions:
• 115V - for u se w ith line voltages betw een 86
and 132 VAC @ 48 to 66 H z
• 230V - for u se w ith line voltages betw een 180
and 250 VAC @ 48 to 66 H z
The 801G* is ship p ed from the factory w ith the line
voltage selector set for 115V.
❖ If the voltage in you r area is greater than 180V,
you m u st ad ju st the voltage selector to 230V
before p lu gging in the generator.
Selecting a line voltage.
The line voltage selector can be changed u sing a
p en, screw d river, or sim ilar p ointed tool.
1. M ak e su re th at th e 801G * p ow er cord is u n -
p lu gged .
2. In sert tool in to th e voltage selector slot.
3. Pu sh again st th e sid e of th e slot closest to th e
voltage lab el.
4. Slid e th e selector toggle u n til th e correct lin e
voltage com es in to fu ll view .
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX ¥ Rev. A
5-2
Chapter 5: Making Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FuseRequirements
The 801G* u ses the sam e AC m ains fu se for all AC
voltage ranges. The “Maintenance” chap ter has in-
form ation on the typ e of fu se u sed .
AC Power Connection
The pow er cord shipped w ith the 801G* is d esigned
for u se in the U.S.A. One end of this cord m ates
with an international-standard IEC-320 connector on
the generator. The other end is compatible with most
120V/ 15A grou nd ed ou tlets.
You m ay need to su bstitu te another p ow er cord for
the one w e p rovid e in ord er to m atch the line volt-
age and ou tlet configu ration in you r area. Interna-
tional power supply cords are available from several
sou rces. One su ch su p p lier is Panel Com p onents
Corp oration of Santa Rosa CA. Their telep hone
nu m ber is (707) 523-0600. In the U.S., call (800) 662-
2290.
AC Power Selection &Connection
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DisplayConnection
We d o not su p p ly test signal cables w ith the 801G*.
Most d isp lays com e w ith cabling for a p articu lar
com p u ter. This cabling w ill u su ally be com p atible
w ith one of the connectors on the 801G*. If not, you
can constru ct you r ow n test cables u sing the infor-
m ation in this section.
D-Sub Output Connectors
The 801GC and 801GX have fou r D-Su b ou tpu t con-
nectors as show n in figu re 5-1. The 801GF has three
connectors. These connectors follow common ind us-
try-stand ard p inou ts as show n on in table 5-1. H ere
is a qu ick su m m ary of the connectors:
• (801GC and 801GX Only) A single 9-p in re-
ceptacle is provid ed for d riving IBM-stand ard
MDA, CGA, and EGA (TTL vid eo) d isp lays.
The exact configuration of the signals that exit
from this connector vary d ep end ing on the
form at selected .
• A 13W3 recep tacle is p rovid ed for d riving
analog vid eo m onitors that w ork w ith SUN
w orkstations. This typ e of analog vid eo con-
nector m ay also be fou nd on som e versions of
Ap p le com p u ters.
• A 15-p in high-d ensity recep tacle is p rovid ed
for d riving VGA analog d isp lays that com p ly
w ith IBM and / or VESA stand ard s.
• A 15-pin receptacle is provided for driving most
Apple compatible d isplays. This connector fol-
low s Apple Macintosh II d isplay stand ard s for
analog vid eo ou tp u ts.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
5-4
Chapter 5: Making Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 5-1 D-sub Output Connectors
This Connector used on
801GC and 801GX only
Table 5-1
Pin
MDA
CGA
EGA
SUN APPLE VGA MAC
D-Sub Output Connector
Pinouts
1
2
3
4
5
GND GND GND GND GND
R
G
B
GND
R
CS
MØ
G
NC
NC
NC
NC
I
NC
R
G
B
I
Ir
R
G
B
Ig
VS
M2
VS
M2
GND GND
CS
HS
M2
GND
GND GND
CS
HS
6
7
8
9
V
HS
VS
NC
HS
VS
Ib
HS
VS
GND GND GND
M1
NC
B
M1
M1
GND
NC
MØ
MØ
10
11
12
13
14
15
(A1)
(A2)
(A3)
GND GND GND
M2
GND
VS
GND
GND
HS
MØ
M1
HS
VS
M3
R
G
B
B
G
R
Explanation of abbreviations used in table:
= Blue Video
CS = Digital (TTL level) Comp Sync
= Green Video
B
G
GND = Signal Ground
HS = Digital (TTL level) Horizontal Sync
I
= Intensity Bit (monchrome, LSB)
Ib = Blue Intensity Bit
Ig = Green Intensity Bit
Ir = Red Intensity Bit
M0 - M3 = Monitor Display Code Inputs
R
V
= Red Video
= Video Bit (monchrome, MSB)
VS = Digital (TTL level) Vertical Sync
Display Connection
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BNC Output Connectors
All models have five BNC connectors along the right
sid e as show n in figu re 5-2. They are for d riving
analog w orkstation and projection d isplays that use
RGB com p onent vid eo w ith or w ithou t sep arate
sync(s).
The 801GX has a sixth connector w hich is u sed for
the N TSC / PAL TV encod ed vid eo. We su p p ly a
separate BNC to RCA jack adapter (#30-00123), shown
on the left, to m atch the connectors u sed on m any
com m ercial TV typ e m onitors.
BNC to RCA
adapter supplied
with 802GX only
S-VIDEO Connector (801GX Only)
A 4 p osition m ini-DIN recep tacle is to the right of
the BN C connectors. It is u sed for the N TSC / PAL
TV com patible S-VIDEO lu m inance (Y) and chrom i-
nance (C) ou tp u ts.
V Sync
Blue Analog Video
Red Analog Video
S-VIDEO (801GX)
H / CS Sync
Green Analog Video
TV Video (801GX)
Y
C
Gnd
Gnd
Figure 5-2 BNC and S-VIDEO Output Connectors
DisplayCodes
Some displays have an identification code hard-wired
into their inp u t connector. This cod e consists of a
u niqu e com bination of floating and grou nd ed p ins
on the connector.
What is a Display
Code?
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
5-6
Chapter 5: Making Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Som e com puters and vid eo controller card s look for
the display codes and automatically adjust their hard-
w are to ou tp u t an ap p rop riate vid eo signal form at
for the d isp lay that is connected .
Problem s can occu r if a d isp lay ou tp u ts the w rong
cod e and it is connected to a com p u ter having an
automatic format adjustment feature. The wrong sig-
nal m ay be generated and the d isp lay m ay ap p ear
to be broken.
Checking a
DisplayCode
The 801G* is cap able of checking the statu s of the
cod e p ins in its D-su b connectors. These p ins are
id entified as M0 throu gh M3 in table 5-1. Each sig-
nal form at in the 801G* can be ind ep end ently set-
u p to test one or m ore of the d isp lay cod e p ins. The
form ats also can be set-u p w ith the exp ected cod e.
The “Form at” test im age show s both the exp ected
Table 5-2
Code M3 M2 M1 M0
Code M3 M2 M1 M0
Display Code Values
for all Sense Line
Combinations
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
8
9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
A
B
C
D
E
F
code and the code that is read as a single hexidecimal
nu m bers. The follow ing table show s the equ ivalent
hex cod e values for all possible input com binations.
A “0” ind icates a grou nd ed or logic low inp u t and
“1” ind icates either a floating or logic high inp u t
❖ The 801G* m erely read s and d isp lays the cod e.
It d oes not autom atically select or m od ify signal
form at d ata based on the cod e.
Some of the built-in ind ustry stand ard formats have
been set-u p to check for the p rop er cod es. The fol-
low ing tables list the formats and the expected id en-
tification cod es. The tables also show w hich p ins
need to be op en (1) or grou nd ed (0) to create the
correct cod e.
Display Connection & Display Codes
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUN Display Codes
The follow ing table list the cod es that are output by
SUN Microsystem s analog d isp lays:
Revised table not available at
time of publication
Table 5-3 SUN Display Codes
IBM VGA Display Codes
The following table list the codes that are hard-wired
into IBM VGA analog d isp lays:
Display
Code
M3
M2
M1
M0
GND
OPEN
GND
8512 & 8513 PS/2 Color Displays
8503 PS/2 Monochrome Display
8514 PS/2 Color Display
E
D
A
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
GND
OPEN
GND
OPEN
Table 5-4 IBM VGA Display Codes
Apple Macintosh Display Codes
The follow ing table lists the cod es that are hard -
w ired into m ost Ap p le d isp lays:
Display
Code
M2
M1
M0
external display not connected
13" HR Monochrome or Color
RS-170A TV
7
6
4
3
2
1
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
GND
OPEN
OPEN
GND
OPEN
GND
GND
21" Two-page Monochrome or Color
12" LC Monochrome or Color
15" One-page Monochrome
OPEN
OPEN
GND
OPEN
GND
GND
GND
OPEN
Table 5-5 Apple Display Codes
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
5-8
Chapter 5: Making Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ExternalProgramming Connections
The 801G* can op erated and p rogram m ed from an
external com p u ter or term inal. Tw o d ifferent com -
m u nications p orts are stand ard on the 801G* for a
com p u ter or term inal hook-u p . The RS-232C serial
p ort allow s the u nit to be connected to m any p er-
sonal com p u ters or d u m b term inals.The IEEE-488
(GPIB) p ort lets you u se the 801G* as a p rogram -
m able vid eo signal sou rce sou rce in a larger au to-
m ated test system .
Figure 5-3 Serial & IEEE-488 Ports
This section of the m anu al covers the actu al hard -
w are connections and the communications protocol.
The “Program m ing” chap ter p rovid es d etailed in-
form ation on all of the 801G*’s p rogram m ing cap a-
bilities. It also inclu d es all of the com m and s that
can be sent to the u nit.
SerialPortConnection
The 801G* u ses a 9 p in m ale D-su b p lu g as the se-
rial p ort connector. The p in-ou t of the connector is
the sam e as on a serial p ort for an IBM-PC AT com -
puter. A suitable null-mod em cable (part #30-00124)
is su p p lied w ith the 801G* to connect it to su ch a
p ort. This cable has fem ale connectors on each end
that are w ired for d irect connection from the 801G*
to su ch a com p u ter. Either end of the cable can be
p lu gged into the 801G*.
Display Codes & Serial Port Connections
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tw o ad apters are provid ed for connecting the 801G*
to com p u ters and term inals that u se 25 p in D-su b
connectors for their RS-232 ports. One ad apter (part
#30-00115) allow s you to attach the 801G* to a 25
p in fem ale connector p ort. The other (#30-00116)
ad ap ter is for u se w ith a 25 p in m ale p ort.
The cable and ad ap ters that are su p p lied w ith the
801G* are show n below . N o other serial cables or
ad ap ters are available from Qu antu m Data at this
tim e. The follow ing p ages p rovid e inform ation on
m aking you r ow n cables and ad ap ters to m eet you r
sp ecific set-u p .
Figure 5-4
Null-Modem Cable
9-pin fem. to 9-pin fem.
part #30-00124
Figure 5-4
Serial Adapter
9-pin male to 25-pin fem.
part #30-00115
Figure 5-6
Serial Adapter
9-pin male to 25-pin male
part #30-00116
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
5-10
Chapter 5: Making Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PC / Terminal Wiring
The cable and ad ap ters su p p lied w ith the 801G*
shou ld be su itable for m ost basic RS-232 hook-u p s
that u se either 9 p in or 25 p in D-Su b connectors. In
som e cases, you m ay need to m ake you r ow n sp e-
cial cable. The table below lists the connections re-
qu ired to attach the 801G* to the RS-232 p ort on a
term inal or PC typ e com p u ter.
801GX
9 pin D-Sub
Signal
Direction
PC-AT
9-pin D-Sub
PC or Terminal
25-pin D-Sub
pin-1 NC
pin-2 Rx
<-----
----->
----->
-------
pin-3 Tx
pin-2 Rx
pin-2 Tx
pin-3 Rx
pin-3 Tx
pin-4 DTR
pin-5 GND
pin-6 NC
pin-7 RTS
pin-8 CTS
pin-9 NC
pin-6 DSR
pin-5 GND
pin-6 DSR
pin-7 GND
----->
<-----
pin-8 CTS
pin-7 RTS
pin-5 CTS
pin-4 RTS
Table 5-6PC and Terminal Connections
• This table assu m es that you w ill be connect-
ing the 801G* to an IBM-com p atible com p u ter
having either a 9-p in or 25-p in serial connec-
tor. You w ill note that the p in nu m bers are
d ifferent for each typ e of connector.
• Com m unication w ith the 801G* is via RS-232C
p rotocol u sing factory d eafu lt settings of 2400
bau d , 8 d ata bits, 1 stop bit, no p arity, no
hand shake, fu ll d u p lex.
• The cu rrent firm w are allow s you to increase
the bau d rate beyond 2400 u sing a RTS/ CTS
hand shake. We therefore recom m end that you
w ire the RTS and CTS signals if you p lan to
operate the serial port at faster than 2400 baud*.
• The 801G* ou tp u ts a p ositive voltage on DTR
to ind icate that it is p ow ered on. Som e com -
p u ters hang if this ou tp u t is not connected to
their DSR inp u t.
5-11
Connecting to a PC or Terminal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Apple Macintosh Wiring
It is possible to connect the 801G* to a serial port on
a Macintosh computer. Apple uses two types of serial
connectors on its Macintosh series.
• The Mac Plu s, SE and II have an 8 p in fem ale
m ini-DIN connector.
• The Mac 128, 512 and 512E have a 9 p in fe-
m ale D-Su b connector.
The table and figu re below show how to m ake the
p rop er connections betw een the 801G* and a Mac
com p u ter u sing either typ e of connector.
Table 5-7
Macintosh Serial
Connections
801GX
9-pin D-Sub
Connector
Macintosh
8-pin DIN
Connector
Macintosh
9-pin D-Sub
Connector
pin 1 NC
pin-2 Rx
pin-3 Tx
pin-3 TXD-
pin-5 RXD-
pin-5 TXD-
pin-9 RXD-
pin-4 DTR
pin-4 GND and
pin-8 RXD+
pin-3 GND and
pin-8 RXD+
pin-5 GND
pin-6 NC
pin-7 RTS
pin-8 CTS
pin-9 NC
pin-2 HSKi
pin-1 HSKo
pin-7 HSKi
pin-6 +12V
Figure 5-7
8 pin Female
Mini-Din
Pin Numbering
• Com m unication w ith the 801G* is via RS-232C
p rotocol u sing factory d eafu lt settings of 2400
bau d , 8 d ata bits, 1 stop bit, no p arity, no
hand shake, fu ll d u p lex.
• The cu rrent firm w are allow s you to increase
the bau d rate beyond 2400 u sing a RTS/ CTS
hand shake. We therefore recom m end that you
w ire the RTS and CTS signals if you p lan to
operate the serial port at faster than 2400 baud*.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
5-12
Chapter 5: Making Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IEEE-488 (GPIB) Port Connection
The 801G* inclu d es an IEEE-488 p ort. This p ort al-
low s the 801G* to be integrated into most automated
test system s that u se IEEE-488 or GPIB com m u nica-
tions betw een instru m ents.
• An IEEE-488 stand ard 24 p osition m icro-rib-
bon connector is u sed as a connector.
• The communications protocol is per IEEE-488.2
specifications.
5-13
Connecting to a Macintosh & IEEE-488
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
5-14
Chapter 5: Making Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming capabilities overview
Built-in GUI editors
Serial & IEEE-488 programming
Command Listing and Descriptions
Chapter 6: Programming
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ProgrammingCapabilitiesOverview
The 801G* vid eo generators are p ow erfu l p ieces of
test equ ip m ent right ou t of the box. The factory
d efau lt system settings give you im m ed iate access
to all of the bu ilt-in test im ages and bu ilt-in signal
form ats. H ow ever, you can p rogram the op eration
of the 801G* to m eet your special testing need s. The
highlights of all of the 801G*’s p rogram m ing fea-
tu res are p resented in this section. Detailed infor-
m ation for m ost featu res w ill be fou nd in follow ing
sections.
All m od els featu re a Grap hics User Interface (GUI)
that can be u sed for m any p rogram m ing op erations
on the the 801G*. All you need is a vid eo d isp lay
that is com p atible w ith any existing stored form at
that has at least 640 active p ixels and 480 active
lines. The knobs and bu ttons on the 801G* are then
u sed to select and m od ify the inform ation show n
on the d isp lay.
Many programming functions can also be performed
over the the RS-232 and IEEE-488 p orts. A su itably
equ ip p ed com p u ter or term inal connected to one of
these communications ports can be used for d irectly
communicating w ith the 801G* as w ell as upload ing
and d ow nload ing d ata files.
Editing and adding signal formats
The GUI and the com m u nications ports can be u sed
for ad d ing your ow n signal formats and ed iting any
form ats that are alread y stored in the 801G*.
Editing the format knob directory
The d efau lt op erating m od e of the 801G* u ses the
u p p er knob to select form ats from an internal for-
m at knob d irectory. The d efau lt knob d irectory in-
clu d es all of the stand ard bu ilt-in form ats. The
d irectory can be ed ited to inclu d e any com bination
of bu ilt-in and / or u ser d efined form ats.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX ¥ Rev. A
6-2
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating custom test images
User d efined cu stom test im ages can be created and
ed ited . The im ages are m ad e u p of one or m ore
d raw ing p rim itives. Som e of the p rim itives in the
cu rrent firm w are are single p ixel d ots, lines, rect-
angles (filled and u nfilled ) and ovals (filled and
u nfilled ). The grayscale and color tables u sed in the
im age can be selected by the u ser. The cu stom test
im ages are saved in non-volatile m em ory. Cu stom
im ages can be ad d ed to the list of im ages that can
be selected w ith the Im age knob d irectory or to a
test sequ ence.
Editing the image knob directory
The d efau lt op erating m od e of the 801G* u ses the
bottom knob to select images (test patterns) from an
internal im age knob d irectory. The d efau lt knob
d irectory inclu d es all of the stand ard bu ilt-in test
im ages. Th e d irectory can be ed ited to in clu d e
anycom bination of built-in and / or custom im ages
in any ord er d esired .
Creating a test sequence
The 801G* can be p rogram m ed to ru n in a test se-
qu ence m od e on pow er-u p. The test sequ ence m od e
allow s an operator to go through a d efined series of
signal form ats and test im ages u sing a single knob.
This mod e of operation is useful in a manufacturing
test environment where the same test procedure needs
to be repeated on m any id entical d isplays. Mu ltiple
test sequ ences can be stored in the generator and
selected by the op erator.
Editing & Copying Formats and Custom Images
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting system parameters
The follow ing system p aram eters are stored in the
801G*’s non-volatile system m em ory:
• The size of the boxes u sed in the “BriteBox”
test im age. The size of the box shou ld m atch
the size of you r light m eter’s p robe. The fac-
tory default size is 50.4 mm (2.00 inches) square.
• The text string that ap p ears in the u p p er p or-
tions of the “SMPTE133” and “Cu bes” test
im ages. The factory d efau lt string is “Qu an-
tu m Data.”
• The analog vid eo ou tp u ts’ calibration factors.
These calibration factors allow you to extend
the u sefu lness of the 801G*’s self calibration
fu nction. The ind ivid u al analog vid eo ou tp u t
levels can be tw eaked to com p ensate for fixed
losses or gains in you r test set-u p. The factory
d efau lt setting calibration factors is 1.000 for
all ou tp u ts.
• The analog sync calibration factor. The cali-
bration of the composite sync level of the green
com p onent vid eo ou tp u t can also be tw eaked .
The factory d efault setting is 1.000 for the cali-
bration factor.
• The reference rate calibration factor. The 801G*
u ses a crystal controlled oscillator as the ref-
erence for all tim ing signals. The crystal fre-
qu ency has a m axim u m error of ±50 p p m . The
801G* hard w are and firm w are is cap able of
com p ensating for this sm all am ou nt of error
by ap p lying a u ser set calibration factor. The
factory d efau lt setting is 1.000 for the calibra-
tion factor.
• The m axim u m p ixel clock rate u sed for error
checking form ats. All 801G* generators w ill
op erate, to som e extent, at p ixel rates beyond
their sp ec sheet lim its. The m axim u m rate can
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-4
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
be set to a higher lim it if it is know n
that a particular unit w ill w ork reliably
at the higher lim it.
• The gam m a correction flag. This flag
d etermines w hether ind ivid ual formats
can control the ap p lication of gam m a
correction or if gam m a correction is
d isabled regard less of a form at’s set-
ting. The factory d efau lt setting is to
allow gamma correction to be controlled
by ind ivid u al form ats.
There are tw o w ays of changing the settings
of these p aram eters:
• They can be restored to their d efau lt
factory settings as p art of a u ser initi-
ated system reset. This w ill also restore
the entire format storage memory to its
factory d efau lt contents.
• A su itably equ ip p ed com p u ter or ter-
m inal connected to one of the com m u -
nications p orts can be u sed to set the
p aram eters to u ser d efined settings.
ProgrammerÕs utility disk
We norm ally su p p ly one MS-DOS com p at-
ible utility disk (3-1⁄2 inch DS) with each 801G*
ship p ed from ou r factory. The d isk is su it-
able for use on IBM-PC and compatible com-
p u ters equ ip p ed w ith a serial p ort. The d isk
contains several sam p le d ow nload files for
the 801G*. These files can be copied and edited
u sing any ASCII text ed itor you w ish to ru n
on you r com p u ter. The d isk also contains a
“sharew are” version of a terminal emulation
p rogram . The d isk d oes not contain a text
ed itor.
Custom Images, Test Sequences and System Parameters
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The u tility d isk m ay also contain a text file called
“README.DOC” that has inform ation on any last
m inu te ad d itions and changes on p rogram m ing the
unit.
A Microsoft Wind ow s® com p atible softw are inter-
face p ackage is also available. Please contact you r
Qu antu m Data for ord ering inform ation.
Operating via remote control
The 801G* can be u sed as a p rogram m able vid eo
test signal sou rce in an au tom ated test system . The
801G* featu res both RS-232 and IEEE-488 com m u ni-
cations p orts. A su itably equ ip p ed com p u ter con-
nected to one of these p orts can be u sed to control
m ost asp ects of the generator’s op eration.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-6
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Built-In Editors
You can p rogram m any asp ects 801G*’s op eration
using the built-in Graphics User Interface (GUI). You
p rogram the 801G* by ed iting d ifferent file stru c-
tu res in the u nit. The cu rrent version of 801G* firm -
w are su p p orts five (5) GUI ed itors as follow s:
• A Form at Ed itor for creating and m od ifying
test signal set-u p s.
• A Form at Kn ob D irectory Ed itor for m od ify-
ing the list of form ats that are selected w ith
the “Form ats” knob.
• An Im age Kn ob D irectory Ed itor for m od ify-
ing the list of im ages that are selected w ith
the “Im ages” knob.
• A Custom Image Editor for creating and modi-
fying you r ow n test p atterns
• A Seq u en ce Ed itor allow s you to d efine a se-
qu ence of form ats and im ages that can be se-
lected w ith a single tu rn of a knob.
• An Sequence Knob Directory Editor for modi-
fying the list of sequ ences that can selected in
the sequ ence m od e of op eration.
You need a su itable d isp lay connected to 801G*’s
test signal ou tp u ts in ord er to u se the ed itors. First,
the d isp lay m u st be com p atible w ith at least one of
the signal formats that are already stored in the 801G*.
Also, both the form at and the d isp lay m u st su p p ort
a m inim u m resolu tion of 640 p ixels horizontally by
480 lines vertically. With all of the form ats that w e
p re-p rogram into the 801G*, you shou ld be able to
find one that is com p atible w ith a d isp lay you al-
read y have. If none of the stored form ats w ill w ork
w ith the d isp lay you w ish to u se, you w ill need to
p rogram a su itable form at u sing the 801G*’s com -
m u nications p orts.
To p rogram the 801G* u sing the GUI, you first con-
nect your d isplay and find a compatible format. You
should then select the “Format” test image. The image
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
shou ld be stable and legible on you r d isp lay. You
shou ld also d ou ble check the active vid eo d ata to
m ake su re you have at least 640 p ixels by 480 lines
of active vid eo.
Once you have confirm ed p rop er op eration, sw itch
the 801G* to its p rogram m ing m od e:
1) Tu rn the 801G*’s p ow er off.
2) Turn the pow er back on w hile hold ing d ow n
the “Im age” bu tton on the front p anel.
3) Select a com p atible form at u sing the Form at
knob.
4) Rotate th e “Im age” kn ob. You w ill see
ad d itonal im age nam es appear on the LCD w in-
d ow . Most are GUI ed itor screens that w ill ap -
pear as text on your d isplay screen. Pressing the
“Im age” bu tton so that it is lit w ill activate the
ed itor that is being d isp layed .
You w ill also see an image name of “CustmImg”
in the list. It is a d efau lt cu stom im age that can
be ed ited and saved u sing another nam e. Press-
ing the “Im age” bu tton w ill activate the cu stom
im age ed itor.
The generator’s front p anel knobs and bu ttons p er-
form d ifferent fu nctions in the GUI screens w hen
an ed itor is activated . In most cases, the upper “For-
m at” knob is u sed to select an item in the screen to
be mod ified . The low er “Image” knob usually mod i-
fies or tw eaks the selected item . The cu rrent bu tton
functions are id entified by eight inverted text labels
at the bottoms of the screens. Available button func-
tions are show n w ith an intensified backgrou nd on
the screen and lit bu ttons on the front p anel. Un-
available button functions are d immed on the screen
and front p anel. More inform ation on sp ecific knob
and button functions w ill be given in the d iscussion
of each ed itor.
To sw itch the 801G* ou t of the GUI p rogram m ing
m od e, cycle the p ow er w ithou t hold ing any of the
bu ttons d ow n.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-8
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FormatEditor
The form at ed itor is one of the screens available in
the p rogram m ing m od e. You can view and m od ify
the contents of any form at stored in non-volatile
m em ory u sing the form at ed itor. A typ ical form at
ed itor screen is show n here. The actual ed itor screen
u ses m ostly lit text on a black backgrou nd .
Interlace Control
Horizontal Parameters
Sync Output Control
Hor. & Vert. Parameter Names
Vertical Timing Parameters
Format Name & Location
Entry Units of Measure
Pixel Rate & Period
Name: MDA_m7
Location:
Entry Units: Time
Pixel Rate:
1
16.257 MHz
61.512 ns
Horizontal
18.432 KHz*
Vertical
49.816 Hz
Rate:
Active:
Blank:
Period:
720 pixels
44.289 us*
9.965 us
350 lines
18.989 ms*
1.085 ms
162 pixels
882 pixels
20 lines
370 lines
8.858 inches 225.000 mm
54.253 us*
20.074 ms*
Physical size: 11.811 inches 300.000 mm
Pulse delay:
Pulse width:
EQ Before:
EQ After:
Scan:
9 pixels
144 pixels
0.554 us
8.858 us
0 lines
16 lines
0 lines
0 lines
0.000 ms
0.868 ms
Figure 6-1
Format Editor Screen
Progressive (non-interlace)
none
ACS kind:
DCS kind:
DSS kind:
Sync select:
Video kind:
Video bias:
Video swing:
Sync swing:
Gamma:
On: -G-
American ORed
American separate
DSS
2-bit mono
DS Polarity: H+ V- C+
DS Gate: Hon Von Con
Pedestal: OFF 7.5 IRE
0.000 volts blank minus ground
0.714 volts white minus blank
0.286 volts blank minus sync
OFF
2.200
E Code read: F
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ Exit ≥ ≥<-Cursor≥≥Cursor->≥≥ Save ≥ ≥ Save ≥≥Save As ≥≥ Undo ≥ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
Display code expected:
≥
Display Code Parameter
Video Output Parameters
The 801G*’s top knob m oves a selection box am ong
the p aram eters on the screen. Knob rotation cau ses
a “snaking” action. The exact p ath taken w ill d e-
p end on the u nits of m easu re you have selected for
d ata entry. The exam p le screen show s the m em ory
location as being selected .
KnobFunctions
The bottom knob m od ifies the p aram eter that the
top knob has selected . If a non-nu m eric p aram eter
(e.g. sync typ e) is selected , the bottom knob w ill
cycle throu gh a list of available choices. If a nu -
Editing Formats
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
m eric param eter is selected , an und erscore cursor is
p laced below a d igit in the nu m ber. The “Cu rsor”
bu ttons m ove the d igit cu rsor and the bottom knob
changes the selected d igit.
In m any cases, entering a new valu e of one p aram -
eter w ill affect the valu es of other p aram eters as
w ell. The ed itor au tom aticall u p d ates all related
p aram eters w hen you enter a new valu e.
The u p p er left corner show s the nam e and m em ory
location nu m ber of the selected form at. When you
first u se the ed itor, this inform ation w ill be for for-
m at that is being u sed to d rive the d isp lay. You
select the form at you w ish to ed it by first selecting
location number parameter. Rotating the bottom knob
w ill take you throu gh all of the form ats stored in
teh 801G*. You create new form ats by ed iting an
existing form at and saving you r w ork u sing a new
nam e and location.
❖ The location nu m ber is only u sed by the form at
ed itor. The form at knob d irectory and test se-
qu ences all u se ju st the form at nam e w hen se-
lecting form ats from m em ory.
The u nit of m easu re u sed for tim ing entries is also
shown in the upper left corner. You have two choices
for the u nits of m easu re. You can enter in u nits of
real “Tim e” (µSec and m Sec) or in “M ach in e” u nits
(pixels and lines). You should use machine units for
p recise control of you r form ats. The 801G* inter-
nally rou nd s off real tim e entries to m atch the near-
est m achine u nit of tim e. A single p ixel p eriod is
the basic u nit of m easu re for all horizontal tim ing
p aram eters. All horizontal real tim e entries w ill be
rou nd ed to an integer m u ltip le of the p ixel clock
p eriod . A single horizontal p eriod is the basic u nit
of m easu re for all vertical tim ing p aram eters. All
vertical real tim e entries w ill be rou nd ed to an in-
teger m u ltip le of the horizontal p eriod . You can
update your real time entries to their actual rounded
valu es by having the calcu late fu nction on and se-
lecting m achine u nits of m easu re.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-10
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The u p p er right corner show s the Pixel Rate. The
p ixel clock is the m aster clock u sed to generate all
of the form at’s tim ing inform ation. The p ixel clock
p eriod is also show n.
The rem aind er of the top half of the screen is taken
u p by the horizontal and vertical param eters. These
p aram eters d eal w ith the ou tp u t signal tim ing and
p hysical size of the active vid eo area. The nam es of
the parameters are shown at the far left of the screen.
The horizontal timing and size parameters are shown
in tw o colu m ns. Most of the inform ation in the left
hand colu m n is in m achine u nits and m ost of infor-
mation in the right hand column is in real time units.
The only excep tion is the p hysical size. You can
alw ays enter the size in either inches or m illim e-
ters. The vertical p aram eters are set u p in a sim ilar
manner.
❖ See a later section in this chap ter called “Creat-
ing you r ow n form at file” for m ore d escrip tive
information on format parameters and how they
relate to each other.
The first line for both sets of parameters is the “Rate.”
The horizontal rate is the nu m ber of tim es p er sec-
ond you r d isp lay scans in the horizontal d irection.
The vertical rate is number of times per second your
display scans from the top to the bottom of the screen.
This rate is equ al to the fram e rate for non-inter-
laced formats and tw ice the frame or picture refresh
rate for interlaced form ats.
Entering a new valu e for the p ixel rate, horizontal
rate or the vertical rate w ill cau se the other tw o
rates to change. This is becau se the new ly entered
rate becomes the reference used to calculate the other
tw o. The ratio of the pixel rate to the horizontal rate
w ill alw ays be equal to the total number of pixels in
one horizontal p eriod . The ratio of the horizontal
rate to the vertical rate w ill alw ays be equ al to the
num ber of lines in one vertical period for non-inter-
laced form ats. The ratio w ill alw ays be equ al to one
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
half the nu m ber of lines in one vertical p eriod for
interlaced form ats. The cu rrent reference rate is
m arked w ith an asterisk.
The H orizon tal Period is alw ays equ al to the su m
of the H orizon tal Active and the H orizon tal Blan k -
ing tim es. The 801G* u ses tw o of these p aram eters
as references to calculate the third. The last two edited
p aram eters w ill alw ays be u sed as the references.
The cu rrent references are m arked w ith asterisks.
The horizontal p eriod , in m icrosecond s, is the re-
cip rocal of the horizontal rate. Entering a new real
tim e valu e for the horizontal p eriod w ill re-calcu -
late the horizontal rate and m ake it the reference
rate.
The Vertical Period is alw ays equ al to the su m of
the Vertical Active and the Vertical Blan k ing p eri-
od s. For interlaced form ats, these period s are for an
entire fram e (2 field s) of vid eo. The 801G* u ses tw o
of these p aram eters as references to calcu late the
third . The last tw o ed ited p aram eters w ill alw ays
be used as the references. The current references are
m arked w ith asterisks. The vertical period , in m illi-
second s, is the reciprocal of the frame rate. Entering
a new real tim e value for the vertical period w ill re-
calcu late the vertical rate and m ake it the reference
rate.
The horizontal and vertical Physical size parameters
are the physical d im ensions of the active vid eo area
of the d isp lay you w ill be d riving w ith the form at
They d o not affect the tim ing of any of the signals
com ing ou t the 801G* or the overall active vid eo
size of an im age. H ow ever, they d o affect the w ay
som e of the bu ilt-in test im ages w ill ap p ear on the
d isplay’s screen. The 801G* u ses this inform ation to
p rop erly d raw tru e circles and squ ares as w ell as
brightness boxes that are supposed be specific physi-
cal sizes. Using the w rong valu es m ay cau se circles
to look like ovals and square boxes to look like rect-
angles.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-12
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H orizon tal Pu lse d elay is the p eriod of tim e from
the last active p ixel in a scan line to the lead ing
edge of the horizontal sync pulse. Some display spec
sheets refer to this p eriod as the horizontal sync
front porch. H orizon tal Pu lse w id th is the w id th of
the horizontal sync p u lse itself.
Vertical Pu lse d elay is the p eriod of tim e from the
last active scan line to the lead ing ed ge of the ver-
tical sync p u lse. Som e d isp lay sp ec sheets refer to
this period as the vertical sync front porch. Vertical
Pu lse w id th is the w id th of the vertical sync p u lse
itself. The 801G* alw ays u ses the entered valu es for
non-interlaced Am erican (E.I.A.) sync typ es. The
valu es u sed are d ifferent for other sync typ es:
❖ If you had a non-interlaced form at that had the
vertical sync delay set to 8 lines and vertical sync
w id th set to 3 lines, a Eu rop ean (C.C.I.R.) selec-
tion w ou ld p rod u ce 7.5 lines of d elay and 2.5
lines of sync.
❖ The 801G* blanks the half lines of active vid eo
that w ou ld ap p ear at the top and bottom of in-
terlaced formats. Vertical sync delay is measured
from the last fu ll line of active vid eo in each
field . If you had an interlaced form at that had
the vertical sync d elay set to 8 lines and vertical
sync w id th set to 3 lines, you w ou ld have the
follow ing resu lts: An Am erican sync selection
w ou ld p rod u ce 8 lines of d elay in one field and
8.5 lines of delay in the second field. There would
be 3 lines of sync in both field s. A Eu rop ean
sync selection w ou ld p rod u ce 7.5 lines of d elay
in one field and 8 lines of d elay in the second
field . There w ou ld be 2.5 lines of sync in both
field s.
EQ Before sets the how m any scan lines ju st p rior
to the vertical sync interval w ill contain p re-equ al-
ization p u lses. EQ After sets the how m any scan
lines right after the vertical sync interval w ill con-
tain p re-equ alization p u lses. The p u lses are only
ad d ed to com p osite sync ou tp u ts that have equ al-
ization p u lses enabled .
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Scan setting d eterm ines if the vid eo and sync
tim ing is non-interlaced (progressive) or interlaced .
Most of the bottom half of the ed itor screen is taken
u p by the vid eo and sync typ e settings. The first
three lines d etermine the behavior of the sync selec-
tion buttons. ACS kind determines what type of com-
p osite sync is ad d ed to the analog vid eo ou tp u ts
w hen the “ACS” bu tton is p u shed . The O n setting,
to the right, selects w hich of the com p onent analog
vid eo outputs w ill have composite sync ad d ed . D CS
k in d d eterm ines w hat typ e of d igital (TTL) com -
p osite sync is generated w hen the “DCS” bu tton is
p u shed . D SS k in d d eterm ines w hat typ e of d igital
(TTL) sep arate horizontal and vertical syncs are
generated w hen the “DSS” bu tton is p u shed .
The choices for the ACS and D CS sync typ es are:
• n on e The operator can not make this selection.
N othing hap p ens w hen the bu tton is p ressed .
• Am erican H D TV O Red
• Am erican O Red A sim ple Boolean OR com bi-
nation of the ind ivid u al horizontal and verti-
cal sync p u lses.
• Am erican w /serr Com p osite sync w ith serra-
tion p u lses d u ring the vertical sync p eriod .
• Am erican w /serr & EQ Com p osite sync w ith
serration p u lses d u ring the vertical sync p e-
riod and equalization pulses ad d ed before and
/ or after the vertical sync p eriod . The serra-
tion and equalization pulses occur at tw ice the
horizontal rate.
• Eu rop ean H D TV O Red
• Eu rop ean O Red A sim ple Boolean OR com bi-
nation of the ind ivid u al horizontal and verti-
cal sync p u lses. The vertical sync d elay and
p u lse are a half line shorter than show n.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-14
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Eu rop ean w /serr Com p osite sync w ith serra-
tion pulses during the vertical sync period. The
vertical sync d elay and p u lse are a half line
shorter than show n.
• Eu rop ean w /serr & EQ Com p osite sync w ith
serration p u lses d u ring the vertical sync p e-
riod and equalization pulses ad d ed before and
/ or after the vertical sync period . The vertical
sync d elay and p u lse are a half line shorter
than show n. The serration and equ alization
p u lses occu r at tw ice the horizontal rate.
• Am erican H D TV w /serr & EQ
• Am erican H D TV w /serr
• Eu rop ean H D TV w /serr & EQ
• Eu rop ean H D TV w /serr
• Jap an ese H D TV O Red
• Jap an ese H D TV O Red w /serr & EQ
• Jap an ese H D TV O Red w /serr
The choices for the D SS sync typ e are:
• n on e The operator can not make this selection.
N othing hap p ens w hen the bu tton is p ressed .
• Am erican Sep arate Ind ivid u al horizontal and
vertical sync p u lse ou tp u ts.
• Am erican H D TV Sep arate
• Eu rop ean H D TV Sep arate
• Jap an ese H D TV Sep arate
• Eu rop ean Sep arate Ind ivid u al horizontal and
vertical sync p u lse ou tp u ts. The vertical sync
d elay and p u lse w id th are a half line shorter
than show n.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The D S Polarity p aram eter, to the right of the DSS
setting, sets the logical p olarities of the H orizontal,
Vertical and Com posite d igital sync ou tpu ts. Rotat-
ing the bottom knob cycles throu gh all p ossible
polarity combinations. A “+” setting indicatesa posi-
tive going p u lse. A “-” setting ind icates a negative
going p u lse.
The D S G ate p aram eter, below the DS Polarity p a-
ram eter, sets ou tp u t gating of the H orizontal, Ver-
tical and Com p osite d igital sync ou tp u ts. Rotating
the bottom knob cycles throu gh all p ossible gating
com binations. Gating an ou tp u t “off” overrid es the
front p anel bu tton settings.
Syn c select sets w hich sync ou tp u ts w ill be active
w hen the form at is first load ed .
Vid eo k in d sets the typ e of vid eo signal you w ish
to generate. The 801G* supports the follow ing vid eo
types:
• Analog Y Monochrome (gray scale) component
vid eo w ith either com posite sync ad d ed to the
vid eo or sep arate sync(s).
• An alog RG B Color (red , green and blu e) com -
ponent video with either composite sync added
to the green ou tp u t or sep arate sync(s).
• An alog TV Y (801GX only) Monochrom e (lu -
m inance w ithou t any color su b-carrier) com -
posite television video with controlled rise and
fall tim es.
• An alog TV EYC (801GX only) Encod ed color
(lu m inance and chrom inance w ith color su b-
carrier) com p osite television vid eo w ith con-
trolled rise and fall tim es. N TSC su b-carrier
used w hen Am erican ACS is selected and PAL
su b-carrier u sed w hen Eu rop ean ACS is se-
lected .
• An alog TV YPrPb Encod ed color (lu m inance
and color d ifference).
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-16
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• D ig. V (801GC, 801GX only ) Monochrom e
d igital (TTL) vid eo @ 1 bit-p er-p ixel
• D ig. VI (801GC, 801GX only ) Monochrom e
d igital (TTL) vid eo @ 2 bits-p er-p ixel (sep a-
rate vid eo and intensity bits)
• D ig. RG B (801GC, 801GX only ) Color d igital
(TTL) vid eo w ith one bit p er color (black and
7 satu rated colors)
• D ig. RG BI (801GC, 801GX only ) Color d igital
(TTL) vid eo w ith one vid eo bit p er color p lu s
a com m on intensity bit (black, 7 satu rated
colors, gray and 7 d im m ed colors)
• Dig. RrGgBb (801GC, 801GX only ) Color digital
(TTL) vid eo w ith one vid eo bit and intensity
bit p er color.
The Ped estal, Vid eo b ias, Vid eo sw in g, Syn c sw in g
and G am m a param eters only affect form ats that are
set for “Analog mono” or “Analog color” video types.
Ped estal d eterm ines if a blanking p ed estal is u sed
and , if so, how far the black level is above the p ed -
estal. The level is a p ercentage of the vid eo sw ing.
Tu rning the p ed estal off m akes blanking and black
level the sam e. Vid eo b ias is the DC offset of the
signal and is measured from ground to the blanking
level. The cu rrent hard w are d esigns only su p p ort a
bias of 0.00 volts. Video swing sets the peak-to-peak
amplitude of the video (including any blanking). Sync
sw in g sets the p eak-to-p eak am p litu d e of com p os-
ite sync (if it is selected by the ACS param eter). The
G am m a settings d eterm ine if gam m a correction is
to be u sed and , if so, the am ou nt of correction to be
applied .
Pressing the Ch eck button error checks your entries.
If the format is good , you can just Can cel the check-
ing operation. If errors are found , you can automati-
cally correct some of them by having the editor Justify
you r entries.
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❖ Cau tion : Saving a form at w ith errors in it m ay
cause major problems w hen you later try to load
the form at. Pressing the Save or SaveAs bu tton
d oes N OT error check you r entries. You shou ld
check you r ed ited form at for errors before sav-
ing it.
Pressing the Save button saves your format the name
and memory location show n at the top of the screen.
u nless you started w ith an EPROM resid ent form at.
In that case, you w ill be p rom p ted for a new nam e.
See the next paragraph for saving w ith a new nam e.
If you w ish to keep the original version of the for-
m at you started w ith, p ress the SaveAs bu tton to
save you r w ork u sing a new nam e. A w ind ow w ill
ap p ear show ing the nam e and a list of characters
you can u se for the new nam e. The top knob m oves
a cu rsor throu gh the nam e being ed ited and the
bottom knob m oves a cu rsor throu gh the available
characters. The Clear bu tton clears the nam e being
edited. The Delete button removes the selected char-
acter in the nam e. The In sert bu tton ad d s the se-
lected character in the character list to the nam e at
the current cursor location. Press the OK button when
you are done changing the name. You can now press
the “SaveAs” bu tton.
Pressing the Exit bu tton leaves the form at ed itor
and retu rns the 801G* to norm al p rogram m ing op -
eration. If there are any u nsaved changes, you w ill
be asked if you w ant to save you r w ork before ex-
iting.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-18
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Format Knob Directory Editor
Going throu gh all of the available form ats w ith the
Form at knob can be tim e consu m ing. This is p ar-
ticu larly tru e if you regu larly u se only a few for-
m ats that m ay be scattered in m em ory. The 801G*
can be set u p to show only the form ats you w ant, in
the ord er you w ant, w hen the “Form at” knob is
tu rned . The 801G* m aintains a list of these form ats
in non-volatile m em ory. This list can be ed ited . You
w ill need to ed it the list if you w ish to u se the knob
with formats you have created. A typical format knob
Format List
Available Files
MDA_m7
MDA_m7
HGC_text
HGCgraph
CGA_m14
EGA_m2
HGC_text
HGCgraph
CGA_m14
EGA_m2
IBM_3179
IBM_3164
AT&T_SVC
AT&T_IVC
AT&T_EVC
IBM_3179
IBM_3164
AT&T_SVC
AT&T_IVC
AT&T_EVC
PAL_920
PAL_768
PAL_640
RS170A
RS170B
MAC_TVus
MAC_TVos
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ Done ≥ ≥ Move ≥≥
≥≥ Delete ≥ ≥
≥≥ Insert ≥≥ Remove ≥ ≥ Modify≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
d irectory ed itor screen is show n here. The actu al
ed itor screen u ses m ostly lit text on a black back-
ground .
The left hand sid e of the screen show s the cu rrent
contents of the form at knob d irectory. The form ats
ap p ear in the ord er that they are selected by the
“Form at” knob d u ring norm al op eration.
While ed iting, the “Form at” knob m oves a selection
box throu gh the left hand list. The list w ill scroll if
it can not fit on the screen.
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right hand sid e show s all of the form ats that
are in the 801G*. They are listed in ord er of ascend -
ing m em ory locations. Em p ty or corru p ted m em ory
locations are skip p ed .
The bottom “Im age” knob m oves a selection box
throu gh the right hand list. The list w ill scroll if it
can not fit on the screen.
The In sert bu tton m oves the selected form at in the
left hand colu m n and all of the form ats below it
d ow n one line. It then copies the selected form at on
right hand sid e into the vacated p osition.
The D elete button removes the selected format from
the left hand colu m n. All form ats below the d eleted
form at m ove u p .
Pressing the Move button lets you move the selected
form at in the left hand colu m n to another p osition
in the list. The form at is m oved by rotating the top
knob. Pressing the “Move” button a second time will
leave the form at in the new p osition.
Pressing the Rem ove bu tton lets you d elete the for-
m at file that is selected in the right hand colu m n.
This w ill erase the entire contents of the file from
non-volatile m em ory. Since this op eration can d e-
stroy a lot of p rogram m ing w ork, an on-screen
m essage w ill ask you to confirm the rem oval of the
file. Pressing the Yes or O K bu tton w ill erase the
file. Pressing the N o or Can cel button w ill abort the
rem oval op eration.
Pressing the Modify button activates the format editor
for the form at that is selected in the right hand
column. You can use this feature to check and modify
a form at before ad d ing it to the knob d irectory.
Exiting the form at ed itor w ill au tom atically retu rn
you to the form at knob d irectory ed itor.
Pressing the D on e bu tton saves the ed ited list and
exits the ed itor.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-20
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Knob Directory Editor
Going throu gh all of the available im ages w ith the
Im age knob can be tim e consu m ing. This is particu -
larly tru e if you regu larly u se only a few im ages
that m ay be scattered over the knob locations. The
801G* can be set u p to show only the im ages you
want, in the order you want, when the “Image” knob
is tu rned . The 801G* m aintains a list of these im -
ages in non-volatile m em ory. This list can be ed -
ited . You w ill need to ed it the list if you w ish to use
the knob w ith im ages you have created . A typ ical
im age list ed itor screen is show n here. The actu al
ed itor screen u ses m ostly lit text on a black back-
ground .
Image List
Available Files
Flat
ColorBar
GrayBar
Raster
BriteBox
Citizen
Dot_10
Dot_12
Dot_24
ColorBar
Linearty
CGA_m14
Dot_24
Raster
GrayBar
SMPTE133
Hatch_10
Hatch_12
Hatch_24
Grill_44
Grill_33
Grill_22
Grill_11
Linearty
SMPTE133
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ Done ≥ ≥ Move ≥≥
≥≥ Delete ≥ ≥
≥≥ Insert ≥≥ Remove ≥ ≥ Modify≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
The left hand sid e of the screen show s the cu rrent
contents of the im age knob d irectory. The im ages
ap p ear in the ord er that they are selected by the
“Im age” knob d u ring norm al op eration.
While ed iting, the “Form at” knob m oves a selection
box throu gh the left hand list. The list w ill scroll if
it can not fit on the screen.
The right hand sid e show s all of the available im -
ages. The bu ilt-in im ages are at the top of the list.
The bu ilt-in im ages are follow ed by a factory d e-
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
fau lt cu stom im age. This im age is u sed a starting
point to creating you ow n cu stom im ages. Any u ser
created cu stom im ages in non-volatile m em ory are
at the bottom of the list.
The bottom “Im age” knob m oves a selection box
throu gh the right hand list. The list w ill scroll if it
can not fit on the screen.
The In sert bu tton m oves the selected im age in the
left hand column and all of the images below it down
one line. It then cop ies the selected im age on right
hand sid e into the vacated p osition.
❖ The cu rrent firm w are d oes not allow entering a
second ary version of a bu ilt-in im age to the list.
The primary version will need to be first selected
d u ring norm al op eration. Pressing the “Im age”
bu tton w ill then select the second ary version.
The D elete bu tton rem oves the selected im age from
the left hand colu m n. All im ages below the d eleted
im age m ove u p .
Pressing the Move button lets you move the selected
im age in the left hand colu m n to another p osition
in the list. The im age is m oved by rotating the top
knob. Pressing the M ove bu tton a second tim e w ill
leave the im age in the new p osition.
If a cu stom im age is cu rrently selected in the right
hand colu m n, p ressing the Rem ove bu tton lets you
d elete that im age file. This w ill erase the entire con-
tents of the file from non-volatile memory. Since this
op eration can d estroy a lot of p rogram m ing w ork,
an on-screen m essage w ill ask you to confirm the
rem oval of the file. Pressing the Yes or O K bu tton
w ill erase the file. Pressing the N o or Can cel button
w ill abort the removal operation w ithout erasing the
file.
If a cu stom im age is cu rrently selected in the right
hand colu m n, p ressing the M od ify bu tton activates
the im age ed itor for that im age. You can u se this
featu re to check and m od ify an im age before ad d -
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-22
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ing it to the knob directory. Exiting the custom image
ed itor w ill au tom atically retu rn you to the im age
knob d irectory ed itor.
Pressing the D on e bu tton saves the ed ited list and
exits the ed itor.
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Custom Image Editor
There m ay be tim es w hen none of the 801G*’s m any
bu ilt-in test im ages (p atterns) qu ite m eet you r re-
qu irem ents. In these cases, you m ay be able to cre-
ate a custom image to match your exact requirements.
A custom image consists of one or more simple geo-
m etric objects and alp hanu m eric characters (p rim i-
tives). The color, relative size and relative p osition
of the objects are all ed itable param eters for m ost of
the p rim itives. The im ages scale to the active vid eo
size of the currently load ed format. A custom image
can be saved in non-volatile m em ory and recalled
ju st like any of the bu ilt-in im ages.
Im ages are created u sing the cu stom im age ed itor.
It is one of the screens available in the p rogram -
m ing m od e. A typ ical im age ed itor screen is show n
here. The actual ed itor screen uses mostly lit text on
a black backgrou nd .
Custom Image: newimage
Primitive
Step
Primitive
Color
W
H
X
0
Y
0
F
0
Rectangle
Oval
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rectangle
Oval
Rectangle Magenta
White 640 480
Red
Line
Dot
Grid
H-Grill
V-Grill
Characters
Limits
Line
Text
End
Green
Blue
CenterMark
Triangle
Format
HatchI-O
HatchO-I
Cross
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ Exit ≥ ≥ Draw ≥≥ Insert ≥≥ Delete ≥ ≥ Move ≥≥<-Cursor≥≥ Save ≥ ≥Change ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
The left sid e of the screen d isp lays the contents of
the cu stom im age. This inclu d es the typ e, ord ering
and associated p aram eters for each d raw ing p rim i-
tive in the im age. The p rim itives are d raw n in the
ord er show n. The p aram eters in the far right hand
column w ill change d epend ing on the type of primi-
tive selected .
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-24
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right sid e of the screen d isp lays the p aram eter
currently being mod ified . All parameter changes are
m ad e on this sid e before being entered to the left
sid e.
The 801G*’s u p p er “Form at” knob m oves a selec-
tion box am ong the steps and param eters on the left
sid e of the screen. The knob m oves the selection
box horizontally across the screen u ntil the step
nu m ber or last p aram eter is selected . Then the next
m ove w ill be to the ad jacent row . This cau ses a
“snaking” action. If the list goes beyond the bottom
of the screen, tu rning the knob fu rther clockw ise
w ill cau se the list to scroll u p . The exam p le screen
has the rectangle p rim itive in step #1 selected .
The lower “Image” knob modifies the parameter that
the top knob has selected . If a non-nu m eric p aram -
eter (e.g. p rim itive typ e) is selected , the right sid e
of the screen w ill show a list of available prim itives
and the bottom knob w ill m ove a selection box u p
and d ow n throu gh this list. Long lists w ill scroll u p
and d ow n on the screen. If a nu m eric p aram eter is
selected , the valu e is cop ied to the right sid e of the
screen and an u nd erscore cu rsor is p laced below a
d igit in the num ber. The <_Cu rsor button m oves the
d igit cu rsor and the bottom knob changes the se-
lected d igit. Pressing the Ch an ge bu tton cop ies the
entry on the right sid e to the left sid e.
Availab le Prim itives: The table on the next p age
lists all of the d raw ing p rim itives su p p orted by the
cu rrent firm w are.
❖ The size and location coord inates show n in the
ed itor are in u nits of p ixels. The valu es that
actu ally are saved in m em ory are based on p er-
centages of the total number of active pixels and
lines in the form at. This m eans that you r im age
w ill look abou t the sam e no m atter how m any
active p ixels and lines are in the form at at the
tim e the im age is d raw n. This also m eans that if
you create cu stom im age w ith one form at and
ed it it w ith another, the nu m bers in the ed itor
screen w ill change for the sam e im age.
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4-1
Primitive Name Parameters
Available drawing
primitives in a
Custom Image
Rectangle
Oval
color, width, height, left, top, fill patn
color, width, height, left, top, fill patn
color, x1, y1, x2, y2
color, x, y
Line
Dot
Grid
color, # of xboxes, # of yboxes
color, line width
H-Grill
V-Grill
color, line width
Characters
Limits
color, character #, font#
color
CenterMark
Triangle
Format
Hatch_I-O
Hatch_O-I
Cross
color
color, x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3, fill patn
color, left x, top y
color, # of xboxes, # of yboxes
color, # of xboxes, # of yboxes
color
Text
color, x, y, font#, text string
color, x, y
Seq. Step
Availab le Colors: The color list show s 63 colors
and grays as being available. H ow ever, the 801G*
can only w ork w ith 16 colors at a tim e. One of the
colors m u st be black. Attem p ting to u se m ore than
16 colors m ay cau se p arts of the im age to d raw
w ith the w rong color. A nu m ber in the color nam e
refers to its % intensity level. The cu rrent firm w are
d oes not su p p ort ed iting the colors or gray levels
Table 4-2
Available colors in a
Custom Image
Black
Red
Cyan50
Brown
Gray3
Gray5
Gray33
Gray37
Gray40
Gray43
Gray70
Gray73
Gray75
Gray77
Yellow75
Blue75
Green
Yellow
Magenta75
Cyan75
Blue
Magenta
Cyan
Gray7
Gray10
Gray13
Gray17
Gray47
Gray48
Gray50
Gray51
Gray80
Gray83
Gray87
Gray90
HueI
HueQ
HueNegI
HueNegQ
White
Red50
Green50
Yellow50
Blue50
Gray20
Gray23
Gray25
Gray27
Gray30
Gray53
Gray57
Gray60
Gray63
Gray67
Gray93
Gray95
Gray97
Red75
Foreground
Background
Clear
Magenta50
Green75
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-26
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4-3
Fill patterns in a
Custom Image
The “fill p atn” p aram eter d eterm ines if a p rim itive
is d raw n as a one p ixel thick ou tline or as a p attern
filled object. Fill p atterns consist of variou s on-off
pixel combinations in a repeating 16 x 16 pixel block.
A setting of “grayp atn0” has all fill p ixels tu rned
off and a setting of “grayp atn100” has all p ixels on.
grayoat0
0% of pixels on (No fill)
7% of pixels on
graypat7
graypat13
graypat19
graypat25
graypat31
graypat38
graypat44
graypat50
graypat63
graypat69
graypat75
graypat81
graypat88
graypat94
graypat100
checker1
13% of pixels on
19% of pixels on
25% of pixels on
31% of pixels on
38% of pixels on
44% of pixels on
50% of pixels on
63% of pixels on
69% of pixels on
75% of pixels on
81% of pixels on
88% of pixels on
94% of pixels on
94% of pixels on (Solid fill)
Checkerboard alternating one (1) pixel on and
one (1) off
checker2
checker3
checker4
Checkerboard alternating two (2) pixels on
and two (2) off
Checkerboard alternating three (3) pixels on
and three (3) off
meme
Fill pattern
Checkerboard alternating four (4) pixels on
and four (4) off
bars_V1
bars_V2
bars_V4
bars_V8
bars_H1
bars_H2
bars_H4
bars_H8
meme
Vertical bars one (1) pixel wide
Vertical bars two (2) pixels wide
Vertical bars four (4) pixels wide
Vertical bars eight (8) pixels wide
Horizontal bars one (1) pixel wide
Horizontal bars two (2) pixels wide
Horizontal bars four (4) pixels wide
Horizontal bars eight (8) pixels wide
Repeating MEME pattern
FCC_EMI
Fill pattern
FCC_EMI
Repeating three (3) pixels on and one pixel off
pattern
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Rectangle p rim itive d raw s a rectangle w hose
sid es are p arallel to the vertical and horizontal axis
of d isp layed vid eo. The p rim itive u ses six (6) p a-
rameters. The first is the color. The next tw o param-
eters are the w id th and height of the rectangle in
p ixels. The second tw o p aram eters are the X and Y
coord inates for the top left-hand corner of the rect-
angle. The last param eter is the fill flag. The follow -
ing example draws a 50% gray rectangular filled solid
that is 15 p ixels w id e by 20 p ixels high and has its
top left corner located 50 p ixels to the right and 40
p ixels below the top left corner of active vid eo:
Rectangle
Gray50
15
2Ø
5Ø
4Ø
1
The Oval p rim itive d raw s an oval w hose axes are
p arallel to the vertical and horizontal axis of d is-
p layed vid eo. The size and p osition of the oval is
d efined by its fram ing rectangle. The fram ing rect-
angle is a rectangle w hose sid es are both tangent to
the oval at fou r p oints and are p arallel to the verti-
cal and horizontal axis of displayed video. The fram-
ing rectangle is not d raw n as p art of the p rim itive.
The figu re show s the relationship of an oval to its
fram ing rectangle.
height
left, top
width
The p rim itive u ses six (6) p aram eters. The first is
the color. The next tw o p aram eters are the w id th
and height of the fram ing rectangle in p ixels. The
second tw o p aram eters are the X and Y coord inates
for the top left-hand corner of the framing rectangle.
The last p aram eter is the fill flag. The follow ing
exam ple d raw s a red oval that is 240 pixels w id e by
150 p ixels high and has the fram ing rectangle’s top
left corner located 20 p ixels to the right and 10 p ix-
els below the top left corner of active vid eo:
Oval Red 24Ø 15Ø 2Ø 1Ø Ø
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-28
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Line p rim itive d raw s a line betw een any tw o
p oints. The line is one p ixel thick. The p rim itive
u ses five(5) p aram eters, the color and the X and Y
coord inates for both end p oints. The follow ing ex-
am p le d raw s a yellow line betw een a p oint 20 p ix-
els to the right and 5 pixels below the top left corner
of active vid eo and a p oint 320 p ixels to the right
and 240 p ixels below the top left corner of active
vid eo:
Line Yellow 2Ø 5 32Ø 24Ø
The Dot prim itive d raw s a single pixel d ot. A d ot is
the smallest graphic element that can be d raw n. The
p rim itive u ses three (3) p aram eters, the color and
the X and Y coordinates. The following example draws
a w hite d ot that is at a p oint 200 p ixels to the right
and 300 p ixels below the top left corner of active
vid eo:
Dot White 2ØØ 3ØØ
The Grid p rim itive d raw s a crosshatch of a given
color and form ing a given nu m ber of boxes in each
d irection. All lines are 1 pixel thick. All of the lines,
in a given d irection, are equ ally sp aced . Any re-
maining pixels are d istributed as equally as possible
arou nd the p erim eter of the grid . This m ay cau se
the first and last lines in each d irection not to be at
the very edges of video. The following example draws
a 75% gray level grid that has 14 boxes horizontally
and 10 boxes vertically:
Grid
Gray75
14
1Ø
The H -Grill p rim itive d raw s equ ally sp aced hori-
zontal lines that form a grill over the entire active
vid eo area. The gap betw een the lines is equ al to
the thickness of the lines. The gap s are not tou ched
and w ill show any previously draw n primitives. The
p rim itive u ses tw o (2) p aram eters. The first is the
color of the lines. The second is the thickness of the
lines. The follow ing exam p le d raw s a green hori-
zontal grill w hose lines are 4 p ixels thick and have
4 p ixel gap s betw een the lines:
H-Grill
Green
4
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The V-Grill prim itive d raw s equ ally spaced vertical
lines that form a grill over the entire active vid eo
area. The gap betw een the lines is equal to the thick-
ness of the lines. The gap s are not tou ched and w ill
show any p reviou sly d raw n p rim itives. The p rim i-
tive uses tw o (2) parameters. The first is the color of
the lines. The second is the thickness of the lines.
The follow ing exam p le d raw s a cyan vertical grill
w hose lines are 16 p ixels thick and have 16 p ixel
gap s betw een the lines:
V-Grill
Cyan
16
The Characters p rim itive fills the active vid eo area
w ith a single rep eating character. The sp acing be-
tw een the characters is controlled by the size of the
tw o d im ensional p ixel array that is u sed to d efine
the character. The size of the p ixel array is d eter-
m ined by the character and font selected .
Table 4-4
#0 sys16
IBM-type alphanumeric font that has printable
characters for ASCII codes 0-126. It uses an 8 x 16
monospacedcharacterblock.
Available font sets
for the Characters
and Text primitives
#1 OPIX 9
Alphanumeric font that has printable characters for
ASCII codes 32-126. It uses a 5 x 7 monospaced
characterblock.
#2 focusmac
#3 focus_12
Single character used in the Focus_Oo test image;
ASCII code = 79; 8 x 6 character block
Two characters used for the Focus_Cx and Focus_H
testimages;ASCIIcodes=67and72;8x6character
blocks
#4 memesony
#5 kanjikan
SinglecharacterusedforvariousMEMEimages;ASCII
code = 77; 18 x 18 character block
Single Japanese KanjiKan character used in the
KanjiKan image; ASCII = 75; 22 x 22 character block
#6 focusat 5
#7 focusat 6
#8 focusat 7
#9 focusat 8
#10 memeplus
Asingle@characterusedintheLinFocusimage;ASCII
= 64; 8 x 16 character block
Asingle@characterusedintheFocus@6image;ASCII
= 64; 16 x 16 character block
Asingle@characterusedintheFocus@7image;ASCII
= 64; 16 x 16 character block
Asingle@characterusedintheFocus@8image;ASCII
= 64; 16 x 16 character block
A
meme plus character used in focus and
convergence; ASCII = 77; 43 x 49 character in a 49
x 51 block
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-30
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The p rim itive u ses three (3) p aram eters. The first is
the color. The second param eter is the cod e nu m ber
of the character. For m ost alp ha-nu m eric fonts, the
character nu m ber w ill be the sam e as the d ecim al
ASCII cod e nu m ber of the character. The last p a-
ram eter is the nu m ber of the font library.
The current firmware includes ten font sets. The fonts
are d escribed in the table on the previous page. Font
sets #Ø and #1 have a fu ll set of ASCII u p p er and
low er case letters p lu s nu m bers and p u nctu ation
m arks. Font #Ø is u sed for the GUI ed itor screens.
The rem aining font sets only have one or tw o char-
acters each. These are u sed bu the focu s checking
test im ages.
The follow ing exam p le d raw s w hite u p p er case let-
ter “X” characters from font set #0:
Characters
White
88
Ø
The Lim its p rim itive p laces nine (9) m arkers that
d efine the active vid eo area. An “L” shap ed m arker
is p ositioned at each corner. “T” shap ed m arkers
are centered along each ed ge of vid eo and a sm all
cross is p laced at the center of vid eo. The p rim itive
u ses a single param eter, the color u sed for all of the
markers. The follow ing example d raw s w hite mark-
ers:
Limits
White
The Centerm ark p rim itive d raw s a sm all cross in
the center of active vid eo. The vertical line is 2 p ix-
els thick if the form at has an even nu m ber of active
p ixels. The horizontal line is 2 p ixels thick if the
format has an even number of active lines. The primi-
tive u ses a single p aram eter, the color of the cross.
The follow ing exam p le d raw s a red m arker:
Centermark
Red
The Triangle p rim itive d raw s a triangle d efined by
its three end p oints. The p rim itive u ses eight (8) p a-
ram eters. The first is the color. The next three p airs
of p aram eters are the X and Y coord inates for the
three end p oints. The last p aram eter is the fill flag.
More com plex filled polygons can be bu ilt u p u sing
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a series of joined filled triangles. The follow ing
exam p le d raw s a 50% red filled triangle that looks
like an arrow head pointing to the right near the top
left corner of active vid eo:
Triangle
Red50
10
5
10
25
40
15
1
The Format primitive show s some basic information
abou t the form at that is d riving the d isp lay. The
first line shows the number of horizontal active pixels
and vertical active lines. The last nu m ber on the
line show s the nu m ber of field s p er fram e (1 for
non-interlaced and 2 for interlaced ). The second line
show s the horizontal rate and the third line show s
the vertical rate. The text is on a black rectangu lar
backgrou nd w ith a single p ixel bord er.
The p rim itive u ses three (3) p aram eters. The first is
the color of the text and bord er. The next tw o p a-
ram eters are the X and Y coord inates for the top
left-hand corner of the block of text. The follow ing
exam p le d raw s a blu e block form at d ata block 30
p ixels to the right and 200 p ixels below the top left
corner of active vid eo:
Format
Blue
30
200
The H atch_I-O p rim itive d raw s a crosshatch from
the “Inside-Out” of a given color and forming a given
nu m ber of boxes in each d irection. The p rim itive
alw ays has center lines that d ivid e the active vid eo
exactly in half in each d irection. The vertical center
line is 2 p ixels thick if the form at has an even nu m -
ber of active p ixels. The horizontal center line is 2
p ixels thick if the form at has an even nu m ber of
active lines. All other lines are 1 p ixel thick. If an
od d nu m ber of boxes is entered for a given d irec-
tion, a half box w ill be p laced at each end of the
crosshatch. All of the lines, in a given d irection, are
equ ally sp aced . Any rem aining p ixels are d istrib-
u ted as equ ally as p ossible arou nd the p erim eter of
the grid . This m ay cau se the first and last lines in
each d irection not to be at the very ed ges of vid eo.
This m ay also cau se any half boxes to be slightly
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-32
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
larger. The following example draws a yellow cross-
hatch that has 15 boxes horizontally and 9 boxes
vertically:
HatchI-O
Yellow
15
9
The H atch_O-I p rim itive d raw s a crosshatch from
the “Outside-In” of a given color and forming a given
nu m ber of boxes in each d irection. All lines are 1
p ixel thick. The first and last lines in each d irection
are at the very ed ges of active vid eo. All of the lines,
in a given d irection, are equ ally sp aced . Any re-
m aining p ixels are ad d ed to the boxes along the
horizontal and vertical centers of the im age. The
following example draws a green crosshatch that has
15 boxes horizontally and 9 boxes vertically:
HatchO-I
Green
15
9
The Cross p rim itive d raw s a large centered cross
that fills the active vid eo area. The vertical line is 2
p ixels thick if the form at has an even nu m ber of
active p ixels. The horizontal line is 2 p ixels thick if
the form at has an even nu m ber of active lines. The
p rim itive u ses a single p aram eter, the color of the
cross. The following example draws a magenta cross:
Cross
Magenta
The Text prim itive d raw s a u ser d efined text string.
The p rim itive u ses five (5) p aram eters. The first is
the color. The next tw o p aram eters are X and Y
coord inates for the location of the top left corner of
the text. The fou rth p aram eter is the nu m ber of the
font set. A list of available font sets is show n on an
earlier p age.
The last p aram eter is the text string to be d raw n.
When you ed it this parameter, a small w ind ow pops
u p that show s the cu rrent string contents and a
character list. The knobs and keys are used to modify
the string.
The following example draws a white “Hello World”
text string near the top left corner of the screen using
font set #0:
Text
White
10
10
0
Hello World
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Seq. Step p rim itive only ap p ears if the im age is
u sed in a test sequ ence that has step nu m ber d is-
play enabled. It draws the step number that the image
is a part of. The prim itive uses three (3) param eters.
The first is the color. The next tw o p aram eters are
X and Y coord inates for the location of the top left
corner of the text box.
The follow ing exam p le d raw s a cyan step nu m ber
box near the top left corner of the screen:
Seq.Step
Cyan 10
10
The “Insert,” “Delete” and “Move” buttons are used
to mod ify the d raw ing list. These buttons only w ork
w hen a step num ber is selected . The “Insert” button
p u ts a blank step at the selected p osition. All step s
below the insertion p oint are m oved d ow n. The
“Delete” button rem oves the selected step. All steps
below the deleted step move up. Pressing the “Move”
bu tton lets you m ove the selected step to another
p osition in the list. The step is m oved by rotating
the top knob. Pressing the “Move” bu tton a second
tim e w ill leave the step in the new p osition.
You can test you r im age at any tim e by p ressing
and hold ing d ow n the “D raw ” button. Releasing the
bu tton w ill change the d isp lay back to the ed itor
screen.
Pressing the “Save” bu tton show s a w ind ow w ith
the nam e that w ill be u sed to save the im age file to
non-volatile memory. The original file name is shown.
Saving back to the sam e file nam e w ill overw rite
the original contents. If you w ish to keep the origi-
nal version of your custom image, you need to change
the nam e in the w ind ow u sing the bottom knob and
buttons. Saving a new im age file d oes not autom ati-
cally ad d it to the Im age list.
Pressing the “Exit” bu tton leaves the cu stom im age
ed itor and returns the 801G* to norm al operation. If
there are an u nsaved changes, you w ill be asked if
you w ish to save you r w ork p rior to exiting.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-34
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is a Sequence?
The norm al op erating m od e of the 801G* u ses the
top knob to select a form at and the bottom knob to
select a test image. The production testing of a multi-
m od e d isp lay m ay requ ire the rep eated u se of sev-
eral d ifferent form ats and im ages in a given ord er.
A sequ ence lets you p air u p form ats and im ages to
form a single test step . The step s are organized to
m atch you r test p roced u re for a p articu lar d isp lay.
The rotation of a single knob then allow s an op era-
tor to step forw ard and backw ard s throu gh the se-
quence. You can also have the sequence continuously
cycle throu gh all the step s, stop p ing for ind ivid u -
ally defined amounts of time at each step. This mode
is u sefu l for bu rn-in testing or for ru nning d isp lays
at trad e show s. To m ake ru nning a sequ ence a bit
more foolproof, you can program the 801G* to power-
u p in the sequ ence m od e. You can control w hich
sequences files an operator can access in the norm al
op erating m od e.
More than one sequ ence file can be stored in non-
volatile m em ory. The nu m ber of sequ ence files you
can store d ep end s on the nu m ber of step s in each
file. A total of about 1280 to 1500 steps can be saved ,
d ep end ing on how m any sep arate files are u sed .
Before you can use a sequence file, you need to create
one. And , in ord er to d o that, you need to u se the
“Sequ ence File” ed itor and “Sequ ence Knob d irec-
tory” ed itor.
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sequence Knob Directory Editor
The only w ay to get to the Sequ ence file ed itor is
via the Sequence Knob directory editor. We w ill first
go through the use of the Knob d irectory ed itor and
then exp lain the u se of the Sequ ence ed itor.
The 801G* can be set u p to allow an op erator to ru n
only certain sequ ence files in the sequ ence m od e.
The 801G* m aintains a list of these accessible se-
qu ences in non-volatile m em ory. You w ill need to
ed it the list if you w ish to ad d sequ ences you have
created . A typ ical sequ ence knob d irectory ed itor
screen is show n here. The actu al ed itor screen u ses
m ostly lit text on a black backgrou nd .
Sequence List
Available Files
NEC_3D
NEC_3PG
NEC_6FG
NewSeq
Sony1320
Sony1340
BTS901
BTS900
Brco1200
Sony6000
NEC3PG
NEC3D
NEC6FG
Shrp1650
VS1202
EHom9000
HitCM100
Vis_24K
HJVC_300
NEC_9PG
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ Done ≥ ≥ Move ≥≥
≥≥ Delete ≥ ≥
≥≥ Insert ≥≥ Remove ≥ ≥ Modify≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
The left hand sid e of the screen show s the cu rrent
contents of the sequ ence knob d irectory. They ap -
pear in the ord er that they are selected by the upper
knob in the sequ ence m od e of op eration.
While ed iting, the “Form at” knob m oves a selection
box throu gh the left hand list. The list w ill scroll if
it can not fit on the screen.
The right hand sid e show s all of the sequ ences that
are in the 801G*. They are listed in ord er of ascend -
ing m em ory locations.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-36
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The bottom “Im age” knob m oves a selection box
throu gh the right hand list. The list w ill scroll if it
can not fit on the screen.
The In sert bu tton m oves the selected sequ ence in
the left hand colum n and all of the sequences below
it down one line. It then copies the selected sequence
on right hand sid e into the vacated p osition.
The D elete bu tton rem oves the selected sequ ence
from the left hand colu m n. All sequ ences below the
d eleted sequ ence m ove u p .
Pressing the Move button lets you move the selected
sequ ence in the left hand colu m n to another p osi-
tion in the list. The sequ ence is m oved by rotating
the top knob. Pressing the “Move” bu tton a second
tim e w ill leave the sequ ence in the new p osition.
Pressing the Rem ove bu tton lets you d elete the se-
qu ence file that is selected in the right hand col-
u m n. This w ill erase the entire contents of the file
from non-volatile m em ory. Since this op eration can
d estroy a lot of p rogram m ing w ork, an on-screen
m essage w ill ask you to confirm the rem oval of the
file. Pressing the Yes or O K bu tton w ill erase the
file. Pressing the N o or Can cel button w ill abort the
rem oval op eration.
Pressing the M od ify bu tton activates the sequ ence
ed itor for the sequ ence that is selected in the right
hand colu m n. You can u se this ed itor to check, cre-
ate or m od ify a sequ ence before ad d ing it to the
knob d irectory. The file called “N ew Seq” is the fac-
tory d efau lt sequ ence file. It can be u sed as a start-
ing p oint in creating new sequ ences. Exiting the
sequence ed itor w ill automatically return you to the
sequ ence knob d irectory ed itor.
Pressing the D on e bu tton saves the ed ited list and
exits the ed itor.
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SequenceEditor
Sequ ences are created and m od ified u sing the se-
qu ence ed itor. It is accessed throu gh the sequ ence
knob d irectory ed itor in the p rogram m ing m od e. A
typ ical sequ ence ed itor screen is show n here. The
actu al ed itor screen u ses m ostly lit text on a black
background .
Sequence: MultSync
Image Version Delay
Available Files
Step Format
BriteBox
ColorBar
Cubes
1
2
VGA_m18 Linearty
0
1
0
1.0
2.0
1.0
-.-
-.-
-.-
-.-
-.-
-.-
-.-
-.-
-.-
-.-
-.-
-.-
-.-
---
VGA_m7p
---
FocusCx
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
3
Dot_10
4
Dot_12
5
---
Dot_24
6
---
Flat
7
---
FocusCx
FocusH
8
---
9
---
FocusOo
Format
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
---
---
GrayBar
Grill_11
Grill_22
Grill_44
Hatch_10
Hatch_12
---
---
---
---
---
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ Exit ≥ ≥ Move ≥≥ Clear ≥≥ Delete ≥ ≥ Insert ≥≥ Save ≥≥ Mode ≥ ≥Change ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
Most of the left sid e of the screen d isp lays the con-
tents of the sequ ence. This inclu d es the step nu m -
ber, format, image and auto-sequence d elay time for
each step . The nam e of the sequ ence file being ed -
ited is show n at the top of the left sid e. If the label
“Mod e:” ap p ears to the right of the nam e, it m eans
the 801G* w ill norm ally p ow er-u p in the given “se-
qu ence” m od e u sing this sequ ence file.
The inform ation show n on right sid e of the screen
w ill d ep end on w hat is selected on the left sid e of
the screen. If you are in the “Step” column, the right
sid e w ill be blank. If you are in the “Form at” col-
umn, a list of all available formats stored in the 801G*
is show n. If you are in the “Im age” colum n, a list of
all available bu ilt-in and cu stom im ages is show n.
If you are in the “Version” colu m n, a zero (0) or a
one (1) is show n. If you are in the “Delay” colu m n,
a list of available d elay tim es is show n.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-38
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The top knob moves a selection box among the steps
and p aram eters on the left sid e of the screen. The
knob moves the selection box horizontally across the
screen u ntil the step nu m ber or last p aram eter is
selected . Then the next m ove w ill be to the ad jacent
row . This cau ses a “snaking” action. If the list goes
beyond the bottom of the screen, tu rning the knob
further clockw ise w ill cause the list to scroll up. The
example screen shows a blank “Image” entry selected.
The bottom knob norm ally m oves a selection box
u p and d ow n the list of choices on the right sid e.
Long lists w ill scroll u p and d ow n on the screen.
The Ch an ge bu tton cop ies the entry on the right
sid e to the left sid e. If the sequ ence nu m ber is se-
lected on the left sid e, the bottom knob is u sed to
go throu gh the list of all sequ ence files in m em ory.
The exam p le screen show s “GrayBar” selected .
Leaving a Form at and / or Im age entry for a given
step empty, will cause the 801G* to use the last format
or im age show n above the em p ty p osition(s). The
example sequence shown would use format VGA_m18
for step #2 and the FocusCx im age for step #3. It
d oes not m atter if the op erator is going forw ard or
backw ard throu gh the step s.
The In sert, D elete and M ove bu ttons are u sed to
m od ify the sequ ence list. These bu ttons only w ork
w hen a step num ber is selected . The “Insert” button
p u ts a blank step at the selected p osition. All step s
below the insertion p oint are m oved d ow n. The
“Delete” button rem oves the selected step. All steps
below the deleted step move up. Pressing the “Move”
bu tton lets you m ove the selected step to another
p osition in the list. The step is m oved by rotating
the top knob. Pressing the “Move” bu tton a second
tim e w ill leave the step in the new p osition.
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pressing the M od e bu tton cycles the p ow er-on se-
qu ence m od e settings as ind icated by the “Mod e”
label to the right of the sequ ence nam e at top of the
screen. The follow ing settings are avaiable:
N o lab el: The sequ ence is not selected to to be the
p ow er-on sequ ence.
Step : The step s are m anu ally selected w ith the bot-
tom knob, w ith stop s at both end s of the list.
Wrap : The step s are m anu ally selected w ith the
bottom knob. Going p ast the last step ju m p s to
the first step and vice versa.
Au to: The sequ ence au tom atically and continou sly
cycles throu gh all the step s. The ind ivid u al
“Delay” settings for each step d eterm ine how
long the generator p au ses at each step .
Step-Display, Wrap-Display and Auto Display: Work
the sam e w ay as the p reviou s choices w ith the
ad d ition of the step number being ad d ed to each
test im age.
❖ Only one sequ ence file can be the “Pow er-on”
sequence file at a time. Making the sequence you
are ed iting the “Pow er-on” sequ ence w ill d eac-
tivate the “Pow er-on” m od e statu s of all other
sequ ence files in m em ory. If no sequ ence is se-
lected as the “Pow er-on” sequ ence, the 801G*
w ill then p ow er-u p in the “N orm al” op erating
mod e.
Pressing the Save bu tton show s a w ind ow w ith the
nam e that w ill be u sed to save the sequ ence file to
non-volatile memory. The original file name is shown.
Saving back to the sam e file nam e w ill overw rite
the original contents. If you w ish to keep the origi-
nal version of you r sequ ence, you need to change
the nam e in the w ind ow u sing the knobs and bu t-
tons. Saving a new sequ ence file d oes not au tom ati-
cally ad d it to the sequ ence knob d irectory.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-40
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pressing the Exit bu tton leaves the sequ ence ed itor
and retu rns to the sequ ence knob d irectory ed itor.
If there are any u nsaved changes, you w ill be asked
if you w ant to save you r w ork before exiting.
Running a Sequence
The 801G* will power-up in the sequence mode under
the follow ing cond itions:
• One of the sequ ence files stored in the 801G*
is p rogram m ed as the “Pow er-on” sequ ence.
The p reviou s section on the sequ ence ed itor
has inform ation on how to d o this
• N one of the front p anel bu ttons are held in
w hen the 801G* is p ow ered u p .
Step #1 of the “Pow er-on” sequ ence is selected at
the end of the p ow er-u p cycle. The top row of the
the LCD window will show the name of the sequence
and the bottom row w ill show the step nu m ber.
The low er “Im age” knob is u sed to m ove forw ard
and backw ard throu gh the step s in the sequ ence.
A manual mode sequence can be set to continuously
cycle throu gh all the step s, by rotating the bottom
knob a fu ll tu rn clockw ise beyond the last step A
m essage on the LCD w ill confirm that the cycle is
ru nning. The cycle is stop p ed by rotating the bot-
tom knob cou nter-clockw ise.
❖ The 801G* w ill rem em ber if the sequ ence w as in
continu ou s cycle on p ow er d ow n. If so, it w ill
continu ou s cycle on p ow er on.
The u p p er “Form at” knob is u sed to load other se-
qu ence files. The list of files that can be selected by
the knob is m od ified u sing the sequ ence knob d i-
rectory ed itor in the p rogram m ing m od e.
❖ Cau tion: A program m er can m ake any sequ ence
the “Pow er-on” sequ ence w ithou t having it ap -
p ear on the sequ ence knob d irectory. The 801G*
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
w ill p ow er-u p in the sequ ence m od e w ith the
selected sequ ence. H ow ever, load ing another
sequ ence file w ith the u p p er knob, w ill not al-
low you to get back to the original p ow er-u p
sequ ence file.
Cancelling the Sequence Mode
You cancel the p ow er-u p sequ ence m od e w ith the
follow ing step s:
• Pow er-up the 801G* in the programming mode
(“Im age” bu tton held d ow n on p ow er-u p ).
• Select the sequ ence knob d irectory ed itor.
• Press the “Mod ify” bu tton. It d oes not m atter
which sequence file is selected in the right hand
colu m n. The w ill p u t you in the sequ ence ed i-
tor.
• Press the M od e bu tton at least one tim e. Keep
p ressing and releasing the bu tton u ntil the
“Mode:” label to the right of the sequence name
goes aw ay.
• Tu rn off the p ow er.
The next tim e the 801G* is tu rned on, it w ill be in
the norm al op erating m od e. The top knob w ill se-
lect formats and the bottom knob w ill select images.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-42
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating your own format file
There are tw o w ays to ad d signal form ats to the
801G*. You can create and ed it form ats u sing the
bu ilt-in GUI ed itor that is d iscu ssed in an earlier
section. You can also create form at files on a com -
p u ter and d ow nload them to the 801G* u sing either
the RS-232 or IEEE-488 p orts.
Before you can d ow nload a form at file, you have to
have to create it on you r com p u ter. The files con-
tain ASCII text that d efines all of the form at’s p a-
ram eters. An exam ple of su ch a file is show n on the
next page. You can u se any text ed iting program on
you r com p u ter that can save you r w ork as straight
ASCII text. This section of the m anu al has inform a-
tion on how to d efine a form at for a p articu lar d is-
p lay. Other p arts of the m anu al cover connecting a
com p u ter and d ow n load ing d ata.
You w ill need to know the signal sp ecifications of
the d isp lay in ord er to enter you r form at. Most of
the data can be found in a detailed specification sheet
for the d isp lay. The rest of this section w ill tell you
how to convert the sp ec sheet d ata into a u sable
format.
Entering the format parameters
We are now read y to start entering the p aram eters.
One of the commands available on the 801G* is FMTN.
This com m and initializes all of the p aram eters to
know n d efault values. The d efault values are show n
in the d escrip tion of the FMTN com m and . You d o
not need to enter the p aram eter and its valu e if the
valu e m atches the FMTN setting. Detailed d iscu s-
sions of each p aram eter are p resented in alp habeti-
cal ord er at the end of this chap ter.
The first step is to d eterm ine if you are w orking
w ith an analog or a d igital d isp lay. An analog d is-
p lay can show an end less range of colors or shad es
of gray. Analog d isplays norm ally accept vid eo sig-
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
fmtn
ANALOG_3.CMD
Listing
fmtb
name Analog_3
hrat 31.469e3
hres 640
htot 800
hspd 16
hspw 96
hspp 0
hspg 1
vres 480
vtot 525
vspd 10
vspw 2
vspp 0
vspg 1
equb 0
equa 0
scan 1
avst 2
avss 0.700
avps 7.5
avpg 0
avsb 0.0
asss 0.300
assg 0, 1, 0
asct 2
dsct 2
dsst 1
ssst 1
cspp 0
cspg 1
xvsg 1, 1, 1
gama 2.2
gamc 0
usiz 2
hsiz 280.0
vsiz 210.0
dcex 14
dcbm 15
fmtg?
fmte
fmtw 62
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-44
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
nal levels in the 1 Vp -p range. Digital d isp lays are
m ore lim ited and can only d isp lay a cou p le of gray
levels or a hand fu l of pre-d efined colors. These d is-
p lays norm ally accep t TTL vid eo signals in the 4
Vp -p range.
Analog Video and Sync Parameters
If you are entering a d igital vid eo form at, skip this
section of the manual and go on to the “Digital Video
Param eters” section. If you are w orking w ith an
analog vid eo d isp lay, set DVST to zero. Enter the
correct analog vid eo signal typ e for the AVST com -
m and . Both m onochrom e and color signal typ es are
supported .
The follow ing figu re show s a typ ical vid eo w ave-
form for either a monochrome or RGB color d isplay:
AVSS
AVPS
(% of AVSS)
Black
Level
Blanking
Level
Ground
ASSS
❖ A few d isp lays requ ire an inverted w aveform
w ith negative-going p eak vid eo and p ositive
going sync tips. The 801G* will not properly drive
these typ es of d isp lays.
The AVSS param eter sets the peak-to-peak sw ing of
the vid eo p ortion of the com p osite w aveform . This
sw ing inclu d es any blanking p ed estal that m ay be
p resent and exclu d es any sync p u lses that m ay be
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ad d ed shou ld analog com p osite sync be enabled . If
you need a sw ing other than the d efau lt FMTN set-
ting, enter it in the “User” colu m n. In case of an
RGB color signal, the sw ing given is com m on to all
three color analog ou tp u ts.
Som e d isp lays requ ire that the vid eo ou tp u t level
be referenced or biased to a given voltage. The AVSB
p aram eter sets the DC offset level. The offset is
m easu red betw een grou nd and the blanked p ortion
of the vid eo signal. A p ostive valu e ind icates an
offset above grou nd .
Som e d isp lays requ ire a blanking p ed estal (i.e. a
blacker-than-black level d u ring the horizontal and
vertical retrace intervals). If you r d isp lay requ ires
su ch a blanking p ed estal, set the AVPG p aram eter
to 1 and enter the size of the p ed estal you w ant
u sing AVPS. The AVPS p aram eter is given as a
p ercentage of the overall p eak-to-p eak sw ing of the
vid eo signal AVSS. The d efau lt FMTN valu e of 7.5
rep resents the typ ical blanking level fou nd in EIA
stand ard s.
You m ay need to u se gam m a correction if you are
testing an analog vid eo d isp lay that has a non-lin-
ear light response to linear video voltage input. Most
displays on the market today are of this type. Gamma
correction d istorts the levels ou tp u t by the genera-
tor so as to prod uce a linear light output on the face
of the CRT d isp lay w ith varying levels of gray. The
following formula shows how the value of the gamma
affects the ou tp u t linearity of the generator.
Adjusted Level = 255 x (v / 255)(1 / γ)
(to nearest integer value below 256 )
Where v is the u ncorrected valu e having a range of
0 (black) to 255 (w hite) and γ is the gam m a correc-
tion factor. A gam m a correction factor of 1.000 is
the sam e as no gam m a correction. The grap h in the
follow ing figu re show s the logarithm ic variation of
the ou tp u t signal w hen gam m a is set to 0.25, 0.5, 1,
2, and 3.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-46
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
255
191
127
3.0
Output
Level
1.0
After
Gamma
2.0
Correction
63
0.5
.25
0
0
63
127
Video Level
Before Gamma Correction
191
255
Set the GAMC p aram eter to 1 to enable gam m a cor-
rection or 0 to d isable gam m a correction. When
gam m a correction is enabled , the valu e ind icated
by the p aram eter GAMA is u sed . The FMTN valu e
of 2.2 is stand ard for N orth Am erican television.
Eu rop ean television stand ard s com m only sp ecify a
valu e of 2.8.
N ext, d eterm ine how the d isp lay receives horizon-
tal and vertical synchronizing inform ation. Som e
d isp lays have one or tw o sep arate TTL d igital sync
inp u ts. Other d isp lays requ ire com p osite sync on
the bottom of the analog vid eo signal. Som e m u lti-
m od e d isp lays accep t m u ltip le typ es of sync.
If the d isplay only requires separate d igital sync in-
pu ts, you can leave the rem aining analog vid eo and
sync param eters at their d efau lt FMTN settings and
go on to the section on “Digital Sync Param eters.”
This w ill prevent com posite sync from ever appear-
ing on the analog vid eo ou tp u ts.
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Most color d isp lays that u se sep arate RGB analog
video have separate sync inputs or expect sync added
to the green video input. The ASSG parameter speci-
fies w hich prim aries ou tpu t sync w hen analog com -
p osite sync is selected . The cu rrent d esign of the
801G* only allow s ad d ing sync to the green ou tp u t.
The only valid entries for ASSG are (0, 0, 0) and (0,
1, 0). In the case of m onochrom e d isp lays that u se
com posite vid eo and sync, the d isplay m u st be con-
nected to the green ou tp u t channel on the 801G*.
You w ill also need to sp ecify the typ e of analog
com p osite sync signal that is to be generated . You
can specify a sim ple OR of the vertical and horizon-
tal pulses or a m ore elaborate sync signal consisting
of serrations and equalizing pulses. The ASCT com -
m and selects the exact type of sync that is ad d ed . A
setting of 0 m eans that analog com p osite sync can-
not be selected .
The ASSS p aram eter sets the p eak-to-p eak sw ing of
the sync p ortion of the com p osite analog vid eo
w aveform.
You can now skip the next tw o sections and go d i-
rectly to the section on “Tim ing Param eters.”
Digital Video Parameters
The cu rrent version of the 801G* firm w are can gen-
erate five d ifferent typ es of d igital vid eo signals.
All of the ou tp u ts are at TTL levels. There are tw o
p aram eters that control the d igital vid eo configu ra-
tion of the 801G*. The DVST param eter selects from
the d ifferent types that are available. AVST m ust be
set to zero w hen d igital vid eo op eration is selected .
The DVSP p aram eter sp ecifys the logic sense (or
p olarity) of the d igital vid eo ou tp u ts. The cu rrent
hard w are configu ration of the 801G* only su p p orts
the active high (or p ositive) p olarity.
All d igital vid eo d isp lays requ ire d igital sync. In-
form ation on setting the d igital sync p aram eters is
p resented in the next section.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-48
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Digital Sync Parameters
Som e analog vid eo and all d igital vid eo d isp lays
require one or two digital sync signals. The paramters
associated w ith these signals can be fou nd at the
top of the right-hand colu m n of the form at w ork-
sheet.
If you r d isplay accepts separate horizontal and ver-
tical d igital sync signals, you shou ld set the DSST
p aram eter to the exact typ e that is need ed . A set-
ting of zero (0) m eans that sep arate horizontal and
vertical d igital sync cannot be selected .
The p olarity of the sep arate horizontal sync ou tp u t
is controlled by the H SPP p aram eter, w hile the p o-
larity of the sep arate vertical sync ou tp u t is con-
trolled by the VSPP p aram eter.
❖ Entering the w rong H SPP polarity may cause all
of the test im ages to be shifted horizontally on
a properly ad justed d isplay. Entering the w rong
VSPP p olarity m ay cau se all of the test im ages
to be shifted vertically on a p rop erly ad ju sted
d isplay.
Also, many multi-scan mode displays depend on
the polarity of the sync pulses to d etermine their
exact operating mod e. The w rong polarities may
prevent the d isplay from locking to the form at’s
scan rates or m ay cau se the size of the active
vid eo to be w ay off.
If you r d isp lay accep ts a single com bined d igital
sync inp u t, you shou ld set the DSCT p aram eter to
the exact typ e that is need ed . A setting of zero (0)
means that digital composite sync cannot be selected.
The p olarity of the d igital com p osite sync ou tp u t is
controlled by the CSPP p aram eter.
You have now d efined the typ e of vid eo and sync
that w ill be generated w hen you r new form at is
selected . N ext, you w ill sp ecify the tim ing of the
variou s signal com p onents.
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timing Parameters
H RAT, sets the horizontal scan, or line, rate of the
form at. This is the rate at w hich horizontal vid eo
lines are prod uced . The 801G* uses H ertz as the unit
of measure w hile most d isplay spec sheets may give
the rate in kilo-H ertz. The rate can easily be entered
as a floating point number. For example, a 15.73426374
kH z horizontal rate could be entered as 15734.26374
or as 15.73426374E3. H ere are som e w ays to calcu -
late the valu e for H RAT if it is not given on you r
sp ec sheet:
• If a sp ec sheets gives you the total horizontal
p eriod , in m icro-second s, instead of the hori-
zontal rate. HRAT can be calculated as follows:
HRAT = 1 / Horizontal Period
• If a sp ec sheets gives you a d ot clock or p ixel
rate and the total number of active and blanked
p ixels p er line. H RAT can be calcu lated as
follow s:
HRAT = Pixel Rate / Total Pixels per Line
The H RES p aram eter sets the nu m ber of active p ix-
els in a single scan line. This parameter may be called
“H orizontal Resolu tion” or “H orizontal Active Pix-
els” on you r sp ec sheet.
The H TOT p aram eter sets the total nu m ber of p ix-
els (active + blanked ) in one horizontal scan line. It
m u st be an even nu m ber. If you r sp ec sheet gives
you the horizontal period in units of pixels, use this
valu e for H TOT. H ere are som e w ays to calcu late
the valu e for H TOT from other d ata on you r sp ec
sheet:
• A sp ec sheet m ay give you the nu m ber of
horizontal active and blanked p ixels as tw o
sep arate nu m bers. Sim p ly ad d the tw o nu m -
bers together to get H TOT.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-50
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• A sp ec sheet m ay give you p ixel cou nts for
the nu m ber of active p ixels as w ell the hori-
zontal sync front p orch, p u lse w id th and back
p orch. Ad d all fou r nu m bers together to get
H TOT.
• A spec sheet m ay give you a d ot clock or pixel
rate. Divide this rate by the horizontal rate and
rou nd the resu lt to the nearest even integer.
• A sp ec sheet m ay give you the nu m ber of
horizontal active p ixels and exp ress the hori-
zontal blanking tim e in m icro-second s. The
valu e for H TOT can be calcu lated w ith this
formula:
HTOT = HRES / (1 - (Blanking x HRAT))
Where Blanking is in units of seconds and HRAT
is in u nits of H z. Rem em ber to rou nd the re-
su lt to the nearest even integer.
The H SPD p aram eter sets the nu m ber of p ixels be-
tw een the end of active vid eo and the beginning of
the horizontal sync pu lse. Many spec sheets refer to
this parameter as the “Horizontal Sync Front Porch.”
If you r sp ec sheet gives you the horizontal front
p orch in u nits of p ixels, u se this valu e for H SPD.
H ere is another w ay to calculate the value for H SPD
from other d ata on you r sp ec sheet:
• A spec sheet may give you the horizontal front
p orch in m icro-second s. The valu e for H SPD
can be calcu lated w ith this form u la:
HSPD = HTOT x HRAT x Front Porch
Where Front Porch is in u nits of second s and
H RAT is in u nits of H z. Rem em ber to rou nd
the resu lt to the nearest integer.
The H SPW param eter sets the w id th of the horizon-
tal sync p u lse in u nits of p ixels. Many sp ec sheets
refer to this p aram eter as “H orizontal Sync Pu lse
Width.” If your spec sheet gives you the pulse width
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
in u nits of p ixels, u se this valu e for H SPW. H ere is
another w ay to calcu late the valu e for H SPW from
other d ata on you r sp ec sheet:
• A spec sheet m ay give you the horizontal sync
p u lse w id th in m icro-second s. The valu e for
H SPW can be calcu lated w ith this form u la:
HSPW = HTOT x HRAT x Pulse Width
Where Pu lse Wid th is in u nits of second s and
H RAT is in u nits of H z. Rem em ber to rou nd
the resu lt to the nearest integer.
We are now d one w ith the horizontal tim ing and
can move on to the vertical timing. The first vertical
tim ing p aram eter, SCAN , d eterm ines if a given for-
m at w ill have a non-interlaced or 2:1 interlaced
vertical scanning m od e. H ere are a few w ays to
d eterm ine the correct m od e if it is not clearly stated
on you r sp ec sheet.
• N on-interlaced scanning is som etim es called
“Progressive Scan” on a sp ec sheet.
• References to “od d ” and “even” field s on a
sp ec sheet u su ally ind icate 2:1 interlaced op -
eration.
• A “Field Rate” that is tw ice the “Fram e Rate”
on a sp ec sheet ind icates 2:1 interlaced op era-
tion.
The VRES p aram eter sets the nu m ber of active scan
lines in a com p lete fram e of vid eo. This p aram eter
may be called “Vertical Resolution” or “Vertical Ac-
tive Pixels” on you r sp ec sheet.
• The sp ec sheet for an interlaced d isp lay m ay
give you the number of active lines for a single
field . You w ill need to d ou ble this nu m ber to
get the correct valu e for VRES.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-52
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The VTOT p aram eter sets the total nu m ber of hori-
zontal scan lines, active + blanked , in one com p lete
fram e. It m u st be an od d nu m ber w hen SCAN = 2.
If you r sp ec sheet gives you the fram e p eriod in
u nits of lines, u se this valu e for VTOT. H ere are
som e w ays to calcu late the valu e for VTOT from
other d ata on you r sp ec sheet:
• A sp ec sheet m ay give you the nu m ber of
horizontal active and blanked lines p er fram e
as tw o sep arate nu m bers. Ad d the tw o nu m -
bers to get VTOT.
• A sp ec sheet for a non-interlaced d isp lay m ay
give you a vertical rate. The valu e for VTOT
can be calculated using the follow ing form ula:
VTOT = HRAT / Vertical Rate
• A spec sheet for an interlaced display may give
you a field or fram e rate. The valu e for VTOT
can be calcu lated u sing one of the follow ing
formulas:
VTOT = HRAT / Frame Rate
VTOT = 2 x (HRAT / Field Rate)
• A spec sheet for an interlaced display may give
you the nu m ber of active and blanked lines in
a single field . The valu e for VTOT can be cal-
cu lated u sing the follow ing form u la:
VTOT = 2 x (Active Lines + Blanked Lines)
The VSPD p aram eter sets the nu m ber of scan lines
betw een the last line of active vid eo and the begin-
ning of the vertical sync p u lse. Many sp ec sheets
refer to this parameter as “Vertical Sync Front Porch.”
If you r spec sheet gives you the vertical front porch
in u nits of lines, u se this valu e for VSPD. H ere is
another w ay to calcu late the valu e for H SPD from
other d ata on you r sp ec sheet:
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• A sp ec sheet m ay give you the vertical front
porch in milli-seconds. The value for VSPD can
be calcu lated w ith this form u la:
VSPD = HRAT x Front Porch
Where Front Porch is in u nits of second s and
H RAT is in u nits of H z. Rem em ber to rou nd
the resu lt to the nearest integer.
The VSPW p aram eter sets the w id th of the vertical
sync p u lse in u nits of scan lines. Many sp ec sheets
refer to this parameter as “Vertical Sync Pulse Width.”
If your spec sheet gives you the pulse w id th in units
of lines, u se this valu e for VSPW. H ere is another
way to calculate the value for HSPW from other data
on you r sp ec sheet:
• A spec sheet m ay give you the horizontal sync
p u lse w id th in m icro-second s. The valu e for
H SPW can be calcu lated w ith this form u la:
VSPW = HRAT x Pulse Width
Where Pu lse Wid th is in u nits of second s and
H RAT is in u nits of H z. Rem em ber to rou nd
the resu lt to the nearest integer.
❖ The vertical sync pulse width is the overall width
of the vertical sync interval if you are w orking
w ith serrated com p osite sync. Do not u se the
d istance betw een the ind ivid ual serration pulses
for VSPW.
Som e d isp lays that u se either a d igital or analog
composite sync signal need to have extra pulses added
to the sync. Serration and equ alization p u lses help
stabilize the d isp lay’s horizontal sw eep circu itry
d u ring the vertical sync interval. The p reviou sly
d iscu ssed DSCT and ASCT p aram eters d eterm ine if
serrations and equ alization p u lses are ad d ed to ei-
ther of the com p osite sync ou tp u ts. The nu m ber of
equalization pulses, if used, can also be programmed.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-54
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The EQUB p aram eter sets the length of the equ al-
ization interval before the vertical sync p u lse. The
valu e is entered in m u ltip les of scan lines w ith tw o
p u lses p er scan line (less one if a CCIR sync typ e
has been sp ecified ).
The EQUA p aram eter sets the length of the equ al-
ization interval that follow s the vertical sync p u lse.
The valu e is entered in m u ltip les of scan lines w ith
tw o p u lses p er scan line (less one if a CCIR sync
typ e has been sp ecified ).
❖ Equ alization p u lses w ill only be ad d ed to the
Digital com p osite sync signal w hen DSCT is set
to 4 or 8.
Equ alization p u lses w ill only be ad d ed to the
Analog com p osite sync signal w hen ASCT is set
to 4 or 8.
That is all of the tim ing p aram eters you need to
enter. You m ay w ish to go throu gh a cou p le of cal-
cu lations in the next section ju st to see if the form at
you are setting u p m atches you r sp ec sheet.
Calculated Rates
Many vid eo specification sheets inclu d e a pixel rate
p aram eter and a fram e rate p aram eter. You d o not
need to program them into the 801G*. The firm w are
calcu lates the tw o valu es based on other entered
p aram eters. You can d ou ble check you r entries by
calcu lating the p ixel and fram e rates.
The p ixel or d ot clock rate is equ al to H RAT m u lti-
p lied by H TOT. The hard w are lim its of the genera-
tor d o not allow rates above 135.000 MH z
❖ If you r calcu lated p ixel rate exceed s the m axi-
m u m lim it, you w ill need to p rop ortionately
red u ce H TOT, H RES, H SPD and H SPW to give
you a valid format. This w ill prod uce a correctly
sized and centered test im age. H ow ever, the
d isplay w ill not be d riven at its fu ll vid eo band -
w id th.
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The fram e rate is equ al to H RAT d ivid ed by VTOT.
This should match the frame rate given on your spec
sheet.
Active Video Physical Size
The USIZ, H SIZ and VSIZ p aram eters d o not affect
the sync timing or signal outputs of the 801G*. They
d o, how ever, greatly affect the test im ages that are
drawn. For example, the size of the box in the “Bright-
ness” test pattern should match the size of your light
m eter p robe. The actu al size of the p robe is entered
using the system parameter MSIZ. The firmware com-
bines this information along with the format’s physi-
cal size inform ation to properly scale the size of the
box. The firm w are also u ses the form at’s size infor-
mation to make sure the crosshatch lines in the SMPTE
RP-133 pattern form square boxes and that the circle
is rou nd and not ellip tical.
The USIZ param eter d eterm ines w hether the unit of
m easu re w ill be interp reted as inches (1) or in m m
(2).
The H SIZ p aram eter is the horizontal w id th of the
active vid eo area on a p rop erly ad ju sted d isp lay.
The VSIZ parameter is the vertical height of the active
vid eo area on a p rop erly ad ju sted d isp lay.
❖ Changing the valu es of H SIZ and (or) VSIZ w ill
not change the overall size of m ost test im ages
on you r d isp lay.
Display Codes
Many vid eo controller card s for the Ap p le Macin-
tosh II and VGA typ e card s for the IBM-PC are able
to id entify the type of d isplay connected to them by
checking one or m ore d isp lay cod e sense lines com -
ing from the d isp lay. The inform ation is then u sed
to select one of several d ifferent operating m od es to
m atch the d isp lay. An im p rop er d isp lay cod e m ay
m ake the controller card or d isp lay ap p ear to be
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-56
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
m alfu nctioning. The “Making Connection” chap ter
has inform ation on d isp lay cod es that are u sed by
som e system s.
A form at can be p rogram m ed to check these lines
and rep ort the resu lts to the op erator.
The DCBM p aram eter d eterm ines w hich of u p to 4
sense lines w ill be tested . A valu e of 15 w ill test all
4 lines. A valu e of 7 w ill test 3.
The DCEX p aram eter is the d isp lay cod e nu m ber
that you are exp ecting to get back from a p articu lar
d isplay. The actu al valu e that is read back is show n
in the “Form at” test im age.
❖ The 801G* d oes not u se the d isp lay cod e d ata to
change its own operating modes. The DCBM and
DCEX p aram eters are only u sed to p rovid e in-
form ation to the operator so that they m ay com -
p are the exp ected and actu al resu lts.
Outputs Control
The last set of form at p aram eters allow you to d e-
term ine w hich outputs are active w hen the operator
first selects the form at from m em ory.
❖ In the cu rrent version of firm w are, the statu s of
the “Outputs” button has priority over individual
gating controls. Selecting a form at w hile the
ou tp u ts are tu rned off w ill keep all of the ou t-
p u ts off u ntil the bu tton is p ressed . Selecting a
form at w hile the ou tp u ts are tu rned on w ill ac-
tivate all of the ou tpu ts that have been gated on
in the form at.
6-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The XVSG com m and d eterm ines w hich vid eo ou t-
p u ts w ill be active w hen the form at is selected . The
sam e com m and controls both the analog and d igital
vid eo ou tp u ts.
• The value of XVSG can be temporarily changed
by the op erator, u sing the “R,” “G” and “B”
vid eo gating bu ttons.
The SSST parameter determines which sync type will
be active w hen the form at is selected . A setting of 0
w ill leave all the sync ou tp u ts off.
• You have control over w hether or not the op -
erator can overrid e the p rogram m ed SSST se-
lect io n . A n o n -z er o en t r y fo r t h e A SCT
p aram eter w ill allow the op erator to enable
analog com p osite sync by p ressing the “ACS”
sync gating bu tton. A non-zero entry for the
DSCT parameter will allow the operator to turn
on digital composite sync by pressing the “DCS”
sync gating bu tton. A non-zero entry for the
DSST parameter will allow the operator to turn
on d igital sep arate sync by p ressing the “DH S
& DVS” sync gating bu tton.
❖ The SSST p aram eter d oes not overrid e any ind i-
vid u al p rogram m ed sync settings. For exam p le,
setting ASCT to zero and then selecting analog
composite sync with the SSST parameter will leave
all of the sync ou tp u ts tu rned off.
The H SPG and VSPG p aram eters d eterm ine if both
horizontal and vertical sync are tu rned on w hen
sep arate horizontal and vertical is selected .
❖ Gating either ind ivid u al sync ou tp u t off w ith a
setting of zero w ill keep it turned off even w hen
the “DH S & DVS” bu tton is p ressed by the op -
erator.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-58
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The CSPG p aram eter d eterm ines if d igital com p os-
ite sync is tu rned on w hen d igital com posite sync is
selected .
❖ Gating the digital composite sync output off with
a setting of zero w ill keep it tu rned off even
w hen the “DCS” button is pressed by the opera-
tor.
We are now d one creating the file. Save you r file as
straight ASCII text. If you as u sing a DOS based
system , u se a file nam e extension of “.CMD”. We
can m ove on to getting you r form at into the 801G*.
This is d iscu ssed in the next section.
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Downloading formats using a DOS-
compatible computer
There are tw o w ays of d ow nload ing a form at file to
the 801G*. You can u se the send .bat u tility or the
file d ow nload fu nction on the term inal em u lation
p rogram that is d iscu ssed in the next section.
The follow ing p roced u re shou ld be u sed w hen u s-
ing the send .bat u tility p rogram that is on the d isk
d isk su p p lied w ith the 801G*.
1. Connect the 801G* to a p ersonal com p u ter
using the instructions given in the “Making Con-
nections” chap ter of this m anu al.
3. Send new com m and files to the 801GP u sing
the send .bat u tility fou nd on the u tility d isk. To
d ow nload a file, the com m and is:
SEND filename
❖ The send .bat u tility assu m es that you are con-
necting the 801G* to COM1. If this is not the
case, then you must modify the COM1 references
in the file to m atch the COM port you are using.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-60
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling via the Serial Port
How to use PCPLUSTD.EXE
The u tility d isk inclu d ed w ith you r 801G* contains
the “Test d rive” version of Pcplu s by DATASTORM
TECH N OLOGIES Inc. This p rogram is for evalu a-
tion only and m ay not be u sed beyond that. Please
read the PCPLUSTD.DOC file on the u tility d isk for
fu rther d etails.
PCPLUSTD.EXE is a d em onstration of how the u ser
can interactively op erate and p rogram the 801G*
generator via the serial p ort.
You need to set som e configu ration d ata the first
tim e that you u se the p rogram .
1) After you have installed PCPLUSTD on your
PC, start it by typ ing PCPLUSTD on the DOS
com m and line.
2) Press (ALT)P to bring up the serial port setup
menu.
3) Select the p rop er COM p ort you w ill be u s-
ing w ith you r 801G*.
4) Set the p ort for 2400 bau d , 8 bits, 2 stop , no
parity.
5) Press (ALT)S to save you r settings.
You are now read y to send ind ivid u al com m and s
and qu eries as w ell as d ow nload files to 801G*. The
last section of this chapter d ocum ents the com m and
language.
6-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling via the IEEE-488 Port
You do not need to do anything special on the 801G*
to u se it’s IEEE-488 p ort. The d efau lt settings are
for the 801G* to be a talker/ listener w ith an ad -
d ress of 15.
All of the com m and s and qu eries show n at the end
of this chap ter can be u sed over the p ort. This sec-
tion covers how the com m and s shou ld be sent over
the GPIB bu s. Inform ation on ad d itional com m and s
that can only be sent throu gh the GPIB p ort is also
inclu d ed in this section.
Input Buffer
Com m and s are sent to the 801G* in “p rogram m es-
sages.” A p rogram m essage consists of one or m ore
com m and s separated by a sem icolon (;) follow ed by
a program m essage term inator. A program m essage
term inator is d efined as the N L character (ASCII
10), or EOI sent w ith the last byte of the p rogram
m essage. The 801G* w ill not p arse any com m and s
received u ntil a p rogram m essage term inator is re-
ceived. All commands are executed sequentially, that
is, w hen a com m and is parsed it is allow ed to finish
execu tion before the next com m and is p arsed .
Since som e com m and s m ay take longer to execu te,
the 801G* has an inp u t bu ffer. This inp u t bu ffer is
255 characters long and can be w ritten to by the
host controller w hile the 801G* is bu sy execu ting or
p arsing p reviou s m essages. If the inp u t bu ffer be-
com es fu ll, the 801G* w ill hold off the controller
u ntil there is room in the bu ffer. For this reason, a
program m essage cannot be longer than 255 charac-
ters inclu d ing term inator.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-62
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Syntax
Program m essages are sent to the 801G* u sing fou r
character ASCII u p p er/ low er case head ers. These
head ers can be either com m and s or qu eries. Com -
mands are messages which do not require a response
from the 801G*. Qu eries are m essages w hich cau se
the 801G* to resp ond w ith the requ ired d ata.
Separator ( ; )
Message
Terminator
Program Message Syntax
Separator
( ; )
Separator
(white space)
Command/Query
Header
Data
Message Unit Syntax
Commands
Com m and head ers instru ct the 801G* to set a p a-
ram eter to the valu e given or p erform som e fu nc-
tion not requ iring any ad d itional d ata. Com m and s
w hich have an asterisk (*) as their first character are
common commands as defined by the IEEE-488.2 stan-
d ard and generally op erate the sam e in all instru -
m ents. See the listing at the end of this section for
d escrip tions of each com m on com m and .
Com m and head ers w hich d o not requ ire any ad d i-
tional data from the controller are self-contained and
shou ld be follow ed by either a m essage sep arator
(;) or m essage term inator. Any other characters (ex-
cep t w hitesp ace characters) w ill cau se a com m and
error.
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command headers which require numeric data should
be follow ed by at least one sep arator character
(w hitesp ace) then the d ata. N u m eric d ata sent w ith
a com m and is in d ecim al form at. N u m eric d ata can
be represented in one of three methods; integer, float-
ing point, and scaled floating point. The three meth-
od s show n below w ou ld all rep resent the nu m ber
42.
Integer
42
Floating Point
42.00
Scaled Floating Point 4.200E+01
Queries
Qu eries are com p rised of a head er follow ed im m e-
d iately by a question mark (?). If there are any char-
acters betw een the qu ery head er and the qu estion
m ark character (inclu d ing w hitesp ace), a com m and
error w ill resu lt. Qu eries, u p on com p letion of ex-
ecu tion retu rn a resp on se m essage. A resp on se
m essage is com p rised of the requ ested d ata term i-
nated w ith an N L (ASCII 10) character. For exam ple
the follow ing text w ou ld be retu rned in response to
the H RAT? (horizontal rate qu ery) m essage:
3.1500E+04<NL>
N ote that the H RAT? query returns its param eter in
exponential form. Possible returned parameter forms
are integer, exp onential, and string. The resp onse
form of each queryable message is show n at the end
of this section.
Integer form:
3965
Exponential form: +3.965E+03
String form:
"A string"
Output Queue
When a qu ery is execu ted , the resu lting resp onse
m essage is p laced in an ou tp u t qu eu e w here it can
be read by the controller. The 801G* has an ou tp u t
qu eu e that is 255 bytes long. When a m essage is
p resent in the ou tp u t bu ffer, the MAV (m essage
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-64
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
available) bit in the Statu s Byte register is set. This
varies slightly from the 488.2 stand ard in that the
MAV bit w ill only be set w hen at least one com -
plete response message is present in the output queue.
A com p lete resp onse m essage consists of resp onse
m essage text and a m essage term inator (N L).
Buffer Deadlock
Bu ffer d ead lock is occu rs w hen the 801G* tries to
p u t a resp onse m essage in the ou tp u t qu eu e, the
ou tp u t qu eu e is fu ll, and the controller is held off
while sending a new message because the input buffer
is fu ll. If d ead lock occu rs, the 801G* w ill clear its
ou tp u t qu eu e, set the qu ery error (QYE) bit in the
Event Statu s register and p roceed to p arse incom -
ing messages. If any additional queries are requested
w hile in d ead lock, those resp onse m essages w ill be
d iscard ed .
The 801G* w ill clear the bu ffer d ead lock w hen it
finishes p arsing the cu rrent com m and / qu ery. The
QYE bit w ill rem ain set u ntil read w ith the *ESR?
qu ery or cleared w ith the *CLS com m on com m and .
The Status Byte
The Statu s Byte u sed by the 801G* is the sam e as
that d efined by the IEEE-488.2 stand ard and d oes
not u se any other bits of the Statu s Byte. The Statu s
Byte is one p art of a com p lete statu s rep orting sys-
tem show n on the next set of facing p ages. The Sta-
tu s Byte is read by u sing the serial p oll featu re of
you r controller.
Requesting Service
The GPIB p rovid es a m ethod for any d evice to in-
terru p t the controller-in-charge and requ est servic-
ing of a cond ition. This service requ est fu nction is
hand led w ith the Statu s Byte. When the RQS bit of
the Statu s Byte is tru e, the 801G* is requ esting ser-
vice from the controller. There are m any cond itions
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
w hich m ay cau se the 801G* to ind u ce a service re-
qu est. For m ore inform ation abou t setting u p these
cond itions, see the *SRE common command d escrip-
tion.
Remote/Local Operation
The 801G* has com p lete rem ote/ local op eration as
defined by the IEEE-488.1 standard. All four remote/
local states REMS, LOCS, RWLS and LWLS are su p-
ported .
In the rem ote state (REMS), the 801G* is u nd er re-
mote control and messages are processed as received.
The rem ote w ith lockou t state (RWLS) w ill be en-
tered if the controller issu es the LLO (local lockou t)
m essage to the 801G*. The local state (LOCS) w ill
be entered w hen the REN line goes false or the con-
troller issu es the GTL (go to local) m essage to the
801G*, or a front p anel control is actu ated .
In the rem ote w ith lockou t state (RWLS), the 801G*
is u nd er com p lete rem ote control and front p anel
controls are disabled. The RWLS state is entered when
the controller issu es the LLO (local lockou t) m es-
sage to the 801G*. Front p anel access is re-enabled
w hen the controller issu es the GTL (go to local)
m essage to the 801G*.
In the local state (LOCS), the 801G* is u nd er local
control and all front panel controls are enabled . Any
rem ote m essages received w ill be stored for p ro-
cessing when the 801G* enters the remote state again.
The rem ote state (REMS) w ill be entered if the REN
line is tru e and the 801G* is ad d ressed to listen.
In the local w ith lockou t state (LWLS), the 801G* is
u nd er local control and all front p anel controls are
enabled. Any remote messages received will be stored
for p rocessing w hen the 801G* enters the rem ote
state again. The rem ote w ith lockou t state (RWLS)
w ill be entered if the 801G* is ad d ressed to listen.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-66
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IEEE-488StatusReporting:
Standard
Event Status Register
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
&
&
&
&
&
3
&
2
&
1
&
0
Queue
Not-Empty
7
6
5
4
Standard
Event Status Enable
Register
Output Queue
RQS
6
Service
Request
MAV
ESB
7
3
2
1
0
Status Byte Register
Generation
MSS
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
Service Request
Enable Register
7
5
4
3
2
1
0
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Byte Bit Definitions
Message available. Indicates that at least one
MAV complete response is present in the output
buffer.
Event status bit. Indicates that one of the
ESB enabled conditions in the Standard Event
Status register is set.
Master summary status. Indicates that the
MSS
801GX has a reason for requesting service.
Request service. This bit is read only by
RQS
executing a serial poll of the 801GX.
Event Status Bit Definitions
Operation complete. Indicates that all
operations have been completed.
OPC
Request control. Indicates that a device is
RQC requesting control. The 801GX will never
request control, so this bit will always be 0.
Query error. Indicates that a query request
QYE
was made while the 801GX was in deadlock.
Device dependent error. Indicates that the
DDE 801GX encountered an error executing a
command.
Execution error. Indicates that there was an
error parsing a parameter.
EXE
Command error. Indicates that there was an
unrecognizable command.
CME
User request. Indicates that a front panel
URQ button has been pressed or that the front
panel knob has been turned.
Power on. Indicates that power has been
PON turned off-and-on. This bit will always be 0
in the 801GX.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-68
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bus Commands
Bu s com m and s - com m and s w hich are sent to the
801G* w ith ATN true - are d efined in the IEEE-488.1
standard. The details of operation of these commands
are d efined in the IEEE-488.1 and 488.2 stand ard s.
The follow ing bu s com m and s are su p p orted by the
801G*:
D CL Device Clear - Clears the inp u t bu ffer and
ou tp u t qu eu e, and stop s p arsing any com -
mand s.
SD C Selected Device Clear - Same as Device Clear.
G TL Go To Local - Enters the local state. See the
Rem ote/ Local section.
LLO
SPE
SPD
Local Lockou t - Enters the lockou t state. See
the Rem ote/ Local section.
Serial Poll Enable - Enables transm ission of
the Statu s Byte.
Serial Poll Disable - Exits the serial poll state.
Common Commands
The common commands used by the 801G* are listed
on the following pages. Common commands are com-
m and s w hich begin w ith an asterisk (*). These com -
m and s are d efined by the IEEE-488.2 stand ard and
operate the same from instrument to instrument. The
801G* supports all required common commands plus
one ad d itional com m and (*OPT?).
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*CLS
Clear Statu s
Definition:
The *CLS com m and clears the Event Statu s Regis-
ter, the Statu s Byte and the ou tp u t bu ffer.
Com m and Syntax:
Example:
*CLS
*CLS
Related Com m and s: *ESR? *STB?
*ESE
Even t Statu s En ab le
Definition:
The *ESE com m and sets the Event Statu s Enable
register to the given m ask valu e. The bits in the
Event Statu s Enable register fu nction as enable bits
for each corresp ond ing bit in the Event Statu s reg-
ister. That is, w hen a bit in the Event Status register
goes high, and the corresp ond ing bit in the Event
Statu s Enable register is a 1, it is enabled and w ill
cau se the ESB bit in the Statu s Byte register to go
high.
The *ESE query returns the current value of the Event
Statu s Enable register.
Com m and Syntax:
*ESE <m ask>
<m ask> = 0 - 255
*ESE 8
Example:
Qu ery Syntax:
Returns:
*ESE?
<mask><N L>
<m ask> is in integer N R1 form
*ESE?
Example:
Related Com m and s: *CLS *ESR?
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-70
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*ESR?
Even t Statu s Register
Definition:
The *ESR? qu ery retu rns the cu rrent valu e of the
Event Status register. After this command is executed,
the Event Statu s register is cleared . This is the only
w ay of clearing any bit in the Event Statu s register
excep t by the *CLS com m and .
Qu ery Syntax:
Retu rns:
*ESR?
<register valu e><N L>
<register valu e> is in integer N R1 form
*ESR?
Example:
Related Com m and s: *CLS *ESE
*O PC
O p eration Com p lete
Definition:
The *OPC com m and w ill cau se the 801G* to set the
OPC bit in the Event Statu s register w hen all opera-
tions have been com p leted . Since there are no over-
lap p ing com m and s, the *OPC com m and w ill set the
OPC bit im m ed iately w hen execu ted .
The *OPC qu ery w ill p u t a "1" in the ou tp u t bu ffer
w hen all op erations are com p lete.
Com m and Syntax:
Example:
*OPC
*OPC
Qu ery Syntax:
*OPC?
Retu rns: 1<N L>
*OPC?
Example:
6-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*O PT?
O p tion s
Qu ery Syntax:
The *OPT qu ery retu rns a list of options installed in
the 801G*.
Qu ery Syntax:
Example:
*OPT?
Retu rns: <op tion string><N L>
*OPT?
*RST
Reset
Definition:
The *RST com m and p erform s a d evice reset. This
p laces the 801G* into a know n cond ition. These
cond itions are:
• IEEE-488 ad d ress set to 15
• Statu s Byte cleared
• Inp u t qu eu e em p ty
• Ou tp u t qu eu e em p ty
Com m and Syntax:
Example:
*RST
*RST
Related Com m and s: *CLS
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-72
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*SRE
Service Req u est En ab le
Definition:
The *SRE com m and sets the Service Requ est Enable
register to the m ask valu e given. The bits in the
Service Requ est Enable register fu nction as enable
bits for each corresp ond ing bit in the Statu s Byte
register to enable a condition to request service from
the system controller. That is, when a bit in the Status
Byte register goes tru e, and the corresp ond ing bit
in the Service Requ est Enable register is also tru e,
the 801G* w ill requ est service throu gh the GPIB.
The *SRE qu ery retu rns the cu rrent valu e of the
Service Requ est Enable register.
Com m and Syntax:
*SRE <m ask>
<m ask> = 0 - 255
*SRE 16
Example:
Qu ery Syntax:
*SRE?
Retu rns: <m ask><N L>
<m ask> is in integer N R1 form
*SRE?
Example:
Related Com m and s: *STB *ESE
*STB?
Statu s Byte
Definition:
The *STB query returns the current value of the Status
Byte register. The valu e stored in the Statu s Byte
register is not affected by read ing it.
Qu ery Syntax:
Retu rns:
*STB?
<Statu s Byte><N L>
<statu s byte> is in integer N R1 form
*STB?
Example:
Related Com m and s: *SRE *ESR? *CLS
6-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*TST?
Self-Test
Definition:
The *TST qu ery cau ses the 801G* to p erform a self-
test and rep ort the resu lts in a resp onse m essage. If
the self-test fails, an ASCII "1" is p laced in the ou t-
p u t bu ffer, otherw ise an ASCII "0" is p laced in the
ou tp u t bu ffer.
Qu ery Syntax:
Returns:
*TST?
<result><N L>
<resu lt> is in integer N R1 form
*TST?
Example:
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-74
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CommandLanguage
All of the com m and s you can only though the IEEE-
488 p ort on the 801G* generator are listed in a p re-
vious section. All of the commands you can use w ith
either the RS-232 or IEEE-488 p ort on the 801G*
generator are listed in this in this section. They’re
listed tw o w ays. The Command and Query Finder
section grou p s them by fu nction. For exam p le, all
the com m and s used to change form at param eter are
listed u nd er one head ing. This is follow ed by a
straight alp habetical listing of the com m and s. This
listing also contains d escrip tions and exp ected p a-
rameters.
Command and Query Finder
This listing show s all of the com m and s and qu eries
su p p orted by the cu rrent version of firm w are. Each
com m and or qu ery w ill be listed u nd er one or m ore
of the follow ing head ings:
❖
❖
❖
❖
❖
❖
❖
❖
❖
❖
❖
❖
❖
Form at Param eter Settings
Form at Error Checking
Form at Ed itor Control
Form at Mem ory Managem ent
Cu stom Im age Draw ing Prim itives
Cu stom Im age Ed itor Control
Im age Mem ory Managem ent
Sequ ence Ed itor Control
Sequ ence Mem ory Managem ent
Directory Ed itor Control
Directory Mem ory Managem ent
System Param eter Settings
Direct Processor Control
6-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FormatParameterSettings
These com m and s affect the typ e of test signal p ro-
d u ced by the ISA generator. The com m and s also
d eterm ine the tim ing of the signal. All the p aram -
eters set by these commands can be saved as a single
Form at in the generator’s on-board Form at storage
locations.
ASCT
ASSG
ASSS
Analog Sync Com p osite Typ e
Analog Sync Signal Gate
Analog Sync Signal Sw ing
Analog Vid eo Calibration Method
Analog Vid eo Color Ord er
Analog Vid eo Color Su bcarrier
Analog Vid eo Ped estal Gate
Analog Vid eo Ped estal Sw ing
Analog Vid eo Signal Sw ing
Analog Vid eo Signal Typ e
Com p osite Sync Pu lse Gate
Com p osite Sync Pu lse Polarity
Disp lay Cod e Bit Mask
AVCM
AVCO
AVCS
AVPG
AVPS
AVSS
AVST
CSPG
CSPP
DCBM
DCEX
DSCT
DSST
DVSP
DVST
EQUA
Disp lay Cod e EXp ected
Digital Sync Com p osite Typ e
Digital Sync Sep arate Typ e
Digital Vid eo Signal Polarity
Digital Vid eo Signal Typ e
EQUalization interval After vertical sync
pulse
EQUB
EQUalization interval Before vertical sync
pulse
GAMA
GAMC
H RAT
H RES
GAMm A correction factor
GAMm a Correction
H orizontal RATe
H orizontal RESolu tion (active p ixels p er
line)
H SIZ
H orizontal SIZe
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-76
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H SPD
H SPG
H SPP
H SPW
H TOT
PCPG
SCAN
SSST
H orizontal Sync Pu lse Delay
H orizontal Sync Pu lse Gate
H orizontal Sync Pu lse Polarity
H orizontal Sync Pu lse Wid th
H orizontal TOTal p ixels p er line
Pixel Clock Pu lse Gate
SCAN field s p er fram e
Select Sync Signal Typ e
USIZ
Unit of m easu re u sed for p hysical SIZes
VRES
Vertical RESolu tion (active lin es p er
frame)
VSIZ
Vertical SIZe
VSPD
VSPG
VSPP
VSPW
VTOT
XVSG
Vertical Sync Pu lse Delay
Vertical Sync Pu lse Gate
Vertical Sync Pu lse Polarity
Vertical Sync Pu lse Wid th
Vertical TOTal lines p er fram e
Vid eo Signal Gating
Format Editor Control
These com m and s and qu eries are u sed to set u p the
Form at ed iting register p rior to ed iting or creating
new Form ats.
FMTB
FMTE
FMTG
FMTJ
FMTN
ForMaT Begin
ForMaT End
ForMaT in form at register Good ?
ForMaT in form at register Ju stify
Fo r M a T N e w (in it ia liz e a ll fo r m a t
p aram eters to d efau lt valu es)
FMTJ
JRAT
ForMaT Ju stify
Ju stify p ixel RATe
form at N AME (obsolete)
N AME
6-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FormatMemoryManagement
These com m and s and qu eries are u sed to w rite and
read Form ats from and to Form at m em ory locations
as w ell as m oving and d eleting Form ats in m em ory.
ALLU
FMTA
FMTD
FMTI
ALL Use
ForMaT save As
ForMaT Du p licate (obsolete)
ForMaT Insert (obsolete)
ForMaT Kill
FMTK
FMTL
FMTM
FMTP
FMTQ
FMTR
FMTS
FMTT
ForMaT Load from m em ory by nam e
ForMaT Move (obsolete)
ForMaT Path
ForMaT Qu ery p ointer
ForMaT Read from m em ory
ForMaT Save
ForMaT Test - Test the form at in form at
m em ory location (obsolete)
FMTU
FMTV
FMTW
ForMaT Use
ForMaT Verify (obsolete)
ForMaT Write - Save form at into form at
m em ory location (obsolete)
FMTY
FMTZ
ForMaT Yank (obsolete)
ForMaT Zap (obsolete)
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-78
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CustomImagePrimitives
These com m and s are u sed to d raw the ind ivid u al
p rim itives that m ake u p u ser-d efined im ages. All
the available colors and fill p atterns are listed here.
An im age cannot have m ore than 16 d ifferent colors
in it. Trying to u se m ore than 16 colors cau ses u n-
exp ected resu lts. The com m and d escrip tion section
lists w hat param eters are need ed by each prim itive.
Most of the cu stom im age p rim itives requ ire you to
sp ecify their color.
ADOT
CEN T
CROS
FORM
FRGB
GRID
GRIH
GRIV
H ATI
H ATO
LIMI
d raw A single p ixel DOT
d raw CEN Tering m arkers
d raw centered CROSs
d raw FORMat d ata block
Foregrou nd RGB levels
d raw GRID
d raw GRIl H orizontally
d raw GRIl Vertically
d raw crossH ATch starting Insid e
d raw crossH ATch starting Ou tsid e
d raw LIMIts m arkers
d raw a LIN E
LIN E
N OGA
OVAL
PAGE
RECT
SN UM
TEXT
TOBL
TRIA
u se N O GAm m a correction
d raw an OVAL
d raw a block of text
d raw a RECTangle
d raw sequ ence Step N UMber
d raw TEXT string
set levels relative TO BLanking
d raw a TRIAngle
6-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Color Options
Black
Red
Cyan50
Brown
Gray33
Gray37
Gray40
Gray43
Gray47
Gray48
Gray50
Gray51
Gray53
Gray57
Gray60
Gray63
Gray67
Gray70
Gray73
Gray75
Gray77
Gray80
Gray83
Gray87
Gray90
Gray93
Gray95
Gray97
Red75
Yellow75
Blue75
Green
Gray3
Magenta75
Cyan75
Yellow
Blue
Gray5
Gray7
HueI
Magenta
Cyan
Gray10
Gray13
Gray17
Gray20
Gray23
Gray25
Gray27
Gray30
HueQ
HueNegI
HueNegQ
Foreground
Background
Clear
White
Red50
Green50
Yellow50
Blue50
Magenta50
Green75
Fonts
#0 sys16
IBM-type alphanumeric font that has printable
characters for ASCII codes 0-126. It uses an 8 x 16
monospacedcharacterblock.
#1 OPIX 9
Alphanumeric font that has printable characters for
ASCII codes 32-126. It uses a 5 x 7 monospaced
characterblock.
#2 focusmac
#3 focus_12
Single character used in the Focus_Oo test image;
ASCII code = 79; 8 x 6 character block
Two characters used for the Focus_Cx and Focus_H
testimages;ASCIIcodes=67and72;8x6character
blocks
#4 memesony
#5 kanjikan
SinglecharacterusedforvariousMEMEimages;ASCII
code = 77; 18 x 18 character block
Single Japanese KanjiKan character used in the
KanjiKan image; ASCII = 75; 22 x 22 character block
#6 focusat 5
#7 focusat 6
#8 focusat 7
#9 focusat 8
#10 memeplus
Asingle@characterusedintheLinFocusimage;ASCII
= 64; 8 x 16 character block
Asingle@characterusedintheFocus@6image;ASCII
= 64; 16 x 16 character block
Asingle@characterusedintheFocus@7image;ASCII
= 64; 16 x 16 character block
Asingle@characterusedintheFocus@8image;ASCII
= 64; 16 x 16 character block
A
meme plus character used in focus and
convergence; ASCII = 77; 43 x 49 character in a 49
x 51 block
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-80
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fill Patterns
0 GrayPat
Outline
7 GrayPat
7% gray fill*
13 GrayPat
19 GrayPat
25 GrayPat
31 GrayPat
38 GrayPat
44 GrayPat
50 GrayPat
63 GrayPat
69 GrayPat
75 GrayPat
81 GrayPat
88 GrayPat
94 GrayPat
100 GrayPat
Checker1
13% gray fill
19% gray fill
25% gray fill
31% gray fill
38% gray fill
44% gray fill
50% gray fill
63% gray fill
69% gray fill
75% gray fill
81% gray fill
88% gray fill
94% gray fill
Fill is the same color as the lines
Checkerboard alternating one (1) pixel on and
one (1) off
Checker2
Checker3
Checker4
Checkerboard alternating two (2) pixels on
and two (2) off
Checkerboard alternating three (3) pixels on
and three (3) off
Checkerboard alternating four (4) pixels on
and four (4) off
bars_V1
bars_V2
bars_V4
bars_V8
bars_H1
bars_H2
bars_H4
bars_H8
Vertical bars one (1) pixel wide
Vertical bars two (2) pixels wide
Vertical bars four (4) pixels wide
Vertical bars eight (8) pixels wide
Horizontal bars one (1) pixel wide
Horizontal bars two (2) pixels wide
Horizontal bars four (4) pixels wide
Horizontal bars eight (8) pixels wide
meme
Repeating MEME pattern
FCC_EMI
Repeating three (3) pixels
on and one pixel off pattern
* That is, 7% of the fill p ixels are active. Sim ilar for other
GrayPat fills.
6-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Editor Control
These com m and s and qu eries are u sed to set u p the
cu stom im age ed iting register p rior to ed iting or
creating new test im ages.
IMGB
IMGE
IMGN
cu stom IMaGe Begin
cu stom IMaGe End
cu stom IMaGe N ew
ImageMemoryManagement
These com m and s and qu eries are u sed to select test
im ages that are d raw n on the u nit u nd er test.
ALLU
IMGA
IMGK
IMGL
IMGP
IMGQ
IMGR
ALL Use
IMaGe save As
IMaGe Kill
IMaGe Load
IMaGe Path
IMaGe Qu ery p ointer
IMaGe Read im age from im age m em ory
location
IMGS
IMGU
IMaGe Save
IMaGe Use (d raw im age)
SequenceEditorControl
These com m and s and qu eries are u sed to set u p the
sequ ence ed itor.
SEQB
SEQE
SEQN
SEQu ence d escrip tion Begin
SEQu ence d escrip tion End
SEQu ence d escrip tion N ew
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-82
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SequenceMemoryManagement
These com m and s and qu eries are u sed to select and
u se sequ ences.
ALLU
SEQA
SEQK
SEQL
SEQP
SEQQ
SEQS
SEQU
ALL Use
SEQu ence save As
SEQu ence Kill
SEQu ence Load
SEQu ence Path
SEQu ence Qu ery p ointer
SEQu ence Save
SEQu ence Use
SequenceParameterSettings
These com m and s and qu eries are u sed for creating
a new sequ ence.
DN UM
IMGL
IVER
Disp lay sequ ence step N UMber
IMaGe Load
IMaGe Version
SDLY
SMOD
STEP
sequ ence Step DeLaY
Sequ ence MODe
go to sequ ence STEP #
DirectoryEditorControl
These com m and s and qu eries are u sed to set u p the
d irectory ed itor.
DIRB
DIRE
DIRN
N AMF
N AMI
N AMK
N AMQ
N AMY
DIRectory ed iting Begin
DIRectory ed iting End
DIRectory N ew
N AMe Find
N AMe Insert
N AMe Kill
N AMe Qu ery
N AMe Yank
6-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DirectoryMemoryManagement
These com m and s and qu eries are u sed to select and
u se d irectories.
DIRA
DIRK
DIRL
DIRP
DIRQ
DIRS
DIRectory save As
DIRectory Kill
DIRectory Load
DIRectory Path
DIRectory Qu ery p ointer
DIRectory Save
SystemParameterSettings
These command s and queries are used to set system
level param eters that affect all Form ats and Im ages.
ASSC
AVSC
CACH
CALF
FRGB
IVER
Analog Sync Sw ing Calibration factor
Analog Vid eo Sw ing Calibration factor
instru ction CACH e enable
analog vid eo CALibration Factors
Foregrou nd Red , Green and Blu e levels
Im age VERsion
KEYY
KN OB
LCDS
LEDS
MODE
MSIZ
OUTG
RATC
UIDN
USIZ
KEY toggle
rotate KN OB
LCD Statu s
LED Statu s
com m u nications MODE
lightMeter SIZe
OUTp u ts Gate
clock RATe Calibration factor
User IDeN tification
Unit of m easu re u sed for p hysical SIZes
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-84
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MiscellaneousSystemParameters
The qu eries in this category are u sed to help id en-
tify the exact configu ration of the generator.
*IDN
IDeN tification (listed u nd er “I”)
VERsion of Firm w are
VERF
VERH
VERsion of H ard w are
DirectProcessorControl(Reserved)
These com m and s and queries are used to com m uni-
cate directly with the generator’s microprocessor and
its internal fu nctions. They are reserved for system
d ebu gging and d iagnostics by Qu antu m Data p er-
sonnel as w ell as for sp ecial softw are ap p lications
d evelop ed by Qu antu m Data.
N ote – Ind iscrim inate u se of these com m and s can cau se the
g en er a t o r t o m a lfu n ct io n . A n ir r ev er sib le lo ss o f u ser -
p rogram m ed d ata m ay also occu r.
ADDR
BASE
BOOT
CALL
DCRD
GETA
GETR
IN IT
ADDRess
BASE (rad ix)
w arm BOOT
CALL internal fu nction
Disp lay Cod e ReaD
GET data from Absolute memory location
GET d ata from Relative memory location
IN ITialize to factory-d efau lt settings
PUT Absolu te
PUTA
PUTR
SCAL
SIZE
PUT Relative
Self CALibrate
SIZE of bit field
*WAI
WAIt for com p letion su ffix
6-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AlphabeticalListingofCommands
ADDR
ADDRess
Classification:
Direct p rocessor control
ADDR <ad d ress>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<ad d ress>
0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)
0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)
-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)
ADDR?
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
<ad d ress>
Th e ADDR com m an d sets th e p oin ter register th at’s u sed in
con n ection w ith th e PUTR com m an d an d GETR? qu ery. Th e
ADDR? query returns the current contents of the pointer register.
N ote – Th is com m an d n orm ally is u sed on ly w ith cu stom
ap p lications and com m and files created by Qu antu m Data.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Exam p le:
ADDR an d ADDR? exp ect an d retu rn p aram eters form atted
accord in g to th e cu rren t rad ix set by th e BASE com m an d .
Use only with code supplied by Quantum Data!
ADOT
draw A single pixel DOT
Classification:
Com m an d Syn tax:
Lim its:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
ADOT <color> <x> <y>
<color> = available colors
<x> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
<y> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Draw s a single p ixel d ot. A d ot is the sm allest grap hic elem ent
th at can be d raw n . It u ses th ree (3) p aram eters, th e color an d
th e X an d Y coord in ates.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: ADOT White 200 300 // Draw white dot at
// X = 200 Y = 300
ALLU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-86
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALLU
ALL Use
Classification:
Form at, Im age an d Sequ en ce m em ory m an agem en t
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
ALLU
None
Th e ALLU com m an d first ch ecks th e cu rren t con ten ts of th e
form at bu ffer for errors. If no errors are fou nd , it reconfigu res
the signal generating hard w are in accord ance w ith the contents.
Next, the current test image is re-rendered using the latest system
an d form at p aram eter d ata.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
This command updates the generator after using the FMTL, IMGL
an d SEQL com m an d s to load n ew files from m em ory. Th is
com m an d also can be u sed to see th e resu lts of w ork w h en
u sin g com m an d s to ed it form ats or cu stom im ages.
Exam p le: FMTL vga_m3 // Load a format from memory
// to buffer
ALLU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
ASBG
Analog Sync on Blue Gating
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at p aram eter setting
ASBG
Lim its:
<m od e>
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
ASBG?
<m od e>
The ASBG command enables and d isables ad d ing composite sync
to th e blu e an alog vid eo ou tp u ts w h en an alog syn c is selected
(see SSST command) and an analog video signal is being generated
(see AVST com m an d ). Th e ASBG? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t
settin g of ASBG.
See t h e A SSG co m m a n d d escr ip t io n fo r in fo r m a t io n o n
sim u ltan eou sly con trollin g red , green an d blu e syn c gatin g.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: ASBG 1 // Enable comp sync on blue in
// buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASCT
Analog Sync Composite Type
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
ASCT <typ e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<typ e>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
none
Am erican H DTV ORed
Am erican ORed
Am erican w / serr
Am erican w / serr & eq
Eu rop ean H DTV ORed
Eu rop ean ORed
Eu rop ean w / serr
Eu rop ean w / serr & eq
Am erican H DTV w / serr
Am erican H DTV w / serr & eq
Eu rop ean H DTV w / serr
Eu rop ean H DTV w / serr & eq
Jap an ese H DTV ORed
Jap anese H DTV w / serr
Jap an ese H DTV w / serr & eq
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
ASCT?
<typ e>
Th e ASCT com m an d sets th e kin d of com p osite syn c ad d ed to
the analog vid eo ou tp u ts w hen analog sync is enabled (see SSST
com m an d ) an d an an alog vid eo sign al is bein g gen erated (see
AVST com m and ). The ASCT? qu ery retu rns the cu rrent setting
of ASCT. A setting of zero (0) indicates that the ACS sync selection
can n ot be activated by th e op erator.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e SSST m od e m u st be set to 4, 5, 6, or 7 an d th e AVST typ e
m u st be set to 1, 2 or 5 in ord er for th e ASCT settin g to h ave
an y affect on th e gen erator’s h ard w are ou tp u ts. Th e FMTU
com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew settin g. Th e
ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws
th e test im age.
Exam p le: ASCT 2 // Enable Amer ORed comp sync
// in buffer
SSST 4 // Enable ACS
AVST 2 // Select analog RGB as video
// type
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-88
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASGG
Analog Sync on Green Gating
Classification:
(Obsolete) Form at p aram eter setting
ASGG
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<m od e>
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
ASGG?
<m od e>
Th e ASGG com m an d en ables an d d isables ad d in g com p osite
syn c to th e green an alog vid eo ou tp u ts w h en an alog syn c is
selected (see SSST command ) and an analog vid eo signal is being
generated (see AVST com m and ). The ASGG? qu ery retu rns the
cu rren t settin g of ASGG.
See t h e A SSG co m m a n d d escr ip t io n fo r in fo r m a t io n o n
sim u ltan eou sly con trollin g red , green an d green syn c gatin g.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: ASGG 1 // Enable comp sync on green in
// buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
ASRG
Analog Sync on Red Gating
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
(Obsolete) Form at p aram eter setting
ASRG
Lim its:
<m od e>
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
ASRG?
<m od e>
Th e ASRG com m an d en ables an d d isables ad d in g com p osite
sync to the red analog video outputs when analog sync is selected
(see SSST command) and an analog video signal is being generated
(see AVST com m an d ). Th e ASRG? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t
settin g of ASRG.
See t h e A SSG co m m a n d d escr ip t io n fo r in fo r m a t io n o n
sim u ltan eou sly con trollin g red , green an d red syn c gatin g.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: ASRG 1 // Enable comp sync on red in
// buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASSC
Analog Sync Swing Calibration factor
Classification:
System p aram eter setting
Com m an d Syn tax:
ASSC <red factor>, <green factor>, <blu e factor>
or
ASSC <com m on factor>
Lim its:
<factor> (floating p oint accep ted )
m in = 0.000
m ax = 1.000
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
ASSC?
<red factor>, <green factor>, <blu e factor>
The ASSC command sets the analog vid eo calibration (or scaling)
factor th at’s u sed to ad ju st th e level set by ASSS. Issu in g th e
command w ith a single factor sets all three analog vid eo channels
to the sam e valu e. Issu ing the com m and w ith three factors sets
each of th e an alog vid eo ch an n els to each of th e given valu es.
Th e actu al p eak-to-p eak sw in g of th e an alog com p osite syn c
sign als at th e ou tp u t con n ectors equ als th e p rod u ct of ASSS
multiplied by ASSC. The ASSC? query returns the current settings
of ASSC. The d efau lt factory setting is 1.000 for this p aram eter.
N ote – The ASSC p aram eter is a system level p aram eter that
affects the analog vid eo sw ing of all form ats that are recalled .
The ASSC valu e is retained w hen the generator is p ow ered
d ow n and back u p again. Qu ery the cu rrent setting of ASSC if
you are exp eriencing p roblem s w ith low or m issing analog
com p osite sync levels. Re-initializing the generator’s m em ory
restores the setting to factory d efau lt valu es of 1.000.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: ASSC .995 .998 1.00 // Reduce red and
// green sync levels
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-90
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASSG
Analog Sync Signal Gate
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
Com m an d Syn tax:
ASSG <red m od e>, <green m od e>, <blu e m od e>
or
ASSG <com m on m od e>
Lim its:
< m od e>
0 = OFF
1 = ON
(0, 0, 0 or 0, 1, 0 on ly ch oices on 801GC-ISA)
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp on se:
Descrip tion:
ASSG?
<red m od e>, <green m od e>, <blu e m od e>
The ASSG command enables and d isables ad d ing composite sync
to all th ree an alog vid eo ou tp u ts w h en an alog syn c is selected
(see SSST command) and an analog video signal is being generated
(see AVST com m an d ). Th is com m an d can take th e p lace of
sen d in g all th ree of th e in d ivid u al ASRG, ASGG an d ASBG
com m an d s. Th e ASSG? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin gs of
ASSG.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e SSST typ e m u st be 4, 5, 6 or 7 to ou tp u t an alog syn c. Th e
FMTU com m and instru cts the generator to u se the new setting.
The ALLU com m and u p d ates hard w are to the new setting and
red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: ASSG 0,1,0 // Enable comp sync on green
// in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASSS
Analog Sync Signal Swing
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
ASSS <level>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<level> (floating p oint accep ted )
m in = 0.000 volts
m ax = 0.307 volts
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
ASSS?
<level>
The ASSS com m and sets the m axim u m p eak-to-p eak sw ing for
an y com p osite syn c th at’s ad d ed to an y of th e th ree an alog
vid eo ch an n els. Th e actu al p eak-to-p eak sw in g of th e an alog
sync signals at the output connectors equals the prod uct of ASSS
m ultiplied by ASSC. The ASSS? query returns the current setting
of ASSS.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
One or m ore ASSG m od es m u st be set to ON and the SSST typ e
m u st be 4, 5, 6 or 7 to ou tp u t analog sync. The FMTU com m and
in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew settin g. Th e ALLU
com m an d u p d ates h ard w are to th e n ew settin g an d red raw s
th e test im age.
Exam p le: ASSS 0.286 // Set sync swing to 286 mV
// in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
AVCM
Analog Video Calibration Method
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at p aram eter setting
AVCM <typ e>
Lim its:
<typ e>
0 = In terp olate
1 = Measu re In terp olate
2 = Measu re Set Absolu te
3 = Test Levels
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
AVCM?
<typ e>
Th e AVCM com m an d d eterm in es h ow th e gen erator tests an d
calibrates its an alog vid eo ou tp u ts. Th e AVCM? qu ery retu rn s
th e cu rren t settin g of AVCM.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
Exam p le: AVCM 1 // Select Measure Interpolate
// type of self cal
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-92
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVCO
Analog Video COnfiguration
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
AVCO <typ e>
<typ e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
0 = RGB
1 = RBG
2 = GRB
3 = GBR
4 = BRG
5 = BGR
R>R
R>R
G>R
G>R
B>R
B>R
G>G
B>G
R>G
B>G
R>G
G>G
B>B
G>B
B>B
R>B
G>B
R>B
(N orm al)
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
AVCO?
<typ e>
The AVCO command sets the mapping of the analog vid eo colors
to the vid eo ou tp u t connections. The AVCO? qu ery retu rns the
cu rren t settin g of AVCO.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: AVCO 5 // Output blue on red chan &
// red on blue chan
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVCS
Analog Video Color subcarrier Selection
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
AVCS <typ e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<typ e>
0 = N o su bcarrier
Su bcarrier frequ ency:
1 = N TSC-M
2 = N TSC-443
3.579545 MH z (Am erican)
4.43361875 MH z (PAL frequ en cy
w ith N TSC tim in g u sed by som e
conversion system s)
3 = PAL-BDGH I
4 = PAL-N
4.43361875 MH z (Eu rop ean)
3.58205625 MH z (Argentinian)
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
AVCS?
<typ e>
The AVCS com m and sets the color su bcarrier typ e u sed for the
television ou tp u ts on gen erator m od els th at h ave television
ou tp u ts available. The AVCS? qu ery retu rns the cu rrent setting
of AVCS.
N ote – At the tim e of this m anu al’s w riting, only the m od el
801GX st a n d a lo n e g en er a t o r h a s v id eo w it h su b ca r r ier
cap abilities.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: AVCS 1 // Select standard American NTSC
// encoding
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-94
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVPG
Analog Video Pedestal Gate
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
AVPG <m od e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<m od e>
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
AVPG?
<m od e>
The AVPG com m and enables and d isables the analog vid eo set-
u p p ed estal. Th e AVPG? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of
AVPG.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
Analog vid eo m ust be enabled w ith the AVST com m and in ord er
to ou tp u t an analog vid eo signal. The p ed estal level is set w ith
the AVPS command . The FMTU command instructs the generator
to u se the new setting. The ALLU com m and u p d ates hard w are
to th e n ew settin g an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: AVPG 1 // Enable use of a black level
// pedestal
AVPS 7.5 // Set pedestal level to 7.5
// IRE
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
AVPS
Analog Video Pedestal Swing
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at p aram eter setting
AVPS <level>
Lim its:
<level>
m in = 0.0 I.R.E.
m ax = 100.0 I.R.E.
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
AVPS?
<level>
Th e AVPS com m an d sets a black p ed estal level betw een th e
blanking level (0.0 I.R.E.) and the p eak vid eo level (100.0 I.R.E.).
Th e AVPS? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of AVPS.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
AVPG m u st be set to ON to enable the u se of the p ed estal. The
FMTU com m and instru cts the generator to u se the new setting.
The ALLU com m and u p d ates hard w are to the new setting and
red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: AVPG 1 // Enable use of a black level
// pedestal
AVPS 7.5 // Set pedestal level to 7.5
// IRE
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVSC
Analog Video Swing Calibration factor
Classification:
System p aram eter setting
Com m an d Syn tax:
AVSC <red factor>, <green factor>, <blu e factor>
or
AVSC <com m on factor>
Lim its:
<factor> (floating p oint accep ted )
m in = 0.000
m ax = 1.000
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
AVSC?
<red factor>, <green factor>, <blu e factor>
The AVSC command sets the analog vid eo calibration (or scaling)
factor th at’s u sed to ad ju st th e level set by AVSS. Issu in g th e
command w ith a single factor sets all three analog vid eo channels
to the sam e valu e. Issu ing the com m and w ith three factors sets
each of th e an alog vid eo ch an n els to each of th e given valu es.
Th e actu al p eak-to-p eak sw in g of th e an alog vid eo sign als at
th e ou tp u t con n ectors equ als th e p rod u ct of AVSS m u ltip lied
by AVSC. The AVSC? qu ery retu rns the cu rrent setting of AVSC
for each channel. The d efault factory settings are 1.000 for AVSC.
N ote – The AVSC p aram eter is a system level p aram eter that
affects the analog vid eo sw ing of all Form ats that are recalled .
The AVSC valu e is retained w hen the generator is p ow ered
d ow n and back u p again. Qu ery the cu rrent setting of AVSC if
you are exp eriencing low or m issing analog vid eo levels.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
settin g on th e cu rren t form at.
Exam p le: AVSC 1.000 .995 .998 // Reduce green
// and blue levels
FMTU // Apply new factors to current
// format
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-96
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVSS
Analog Video Signal Swing
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
AVSS <level>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<level> (floating p oint accep ted )
m in = 0.000 volts
m ax = 1.000 volts
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
AVSS?
<level>
The AVSS com m and sets the m axim u m p eak-to-p eak sw ing for
all three analog vid eo channels. The actu al p eak-to-p eak sw ing
of the analog vid eo signals at the ou tp u t connectors equ als the
p rod u ct of AVSS m u ltip lied by AVSC. The AVSS? qu ery retu rns
th e cu rren t settin g of AVSS.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
Analog vid eo m ust be enabled w ith the AVST com m and in ord er
to ou tp u t an analog vid eo signal. The FMTU com m and instru cts
the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command updates
h ard w are to th e n ew settin g an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: AVST 2 // Select RGB component color
// video in buffer
AVSS 0.714 // Set to 714 mV in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVST
Analog Video Signal Type
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
AVST <typ e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<typ e>
0=none
1=Analog Y (grayscale)
2=Analog RGB (color)
3=An alog TV Y (grayscale)
4=An alog TV EYC (color su bcarrier)
5=Analog YPrPb (color d ifference)
Mu st be zero (0) w h en an y d igital vid eo typ e is selected
(DVST ≠ 0).
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
AVST?
<typ e>
The AVST com m and establishes the typ e of signal that ap p ears
on the analog vid eo ou tp u ts of the generator. The AVST? qu ery
retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of AVST.
N ote – Certain AVST typ es m ay n ot be su p p orted by all
generators in the 801G series.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
DVST m u st be set to zero w hen analog vid eo is u sed . The FMTU
com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew settin g. Th e
ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws
th e test im age.
Exam p le: DVST 0 // Disable digital video
AVST 2 // Select RGB component color
// video
ALLU // Update hardware and redraw test
// image
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-98
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BASE
number BASE
Classification:
Direct p rocessor control
BASE <rad ix>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<rad ix> = -36 to -2 or 2 to 36
BASE?
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
<rad ix>
Th e BASE com m an d establish es th e rad ix of ad d ress an d d ata
param eters p assed to or retu rned from the ADDR, GETA, GETR,
PUTA, PUTR, an d CALL in stru ction s. If a n egative rad ix is
sp ecified , th en p aram eters p assed to (or retu rn ed from ) th ese
fu nctions are assu m ed to be signed . For exam p le, if BASE= -16,
th en th e valu e -1 com m u n icates th e valu e FFFFFFFF h ex. Th e
BASE? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of BASE. Th e rad ix
<rad ix> alw ays is p assed and retu rned in base 10, regard less of
the setting of BASE. BASE is preset to -10 each time the generator
is p ow ered on. Base -10 is the p referred rad ix. The BASE? qu ery
retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of BASE.
N ote – This com m and norm ally w ill be u sed only w ith cu stom
ap p lications and com m and files created by Qu antu m Data.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: Use only with code supplied by Quantum
Data!
BOOT
warm BOOT
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Direct p rocessor control
BOOT
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
Th e BOOT com m an d cau ses th e gen erator to go th rou gh its
stand ard p ow er-u p p roced u re. Self-calibration is not p erform ed .
The proced ure checks all RAM storage locations for corrupt d ata.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: BOOT
6-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CACH
instruction CACHe enable
Classification:
System p aram eter setting
CACH <m od e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<m od e>
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
CACH ?
<m od e>
Th e CACH com m an d en ables an d d isables th e u se of th e
instru ction cache. The CACH ? qu ery retu rns the cu rrent setting
of CACH .
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
Exam p le: CACH 0 // Disable the use of the
// instruction cache
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-100
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALF
analog video CALibration Factors
Classification:
System p aram eter setting
Cm d Syntax(801GC):
CALF <vid eo 1000> [<vid eo 700> [<syn c 400> [<syn c 40>
[2048 [2048]]]]]
(801GX):
CALF <vid eo 1000> [<vid eo 700> [<syn c 400> [<syn c 40>
[<N TSC 714> [<PAL 700]]]]]
(801GC-ISA):
(801GF, 801GF-ISA):
Lim its:
CALF <vid eo 1000> [<vid eo 700> [<sync 400> [<sync 40> [<p clk
700> [2048]]]]]
CALF <video 1000> [<video 700> [<sync 400> [<sync 40> [<psync
400> [p sync 40>]]]]]
<vid eo 1000>
m in sw in g = 4095
m ax sw in g = 0
<vid eo 700>
m in sw in g = 4095
m ax sw in g = 0
<syn c 400>
m in sw in g = 0
m ax sw in g = 4095
<syn c 40>
m in sw in g = 0
m ax sw in g = 4095
<N TSC 714>
m in sw in g = 4095
m ax sw in g = 0
<PAL 700>
m in sw in g = 4095
m ax sw in g = 0
<p clk 700>
m in sw in g = 4095
m ax sw in g = 0
<p sync 400>
m in sw in g = 0
m ax sw in g = 4095
<p syn c 40>
m in sw in g = 0
m ax sw in g = 4095
Qu ery Syntax:
CALF?
Qu ery Resp on se:
<vid eo 1000> <vid eo 700> <syn c 400> <syn c 40> <N TSC
714> <PAL 700>
Descrip tion:
Th e CALF sets th e an alog ou tp u t calibration factors to valu es
oth er th an th ose set by th e gen erator’s ow n self-calibration
fu nction. The <vid eo 1000> factor ad ju sts the vid eo ou tp u t level
w h en AVSS is at its m axim u m of 1.000 volts. Th e vid eo <700>
factor ad ju sts th e vid eo ou tp u t level w h en AVSS is at 0.700
6-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
volts. The <sync 400> factor ad ju sts the analog sync ou tpu t level
w h en ASSS is at 0.400 volts. Th e <syn c 40> factor ad ju sts th e
analog sync output level w hen ASSS is at 0.040 volts. The <N TSC
714> factor ad ju sts the N TSC television ou tp u t level. The <PAL
700> factor ad ju sts th e PAL television ou tp u t level. Th e <p clk
700> factor ad ju sts the p ixel clock ou tp u t (w hen it is enabled ).
Inform ation on the <p sync> factors w as not available w hen this
m an u al w as w ritten .
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e AVSC com m an d m atch es th e levels for th e th ree an alog
v id eo ch a n n els. Th e A LLU com m a n d u p d a tes th e sig n a l
gen eratin g h ard w are to th e n ew settin gs an d red raw s th e test
im age.
Exam p le: CALF 2040 2045 2055 2050 2046 2048
// Set new factors
ALLU // Use new factors
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-102
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL
CALL internal function
Classification:
Direct p rocessor control
Com m an d Syn tax:
CALL <ad d ress> <p assed > [ <p (1)> [ <p (2)> [ <p (3)> …[
<p (18)> ]…]]]
Lim its:
<ad d ress>
0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)
0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)
-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)
<p assed >
0 to 18 (BASE = -10 or 10)
0 to 12 (BASE = -16 or 16)
<p (n)>
0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)
0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)
-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)
Qu ery Syn tax:
Lim its:
CALL? <ad d ress> <p assed > <retu rn ed > [ <p (1)> [ <p (2)> [
<p (3)> …[ <p (17)> ]…]]]
<ad d ress>
0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)
0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)
-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)
<p assed >
0 to 18 (BASE = -10 or 10)
0 to 12 (BASE = -16 or 16)
<retu rned >
4,294,967,295 an d 0 to 20 (BASE = 10)
-1 to 20 (BASE = -10)
FFFFFFFF an d 0 to 14 (BASE = 16)
-1 to 14 (BASE = -16 qu ery on ly)
<p (n)>
0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)
0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)
-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)
Qu ery Resp on se:
<ret(1)> [ <ret(2)> [ <ret(3)> … [ <ret(20)> ]…]]
6-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Descrip tion:
The CALL command calls internal C functions. Address <address>
is th e en try p oin t of th e C fu n ction to be called . Param eter
<p assed > in d icates th e n u m ber of p aram eters to be p assed . If
<p assed > is n ot zero, th en p aram eters bein g p assed <p (1)>
throu gh <p (n)> im m ed iately follow the <p assed > p aram eter on
th e com m an d lin e. Th e CALL? qu ery is sim ilar to th e CALL
com m and excep t that retu rned p aram eters are exp ected . H ere,
a th ird p aram eter <retu rn ed > is ad d ed to in d icate th e n u m ber
of p aram eters retu rned by the fu nction. If BASE= -10 or -16 and
a <retu rn ed > valu e of -1 is given (4,294,967,295 if BASE=10 or
FFFFFFFF if BASE=16), then a single valu e is read from register
A8 of the TMS34010 (rather than being p op p ed off the C stack).
Most C fu n ction s th at retu rn a sin gle p aram eter retu rn th eir
sin gle p aram eter in th is w ay. Retu rn ed p aram eters are sp ace-
d elimited and formatted accord ing to the current rad ix (see BASE
com m and ). All param eters passed to the CALL and CALL? m u st
be form atted accord in g to th e cu rren t rad ix. Th is in clu d es th e
p aram eters <p assed > and <retu rned >.
N ote – Th is com m an d n orm ally is u sed on ly w ith cu stom
ap p lications and com m and files created by Qu antu m Data.
Ind iscrim inate u se of this com m and can cau se the generator to
stop op erating or loss of stored d ata in nonvolatile RAM.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
CALL an d CALL? exp ect an d retu rn p aram eters form atted
accord in g to th e cu rren t rad ix set by th e BASE com m an d .
Exam p le: Use only with code supplied by Quantum
Data!
CENT
*** draw video CENTering markers
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
CEN T <color>
Lim its:
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
<color> = available colors
None
Draw s a sm all cross in the center of active vid eo. If the form at
has an even nu m ber of active p ixels, the vertical line is 2 p ixels
th ick. Th e h orizon tal lin e is 2 p ixels th ick if th e form at h as an
even number of active lines. The primitive uses a single parameter,
th e color of th e cross.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: CENT red // Draw a small red cross in
// center of active video
ALLU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-104
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CROS
*** draw a centered CROSs
Classification:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
CROS <color>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<color> = available colors
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Draw s a large cen tered cross th at fills th e active vid eo area.
Th e vertical lin e is 2 p ixels th ick if th e form at h as an even
n u m ber of active p ixels. Th e h orizon tal lin e is 2 p ixels th ick if
th e form at h as an even n u m ber of active lin es. Th e p rim itive
u ses a sin gle p aram eter … th e color of th e cross.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: CROS magenta // Draw a large cross in
// the center of the active video
ALLU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
CSPG
Composite Sync Pulse Gate
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at p aram eter setting
CSPG <m od e>
Lim its:
<m od e>
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
CSPG?
<m od e>
Th e CSPG com m an d en ables an d d isables all of th e d igital
com p osite sync ou tp u ts w hen d igital com p osite sync is selected
via the SSST com m and (SSST = 3). The CSPG? qu ery retu rns the
cu rren t settin g of CSPG.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
In ord er to u se d igital com p osite sync, it m u st be selected w ith
the SSST com m and . The FMTU com m and instru cts the generator
to u se the new setting. The ALLU com m and u p d ates hard w are
to th e n ew settin g an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: CSPG 1 // Enable dig comp sync in
// buffer
SSST 2 // Choose digital comp sync type
// in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CSPP
Composite Sync Pulse Polarity
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
CSPP <p olarity>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<p olarity>
0 = active-low (n egative goin g p u lse)
1 = active-h igh (p ositive goin g p u lse)
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
CSPP?
<p olarity>
Th e CSPP com m an d establish es th e logic sen se of th e d igital
com p osite syn c ou tp u t. Th e CSPP? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t
settin g of CSPP.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
In ord er to u se d igital com p osite sync, it m u st be gated on w ith
the CSPG com m and and selected w ith the SSST com m and . The
FMTU com m and instru cts the generator to u se the new setting.
The ALLU com m and u p d ates hard w are to the new setting and
red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: CSPG 1 // Enable dig comp sync in
// buffer
CSPP 1 // Select active hi in buffer
SSST 2 // Choose digital comp sync type
// in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-106
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCBM
Display Code Bit Mask
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
DCBM <m ask>
<m ask>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
0 = 0 0 0 0
1 = 0 0 0 1
2 = 0 0 1 0
3 = 0 0 1 1
4 = 0 1 0 0
5 = 0 1 0 1
6 = 0 1 1 0
7 = 0 1 1 1
8 = 1 0 0 0
9 = 1 0 0 1
10 = 1 0 1 0
11 = 1 0 1 1
12 = 1 1 0 0
13 = 1 1 0 1
14 = 1 1 1 0
15 = 1 1 1 1
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
DCBM?
<m ask>
The DCBM com m and sets the 4-bit binary bit m ask u sed by the
DCRD? qu ery. The m ask is entered as the d ecim al equ ivalent of
a 4-bit binary number. The binary number represents the masking
of th e in d ivid u al sen se lin es from M3 (MSB) to M0 (LSB). Th e
DCBM? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of DCBM.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: DCBM 7 // Set mask to read sense lines
// 0, 1 & 2 only
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCEX
Display Code EXpected
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
DCEX <cod e#>
<cod e#>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
0 = 0 0 0 0
1 = 0 0 0 1
2 = 0 0 1 0
3 = 0 0 1 1
4 = 0 1 0 0
5 = 0 1 0 1
6 = 0 1 1 0
7 = 0 1 1 1
8 = 1 0 0 0
9 = 1 0 0 1
10 = 1 0 10
11 = 1 0 1 1
12 = 1 1 0 0
13 = 1 1 0 1
14 = 1 1 1 0
15 = 1 1 1 1
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
DCEX?
<cod e#>
Th e DCEX com m an d sets u p th e d isp lay cod e th at’s exp ected
from a display connected to the generator. The code is determined
by on e or m ore sense lin es bein g con n ected to grou n d by th e
d isp lay. Man y vid eo con troller card s for th e Ap p le Macin tosh
II and VGA typ e card s for the IBM-PC sam p le the statu s of the
d isp lay cod e sen se lin es. Th e in form ation th en sets u p on e of
several d ifferent op erating m od es to m atch a p articu lar d isp lay.
An improper display code may make the controller card or display
ap p ear to m alfu nction.
The DCEX? qu ery first p erform s a logical AN D op eration w ith
th e d isp lay cod e bit m ask an d th e actu al d isp lay cod e th at’s
sen sed . Th e d ecim al equ ivalen t of th e resu lt th en is retu rn ed .
Th e m ask is set w ith th e DCEX com m an d .
Th e exp ected settin g an d th e actu al resu lt are both sh ow n in
th e Format test im age. Th ey h ave n o effect h ow a given form at
gen erates a set of test sign als.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU com m and u ses the new setting and red raw s
th e test im age.
Exam p le: DCBM 7 // Set mask to read sense lines
// 0, 1 & 2 only
DCEX 5 // Only lines 0 and 1 should be
// grounded
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-108
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCRD
Display Code ReaD
Classification:
Direct p rocessor control
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
None
DCRD?
Qu ery Resp onse:
<cod e#>
0 = 0 0 0 0
1 = 0 0 0 1
2 = 0 0 1 0
3 = 0 0 1 1
4 = 0 1 0 0
5 = 0 1 0 1
6 = 0 1 1 0
7 = 0 1 1 1
8 = 1 0 0 0
9 = 1 0 0 1
10 = 1 0 10
11 = 1 0 1 1
12 = 1 1 0 0
13 = 1 1 0 1
14 = 1 1 1 0
15 = 1 1 1 1
Descrip tion:
Th e DCRD? qu ery retu rn s th e d isp lay cod e d etected on th e
monitor sense lines as filtered through the d isplay cod e bit mask.
Converting the returned decimal number to a 4-bit binary number
sh ow s th e statu s of th e in d ivid u al sen se lin es from M3 (MSB)
to M0 (LSB).
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
DCBM sets th e m ask u sed for read in g th e d isp lay cod e.
Exam p le: DCRD? // Return current sense lines
// reading
DIRA
DIRectory save As
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Directory m em ory m anagem ent
DIRA <nam e>
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
The DIRA com m and saves the cu rrent contents of the d irectory
ed it bu ffer u sin g th e given n am e.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: DIRA MY_DIR // Save with the name
// "MY_DIR"
6-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRB
DIRectory editing Begin
Classification:
Directory ed itor control
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
DIRB
None
The DIRB com m and m arks the beginning of a d irectory ed iting
session . Th is com m an d d oes n oth in g in th e cu rren t firm w are
version , bu t is u sed for com p atibility w ith fu tu re version s of
firm w are.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
Either a DIRL com m and to load an existing d irectory or a DIRN
command to create a new directory. DIRE when ending the editing
session.
Exam p le: DIRN // Initialize directory edit buffer
DIRB // Start directory editing session
// One or more directory editing
// commands ...
DIRE // End directory editing session
DIRE
DIRectory editing End
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Directory ed itor control
DIRE
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
The DIRE command marks the end of a d irectory ed iting session.
Th is com m an d d oes n oth in g in th e cu rren t firm w are version ,
bu t is u sed for com p atibility w ith fu tu re versions of firm w are.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
DIRB w h en startin g th e ed itin g session . Use DIRA or DIRS to
save changes.
Exam p le: DIRB // Start directory editing session
// One or more directory editing
// commands
// ...
DIRA MYDIR_02 // Save edited directory
// as MYDIR_02
DIRE // End directory editing session
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-110
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRK
DIRectory Kill
Classification:
Directory m em ory m anagem ent
DIRK <nam e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Lim its:
DIRK? <nam e>
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
0 or 1
Th e DIRK com m an d d eletes a d irectory by n am e. Th e qu ery
retu rns a one if the nam ed d irectory can be d eleted . If d irectory
is read -on ly or n on existen t, th e qu ery retu rn s a zero.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: DIRK MY_DIR // Delete dir called
// "MY_DIR"
DIRL
DIRectory Load
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Directory m em ory m anagem ent
DIRL <nam e>
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Lim its:
DIRL? <nam e>
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
0 or 1
Th e DIRL com m an d cop ies th e d irectory h avin g a n am e equ al
to <nam e> from d irectory m em ory into the d irectory ed it bu ffer.
Th e qu ery retu rn s a on e if th e n am ed d irectory can be load ed ,
oth erw ise a zero is retu rn ed .
NOTE:Use the FMTP, IMGP and SEQP commands to select which
d irectory is u sed for th e form at, im age an d sequ en ce selection
lists.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: DIRL MY_DIR // Load "MY_DIR" dir in
// edit buffer
6-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRN
DIRectory New
Classification:
Directory ed itor control
DIRN [<nam e>]
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = op tion al valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
DIRN ?
<nam e>
Th e DIRN com m an d in itializes th e d irectory ed it bu ffer. Th e
n am e <n am e> is assign ed as th e d irectory’s n am e. Th e qu ery
w ill retu rn th e n am e th at h as been assign ed as th e d irectory’s
nam e.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Examples: DIRN // Init edit buffer without
// assigning a new name
or
DIRN MY_DIR // Init edit buffer with
// name of "MY_DIR"
DIRP
DIRectory Path
Classification:
Directory m em ory m anagem ent
DIRP <nam e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
DIRP?
<nam e>
Th e DIRP com m an d sets th e cu rren t d irectory p ath n am e. Th e
qu ery w ill retu rn th e cu rren t d irectory p ath n am e.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: DIRP DIRPTH01 // Set directory path to
// DIRPTH01
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-112
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRQ
DIRectory Query pointer
Classification:
Directory m em ory m anagem ent
None
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Lim its:
DIRQ? <ind ex> <nu m ber>
<in d ex> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
<n u m ber> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
List of sp ecified d irectory n am es
Qu ery Resp on se:
Descrip tion:
Th e qu ery retu rn s <n u m ber> d irectory n am es from th e list of
all th e d irectory n am es stored in d irectory m em ory begin n in g
at <in d ex>. Th e d irectories are kep t in alp h an u m eric ord er.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Examples: DIRQ? 1 5 // List the first five
// directories in memory
or
DIRQ? 1 9999 // List all directories in
// memory
DIRS
DIRectory Save
Classification:
Directory m em ory m anagem ent
DIRS
Com m and Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Th e DIRS com m an d saves th e cu rren t d irectory ed it bu ffer
con ten ts in to d irectory m em ory u sin g th e cu rren t n am e of th e
d irectory in th e ed it bu ffer.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
DNUM
Display sequence step NUMbers
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
Sequ ence p aram eter setting
DN UM <m od e>
<m od e>
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
DN UM?
<m od e>
Th e DN UM com m an d en ables an d d isables th e ad d ition of th e
sequ ence step nu m ber to the d isplayed test im age w hen ru nning
a sequ ence.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: DNUM 1 // Enable the displaying of the
// sequence step #
6-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DSCT
Digital Sync Composite Type
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
DSCT <typ e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<typ e>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
none
Am erican H DTV ORed
Am erican ORed
Am erican w / serr
Am erican w / serr & eq
Eu rop ean H DTV ORed
Eu rop ean ORed
Eu rop ean w / serr
Eu rop ean w / serr & eq
Am erican H DTV w / serr
Am erican H DTV w / serr & eq
Eu rop ean H DTV w / serr
Eu rop ean H DTV w / serr & eq
Jap an ese H DTV ORed
Jap anese H DTV w / serr
Jap an ese H DTV w / serr & eq
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
DSCT?
<typ e>
The DSCT com m and establishes the typ e of com p osite sync that
ap p ears at th e d igital com p osite syn c ou tp u ts w h en d igital
com p osite syn c is selected via th e SSST com m an d . Th e DSCT?
qu ery retu rns the cu rrent setting of DSCT. A setting of zero (0)
ind icates that d igital com p osite sync cannot be activated by the
op erator.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: DSCT 2 // Select simple Amer ORed in
// buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-114
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DSST
Digital Sync Separate Type
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
DSST <typ e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<typ e>
0
1
2
3
4
5
=
=
=
=
=
=
none
Am erican sep arate
Am erican H DTV sep arate
Eu rop ean H DTV sep arate
Jap anese H DTV sep arate
Eu rop ean sep arate
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
DSST?
<typ e>
The DSST com m and establishes the typ e of d igital sep arate sync
th at ap p ears at th e d igital H S & VS ou tp u ts of th e gen erator
w hen d igital com p osite sync is selected via the SSST com m and
and the outputs are gated on via the H SPG and VSPG command s.
The only d ifference betw een EIA and CCIR d igital separate syncs
is that, in the case of CCIR, the w id th of the vertical sync p u lse
is 0.5 lin e sh orter th an th e w id th sp ecified via th e VSPW
com m and . In the EIA case, the w id th of the vertical sync p u lse
is as p rogram m ed . The DSST? qu ery retu rns the cu rrent setting
of DSST. A settin g of zero (0) in d icates th at sep arate d igital
H &V syn c can n ot be activated by th e op erator.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: DSST 1
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVSP
Digital Video Signal Polarity
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
DVSP <p olarity>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<p olarity>
0 = active-low (n egative goin g vid eo)
1 = active-h igh (p ositive goin g vid eo)
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
DVSP?
<p olarity>
Th e DVSP com m an d establish es th e logic sen se of th e d igital
vid eo ou tp u ts. The DVSP? qu ery retu rns the cu rrent setting of
DVSP.
N ote – Please note that d igital vid eo is not su p p orted by all
generators in the 801G series. Also, som e m od els that su p p ort
d igital vid eo m ay not su p p ort active low for the p olarity.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
In ord er to u se the d igital vid eo ou tp u ts, d igital vid eo m u st be
enabled w ith the DVST command . The FMTU command instructs
the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command updates
h ard w are to th e n ew settin g an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: AVST 0 // Deselect analog video in
// buffer
DVST 5 // Select 3 bit color in buffer
DVSP 1 // Select active hi video in
// buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-116
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVST
Digital Video Signal Type
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
DVST <typ e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<typ e>
0
1
2
5
6
7
=
=
=
=
=
=
n ot u sed
d igital V
d igital VI (MDA)
RGB
RGBI (CGA)
RrGgBb (EGA)
DVST m u st be zero (0) w h en an y an alog vid eo typ e is
selected (AVST ≠ 0).
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
DVST?
<typ e>
Th e DVST com m an d establish es th e kin d of vid eo sign al th at
exits the d igital vid eo signal outputs of the generator. The DVST?
qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of DVST.
N ote – Please note that d igital vid eo is not su p p orted by all
generators in the 801G series.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
AVST m u st be set to zero. Th e ALLU com m an d u p d ates th e
h ard w are to th e n ew settin g an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: AVST 0 // Deselect analog video in
// buffer
DVST 5 // Select 3 bit color in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQUA
EQUalization interval After vertical sync
pulse
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
EQUA <lines>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<lines>
m in = 0
m ax = n u m ber of lin es after vertical syn c before vid eo
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
EQUA?
<lines>
Th e EQUA com m an d establish es th e w id th of th e equ alization
in terval after th e vertical syn c p u lse in each field w h en ever a
serrated & equ alized syn c typ e is selected via eith er ASCT or
DSCT com m an d s an d selected via th e SSST com m an d . If th e
typ e sp ecified for th e selected syn c sign al is on e of th e CCIR
typ es, th en th e actu al equ alization in terval ou tp u t by th e
gen erator w ill be 0.5 lin es sh orter th an th e w h ole n u m ber
specified . The EQUA? query returns the current setting of EQUA.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: EQUA 3 // Set post-equalization to 3
// lines in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-118
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQUB
EQUalization interval Before vertical sync
pulse
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
EQUB <lines>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<lines>
m in = 0
m ax = n u m ber of lin es after vid eo an d before vertical syn c
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
EQUB?
<lines>
Th e EQUB com m an d establish es th e w id th of th e equ alization
interval before the vertical sync p u lse in each field w henever a
serrated & equ alized syn c typ e is selected via eith er ASCT or
DSCT com m an d s an d selected via th e SSST com m an d . If th e
typ e sp ecified for th e selected syn c sign al is on e of th e CCIR
typ es, th en th e actu al equ alization in terval ou tp u t by th e
gen erator w ill be 0.5 lin es sh orter th an th e w h ole n u m ber
specified . The EQUB? query returns the current setting of EQUB.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: EQUB 3 // Set pre-equalization to 3
// lines in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
FMTA
ForMaT save As
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at m em ory m anagem ent
FMTA <nam e>
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
Th e FMTA com m an d saves th e cu rren t con ten ts of th e form at
ed it bu ffer u sin g th e given n am e.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: FMTA MY_FMT // Save with the name
// "MY_FMT"
6-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTB
ForMaT editing Begin
Classification:
Form at ed itor control
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
FMTB
None
Th e FMTB com m an d m arks th e begin n in g of a form at ed itin g
session.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
Either an FMTL com m and to load an existing im age or an FMTN
com m an d to create a n ew FORMAT. FMTE w h en en d in g th e
ed iting session.
Exam p le: FMTN // Initialize format edit buffer
IMGB // Start format editing session
// One or more format editing
// commands
// ...
IMGE // End format editing session
FMTE
ForMaT editing End
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at ed itor control
FMTE
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
The FMTE com m and m arks the end of a form at ed iting session.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
FMTB w hen starting the ed iting session. Use FMTA or FMTS to
save changes.
Exam p le: FMTB // Start format editing session
// One or more format editing
// commands
// ...
FMTA My_fmt1 // Save edited format as
// My_fmt1
FMTE // End format editing session
FMTG
ForMaT in buffer Good
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at ed itor control
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
FMTG?
<test resu lt>
The FMTG? query tests the format in the format buffer for errors.
If n o errors are fou n d , FMTG? retu rn s zero. Oth erw ise, if on e
or m ore errors exist, the nu m ber of the first error encou ntered
is retu rned . To test form ats resid ing in form at m em ory, u se the
FMTT? qu ery.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: FMTG? // Return format error status
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-120
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTJ
ForMaT Justify
Classification:
Form at ed itor control
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
FMTJ
None
Th e FMTJ com m an d corrects som e typ es of tim in g errors for
th e cu rren t d ata in th e form at bu ffer. Th e follow in g errors are
corrected :
Pixel Rate errors 2071 an d 2072
Vid eo Mem ory Size error 2550
H orizon tal Blan kin g errors 2140, 2141, 2150 an d 2155
H orizon tal Total errors 2090 an d 2091
H orizon tal Syn c Pu lse Wid th errors 2181 an d 2201
Vertical Resolu tion error 2321
Th e ju stification rou tin e tries to keep th e form at close to
you r origin al sp ecification s. H ow ever, th e form at sh ou ld be
review ed after it is ju stified to m ake su re it still m eets you r
tim ing requ irem ents.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
settin gs. Th e ALLU com m an d u p d ates h ard w are to th e n ew
settin gs an d red raw s th e test im age. Th e FMTG? qu ery can be
u sed to see if an y errors rem ain .
Exam p le: FMTJ
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
FMTK
ForMaT Kill from memory by name
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
Form at m em ory m anagem ent
FMTK <nam e>
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Lim its:
FMTK? <nam e>
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
0 or <location >
Th e FMTK com m an d erases th e n am ed form at from m em ory.
Th e FMTK? qu ery ch ecks to see if th e n am ed form at can be
erased . The RAM location nu m ber is retu rned if it can be erased .
Oth erw ise, a zero is retu rn ed .
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: FMTK my_fmt1 // Erase format called
// my_fmt1
6-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTL
ForMaT Load from memory by name
Classification:
Form at m em ory m an agem en t / Sequ en ce p aram eter settin g
FMTL <nam e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp on se:
Descrip tion:
FMTL? <nam e>
<location > (retu rn s 0 if n ot fou n d )
The FMTL command is context sensitive. When editing a sequence
(w hile betw een a set of SEQB and SEQE com m and s), the FMTL
com m an d assign s a form at to th e step bein g w orked on . Th e
FMTL? qu ery retu rns the nam e of the form at cu rrently assigned
to th e step .
Ou tsid e of th e sequ en ce ed itor, th e FMTL com m an d read s th e
form at h avin g a n am e equ al to n am e <n am e> from form at
memory (or EPROM) into the format. FMTL does not re-configure
the signal generating hard w are. This featu re allow s you to w ork
on the contents of any format memory location, w hile continuing
to ou tp u t a signal based on a p reviou sly u sed form at (see FMTU
com m and ). The FMTL? qu ery retu rns the location <location> in
w h ich a form at h avin g a n am e equ al to <n am e> is fou n d . If
m u ltip le form ats exist h avin g n am e <n am e>, th en th e low est
n u m bered location con tain in g a form at w ith a m atch in g n am e
<n am e> is retu rn ed . Th e form at m em ory (RAM) is alw ays
search ed first. If a form at w ith n am e <n am e> can n ot be fou n d
an yw h ere in th e form at m em ory, th en th e in d u stry-stan d ard
formats located in EPROM (negative locations) are searched next.
FMTL? retu rn s zero if a form at w ith a n am e equ al to n am e
<n am e> can n ot be fou n d in eith er form at sp ace.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
The ALLU com m and u p d ates the hard w are to the new settings
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: FMTL VGA_m3 // Load format called VGA_m3
ALLU Update hardware and redraw image
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-122
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTN
ForMaT New
Classification:
Form at ed itor control
FMTN [<nam e>]
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
The FMTN command initializes the format editing buffer. Sending
this one com m and is equ ivalent to send ing all of the follow ing
com m and s:
ASBG 0
ASCT 1
ASGG 1
GAMA 2.2
GAMC 0
HRAT 0
HRES 0
HSIZ 280
HSPD 0
HSPG 1
HSPP 0
HSPW 0
HTOT 0
SCAN 1
SSST 1
USIZ 2
VRES 0
VSIZ 210
VSPD 0
VSPG 1
VSPP 0
VSPW 0
VTOT 0
ASSG 0, 1, 0
ASSS 0.286
AVPG 0
AVPS 0.0
AVSB 0.0
AVSS 0.714
AVST 0
XVSG 1, 1, 1
CSPG 1
CSPP 0
DCBM 0
DSEX 0
DSST 1
DVSP 0
DVST 0
EQUA 0
EQUB 0
Th is sh ou ld be th e first com m an d sen t to th e gen erator w h en
creatin g a n ew form at. Th e com m an d on ly resets to a kn ow n
state. Th e com m an d d oes n ot create a u sable form at.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: FMTN // Initialize format buffer
6-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTP
ForMaT Path
Classification:
Form at m em ory m anagem ent
FMTP <nam e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
FMTP?
<nam e>
Th e FMTP com m an d sets th e cu rren t form at p ath n am e to a
given d irectory. The qu ery w ill retu rn the cu rrent form at p ath
nam e.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: FMTP VGA_FMTS // Formats in VGA_FMTS dir
// will be listed
FMTQ
ForMaT Query pointer
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at m em ory m anagem ent
None
Lim its:
<in d ex> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
<n u m ber> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
FMTQ? <ind ex> <nu m ber>
List of sp ecified form at n am es
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp on se:
Descrip tion:
Th e qu ery retu rn s <n u m ber> form at n am es from th e list of all
the form ats stored in form at m em ory beginning at <ind ex>. The
form ats are kep t in alp h an u m eric ord er.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Examples: FMTQ? 1 5 // List the first five images
// in memory
or
FMTQ? 1 9999 // List all images in
// memory
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-124
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTR
ForMaT Read from memory location (by
number)
Classification:
Form at m em ory m anagem ent
FMTR <location>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<location > = 1 th rou gh 300 (RAM) or -1 th rou gh -24
(EPROM)
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
FMTR? <location>
<nam e>
Read s form at from the form at m em ory location into the form at
bu ffer. Th e FMTR com m an d d oes n ot recon figu re th e sign al
generating hard w are. The FMTR? qu ery retu rns the <nam e> of
th e form at stored in location <location >. FMTR? retu rn s th e
string EMPTYif the format memory location <location> is empty.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
The ALLU com m and u p d ates the hard w are to the new settings
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: FMTR -5 // Load format from ROM location
// 5
ALLU // Update hardware and redraw
// image
FMTS
ForMaT Save
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at m em ory m anagem ent
FMTS
Descrip tion:
The FMTS command saves the current format ed it buffer contents
in to form at m em ory u sin g th e cu rren t n am e of th e form at in
th e ed it bu ffer.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: FMTS
6-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTU
ForMaT Use
Classification:
Form at m em ory m anagem ent
FMTU
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
FMTU?
<location> or 0
Th e FMTU com m an d first ch ecks th e cu rren t con ten ts of th e
form at bu ffer for errors. If no errors are fou nd , it reconfigu res
the signal generating hard w are in accord ance w ith the contents.
It d oes not red raw the p reviou sly d isp layed test im age. In som e
cases th is m ay d istort th e old im age.
Th e FMTU? qu ery retu rn s eith er a form at m em ory location
<location> or zero. If the signal form at cu rrently being ou tp u t
by the signal generating hard w are matches that originally load ed
(u sing the FMTL com m and ) or read (u sing the FMTR com m and )
from a format memory location, then the matching format memory
location <location> is returned . Otherw ise, if the format contents
have been u sed to u p d ate the signal generating hard w are since
either an FMTR or FMTL command has been issued , then FMTU?
qu ery retu rn s zero.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-126
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FORM
draw FORMat data block
Classification:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
FORM <color> <x> <y>
<color> = available colors
<x> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
<y> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
None
Com m an d Syn tax:
Lim its:
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Disp lays basic inform ation abou t the form at d riving the d isp lay.
The first line show s the nu m ber of horizontal active p ixels and
vertical active lines. The last nu m ber on the line is the nu m ber
of field s p er fram e (on e (1) for n on -in terlaced an d tw o (2) for
interlaced ). The second and third lines show the horizontal and
vertical rates resp ectively. Text is on
backgrou n d w ith a sin gle p ixel bord er.
a
black rectan gu lar
FORM u ses th ree (3) p aram eters. Th e first is th e color of th e
text an d bord er. Th e n ext tw o (2) are th e X an d Y coord in ates
for th e top left-h an d corn er of th e block of text.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: FORM blue 30 200 // Display format
// information in blue beginning at
// X=30, Y=200
ALLU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRGB
Foreground Red, Green and Blue levels
Classification:
System p aram eter setting
Com m an d Syn tax:
FRGB <red level> <green level> <blu e level>
or
FRGB <com m on gray level>
Lim its:
<level>
m in = 0 (fu ll off)
m ax = 255 (fu ll on )
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp on se:
Descrip tion:
FRGB?
<red level> <green level> <blu e level>
Tem p orarily sets th e p ortion s of an im age d raw n w ith a color
selection of foreground to the given red , green and blu e valu es.
All th ree colors can be set to th e sam e level u sin g a sin gle
param eter. The setting is not global and is not saved . The FRGB?
qu ery retu rns the cu rrent red , green and blu e settings of FRGB.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
The color selection for one or m ore prim itives in a cu stom im age
must be set to foreground in order to see the affect of this command
on a cu stom im age.
Examples: FRGB 255 128 0 // Set foreground color
// to orange
or
FRGB 128 // Set foreground color to a
// mid-gray level
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-128
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAMA
GAMmA correction factor
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
GAMA <factor>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<factor> (floating p oint accep ted )
m in = 0.1
m ax = 10.0
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
GAMA?
<factor>
The GAMA command establishes the current analog video gamma
correction factor. The GAMA? qu ery retu rns the cu rrent setting
of th e gam m a correction factor.
N ote – See the section of the m anu al d ealing w ith ed iting a
form at w ith the Wind ow s u ser interface for m ore inform ation
on gam m a correction.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Gam m a correction m u st be en abled w ith th e GAMC com m an d
in ord er to use the gamma correction factor The FMTU command
in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew settin g. Th e ALLU
com m an d u p d ates h ard w are to th e n ew settin g an d red raw s
th e test im age.
Exam p le: GAMC 1 // Enable gamma correction in
// buffer
GAMA 2.2 // Set correction factor in
// buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
GAMC
GAMma Correction mode
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at p aram eter setting
GAMC <m od e>
Lim its:
<m od e>
0 = d isable (d on ’t correct)
1 = en able (correct)
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
GAMC?
<m od e>
The GAMC command enables or disables application of the analog
vid eo gam m a correction factor. The GAMC? qu ery can be u sed
to d eterm in e if th e gam m a correction factor is cu rren tly bein g
ap p lied .
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e valu e u sed for gam m a correction is set w ith th e GAMA
com m an d . Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se
the new setting. The ALLU com m and u p d ates hard w are to the
n ew settin g an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: GAMC 1 // Enable gamma correction in
// buffer
GAMA 2.2 // Set correction factor in
// buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GETA
GET data from Absolute memory location
Classification:
Direct p rocessor control
None
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Lim its:
GETA? <ad d ress>
<ad d ress>
0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)
0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)
-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
<valu e>
Th e GETA? qu ery retu rn s th e valu e of th e d ata stored at th e
m em ory <ad d ress> sp ecified . Up to 32 bits can be read w ith
this qu ery (see SIZE com m and ). The retu rned valu e <valu e> is
formatted accord ing to the current setting of BASE (see the BASE
com m and ).
N ote – This com m and w ill norm ally be u sed only w ith cu stom
ap p lications and com m and files created by Qu antu m Data.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
GETA an d GETA? exp ect an d retu rn p aram eters form atted
accord in g to th e cu rren t rad ix set by th e BASE com m an d .
Exam p le: Use only with code supplied by Quantum
Data!
GETR
GET data from Relative memory location
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Direct p rocessor control
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
GETR?
<valu e>
Th e GETR? qu ery retu rn s th e valu e of th e d ata stored at th e
m em ory location cu rren tly p oin ted to by th e ad d ress register
(see ADDR com m and ). Up to 32 bits can be read w ith this qu ery
(see SIZE com m and ). The retu rned valu e <valu e> is form atted
according to the current setting of BASE (see the BASE command).
The ad d ress register is au tom atically increm ented by SIZE bits
after th e cu rren t location h as been read .
N ote – This com m and w ill norm ally be u sed only w ith cu stom
ap p lications and com m and files created by Qu antu m Data.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
GETR an d GETR? exp ect an d retu rn p aram eters form atted
accord in g to th e cu rren t rad ix set by th e BASE com m an d .
Exam p le: Use only with code supplied by Quantum
Data!
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-130
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GRID
draw a centered GRID
Classification:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
Com m an d Syn tax:
GRID <color> <n u m ber of h orizon tal boxes> <n u m ber of
vertical boxes>
Lim its:
<color> = available colors
<n u m ber of h orizon tal boxes> = h alf of n u m ber of p ixels
<n u m ber of vertical boxes> = h alf of n u m ber of lin es
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Draw s a crosshatch of a given color and form s a given nu m ber
of boxes in each d irection . All lin es are on e (1) p ixel th ick. All
of th e lin es, in a given d irection , are equ ally sp aced . An y
rem aining p ixels are d istribu ted as equ ally as p ossible arou nd
the p erim eter of the grid . This m ay cau se the first and last lines
in each d irection n ot to be at th e very ed ges of vid eo.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: GRID gray75 14 10 // Draw a gray75 grid
// with 14 horizontal and 10˚
// vertical boxes
ALLU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
GRIH
draw a GRIll pattern of Horizontal lines
Classification:
Com m an d Syn tax:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
GRIH <color> <n u m ber of p ixels in lin e> < n u m ber of p ixels
in sp ace>
Lim its:
<color> = available colors
<n u m ber of p ixels in lin e> = n u m ber of p ixels
< n u m ber of p ixels in sp ace> = n u m ber of p ixels
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Draw s equ ally sp aced horizontal lines that form a grill over the
entire active vid eo area. The prim itive u ses three (3) param eters.
The first is the color of the lines. The second is the thickness of
the lines and the third is the thickness of the sp ace betw een the
lines.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: GRIH green 4 6 // Draw green grid with
// 4-pixel lines and 6-pixel spaces
ALLU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GRIV
draw a GRIll pattern of Vertical lines
Classification:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
Com m an d Syn tax:
GRIV <color> <n u m ber of p ixels in lin e> < n u m ber of p ixels
in sp ace>
Lim its:
<color> = available colors
<n u m ber of p ixels in lin e> = n u m ber of lin es
< n u m ber of p ixels in sp ace> = n u m ber of lin es
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Draw s equ ally sp aced vertical lin es th at form a grill over th e
en tire active vid eo area. Th e gap s are n ot tou ch ed an d w ill
show any p reviou sly d raw n p rim itives. The p rim itive u ses three
(3) p aram eters. The first is the color of the lines. The second is
th e th ickn ess of th e lin es an d th e th ird is th e th ickn ess of th e
sp ace betw een th e lin es.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: GRIV cyan 16 16 // Draw cyan grill with
// 16-pixel lines and 16-pixel
// spaces
ALLU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-132
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HATI
draw a centered crossHATch from the Inside
out
Classification:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
Com m an d Syn tax:
H ATI <color> <n u m ber of h orizon tal boxes> <n u m ber of
vertical boxes>
Lim its:
<color> = available colors
<n u m ber of h orizon tal boxes> = h alf of n u m ber of p ixels
<n u m ber of vertical boxes> = h alf of n u m ber of lin es
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Draw s a crossh atch from th e Inside-Out of a given color an d
form s a given nu m ber of boxes in each d irection. The p rim itive
h as cen ter lin es th at d ivid e th e active vid eo exactly in h alf in
each d irection. The vertical center line is tw o (2) p ixels thick if
the form at has an even nu m ber of active p ixels. The horizontal
cen ter lin e is tw o (2) p ixels th ick if th e form at h as an even
nu m ber of active lines. All other lines are one (1) p ixel thick. If
you enter an od d nu m ber of boxes, a half box is p laced at each
end of the crosshatch. All lines in a given d irection are sp aced
equ ally. An y rem ain in g p ixels are d istribu ted as equ ally as
p ossible arou n d th e p erim eter of th e grid . Th is m ay cau se th e
first and last lines in each d irection not to be at the very ed ges
of vid eo. In tu rn , th is m ay cau se an y h alf boxes to be sligh tly
larger.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: HATI green 15 9 // Draw a green grid
// with 15 horizontal and 9
// vertical boxes
ALLU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HATO
draw a centered crossHATch from the
Outside in
Classification:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
Com m an d Syn tax:
H ATO <color> <n u m ber of h orizon tal boxes> <n u m ber of
vertical boxes>
Lim its:
<color> = available colors
<n u m ber of h orizon tal boxes> = h alf of n u m ber of p ixels
<n u m ber of vertical boxes> = h alf of n u m ber of lin es
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Draw s a crossh atch from th e Outside-In of a given color an d
form s a given n u m ber of boxes in each d irection . All lin es are
one (1) p ixel thick. The first and last lines in each d irection are
at the very edges of active video. All the lines in a given direction
are spaced equ ally. Any rem aining pixels are ad d ed to the boxes
alon g th e h orizon tal an d vertical cen ters of th e im age.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: HATO yellow 15 9 // Draw a yellow grid
// with 15 horizontal and 9
// vertical boxes
ALLU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-134
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HRAT
Horizontal RATe
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
H RAT <frequ en cy in H z>
Com m an d Syn tax:
Lim its:
<frequ en cy in H z> (floatin g p oin t accep ted )
typ ical m in = 1000
typ ical m ax = 130000
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
H RAT?
<frequ ency in H z> (floating p oint retu rned )
The H RAT com m and sets the line frequ ency. Pixel rate is equ al
to th e p rod u ct: H TOT tim es H RAT. Fram e rate is equ al to th e
qu otien t: H RAT d ivid ed by VTOT. Field rate is equ al to th e
p rod u ct: SCAN tim es the fram e rate. The H RAT? qu ery retu rns
the cu rrent horizontal frequ ency setting.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Examples: HRAT 32768 // Set 32.768 kHz rate in
// buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
or
HRAT 32.768E3 // Set a 32.768 kHz rate
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
HRES
Horizontal RESolution
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
H RES <p ixels>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<p ixels>
m in = 16
m ax d ep en d s on VRES an d m od el of gen erator
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
H RES?
<p ixels>
The H RES com m and establishes the nu m ber of active p ixels p er
lin e. Th e H RES? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of H RES.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
The ALLU com m and u p d ates hard w are to the new setting and
red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: HRES 480 // Set 480 active pixels line
// in buffer
ALLU // Configure hardware and redraw
// image
6-135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HSIZ
Horizontal SIZe
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
Com m an d Syn tax:
H SIZ <p h ysical size> (con text sen sitive - see FMTB an d
FMTE)
Lim its:
<p h ysical size> = p ositive valu e
(floating p oint accep ted )
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
H SIZ?
<p hysical size> (floating p oint retu rned )
Th e H SIZ com m an d establish es th e h orizon tal p h ysical size of
th e im age on th e d isp lay. Un its exp ected (or retu rn ed ) vary
accord in g to th e last m od e set w ith USIZ com m an d . Th e H SIZ
com m an d is con text sen sitive an d m u st ap p ear betw een begin
and end com m and s: FMTB and FMTE. The H SIZ? qu ery retu rns
th e cu rren t settin g of H SIZ.
N ote – Make su re that the USIZ p aram eter is p rop erly set before
u sing the H SIZ com m and . Changing the USIZ setting after
entering H SIZ w ill convert the size to m atch the new u nit of
m easu re.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
The units of measure must be properly set by USIZ before entering
H SIZ. The ALLU com m and u pd ates hard w are to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age, takin g th e n ew size in to accou n t.
Exam p le: FMTB // Begin editing session One or
// more format editing commands
// ...
USIZ 1 // Select inches as unit of
// measure in buffer
HSIZ 10.4 // Set width to 10.4 in
// buffer
VSIZ 7.8 // Set height to 7.8 in buffer
ALLU // Test the new settings
// One or more format editing
// commands
// ...
FMTE // End of editing session
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-136
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HSPD
Horizontal Sync Pulse Delay
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
H SPD <p ixels>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<p ixels>
m in = 1
m ax = H TOT - H RES - H SPW
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
H SPD?
<p ixels>
The H SPD com m and establishes the d elay betw een the lead ing
ed ge of blan kin g an d th e lead in g ed ge of th e h orizon tal syn c
p u lse. Th e H SPD? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of H SPD.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: HSPD 16 // Set 16 pixel pulse delay in
// buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
HSPG
Horizontal Sync Pulse Gate
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at p aram eter setting
H SPG <m od e>
Lim its:
<m od e>
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
H SPG?
<m od e>
The H SPG com m and enables and d isables the d igital horizontal
sync ou tp u t. The H SPG? qu ery retu rns the cu rrent H SPG m od e.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
In ord er to u se d igital h orizon tal syn c, d igital sep arate H &V
syn c m u st be selected w ith th e SSST com m an d . Th e FMTU
com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew settin g. Th e
ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws
th e test im age.
Exam p le: HSPG 1 // Enable H sync output in
// buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HSPP
Horizontal Sync Pulse Polarity
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
H SPP <p olarity>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<p olarity>
0 = active-low (n egative goin g p u lse)
1 = active-h igh (p ositive goin g p u lse)
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
H SPP?
<p olarity>
Th e H SPP com m an d establish es th e logic sen se of th e d igital
h orizon tal syn c ou tp u ts. Settin g p olarity to on e (1) cau ses th e
lead in g ed ge of h orizon tal syn c to be a low -to-h igh tran sition .
Setting p olarity to zero (0) cau ses the lead ing ed ge of horizontal
syn c to be a h igh -to-low tran sition . Th e H SPP? qu ery retu rn s
th e cu rren t p olarity of H SPP.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
In ord er to u se d igital horizontal sync, it m u st be gated on w ith
th e H SPG com m an d an d d igital sep arate H &V syn c m u st be
selected w ith the SSST com m and . The FMTU com m and instru cts
the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command updates
h ard w are to th e n ew settin g an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: HSPP 0 // Set active lo H sync in
// buffer
HSPG 1 // Enable H sync output in
// buffer
SSST 1 // Select H&V sync type in
// buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
HSPW
Horizontal Sync Pulse Width
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at p aram eter setting
H SPW <p ixels>
Lim its:
<p ixels>
m in = 1
m ax = H TOT - H RES - H SPD
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
H SPW?
<p ixels>
Th e H SPW com m an d establish es th e w id th of th e h orizon tal
syn c p u lse. Th e H SPW? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of
H SPW.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: HSPW 32 // Set pulse width to 32 pixels
// in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-138
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HTOT
Horizontal TOTal pixels per line
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
H TOT <p ixels>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<p ixels>
m in
801GP = 2
801GC, GF, GX = 144
801GC-ISA, GF-ISA = 144
m ax
801GP = 2048
801GC, GX = 4096
801GC-ISA = 4096
801GF, 801GF-ISA = 65,536
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
H TOT?
<p ixels>
The H TOT com m and establishes the total nu m ber of p ixels p er
horizontal line. The H TOT? qu ery retu rns the cu rrent setting of
H TOT.
Th e p ixel rate is equ al to th e p rod u ct of H RAT m u ltip lied by
H TOT.
N ote – The cu rrent version of the firm w are d oes not allow you
to d irectly enter a sp ecific p ixel rate w hen setting u p a form at.
If you r test sp ecifications call for a sp ecific p ixel or d ot clock
rate, enter su itable valu es for H RAT and H TOT to give you
the d esired p ixel rate.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: HTOT 800 // Set total to 800
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
*IDN
IDeNtification
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Miscellaneou s system p aram eter
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
*IDN ?
Qu antu m Data,801GX,0,<firm w are version #>
Th e *IDN ? qu ery retu rn s an equ ip m en t id en tification strin g
form atted p er IEEE-488.2 stand ard s.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: *IDN? // Return information about
// generator
6-139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGA
IMaGe save As
Classification:
Im age m em ory m anagem ent
IMGA <nam e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
Th e IMGA com m an d saves th e cu rren t con ten ts of th e im age
ed it bu ffer u sin g th e given n am e.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: IMGA MY_IMG // Save with the name
// "MY_IMG"
IMGB
IMaGe editing Begin
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Im age ed itor control
IMGB
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
Th e IMGB com m an d m arks th e begin n in g of an im age ed itin g
session.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
Either an IMGL com m and to load an existing im age or an IMGN
com m and to create a new im age. IMGE w hen end ing the ed iting
session.
Exam p le: IMGN // Initialize image edit buffer
IMGB // Start image editing session
// One or more image editing
// commands
// ...
IMGE // End image editing session
IMGE
IMaGe editing End
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Im age ed itor control
IMGE
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
The IMGE com m and m arks the end of an im age ed iting session.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
IMGB w hen starting the ed iting session. Use IMGA or IMGS to
save changes.
Exam p le: IMGB // Start image editing session
// One or more image editing
// commands
// ...
IMGA MYIMG_02 // Save edited image as
// MYIMG_02
IMGE // End image editing session
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-140
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGK
IMaGe Kill
Classification:
Im age m em ory m anagem ent
IMGK <nam e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Lim its:
IMGK? <nam e>
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
0 or 1
The IMGK command deletes an image by name. The query returns
a on e (1) if th e n am ed im age can be d eleted . If th e im age is
read -on ly or n on existen t, th e qu ery retu rn s a zero (0).
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: IMGK MY_IMG // Delete dir called
// "MY_IMG"
IMGL
IMaGe Load
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Im age m em ory m an agem en t / Sequ en ce p aram eter settin g
IMGL <nam e>
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Lim its:
IMGL? <nam e>
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
0 or 1
The IMGL command is context sensitive. When editing a sequence
(w hile betw een a set of SEQB and SEQE com m and s), the IMGL
com m an d assign s an im age to th e step bein g w orked on . Th e
IMGL? qu ery retu rns the nam e of the im age cu rrently assigned
to th e step .
Ou tsid e of the sequ ence ed itor, the IMGL com m and cop ies the
im age h avin g a n am e equ al to <n am e> from im age m em ory
in to th e im age ed it bu ffer. Th e qu ery retu rn s a on e (1) if th e
n am ed im age can be load ed , oth erw ise a zero (0) is retu rn ed .
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
An ALLU or IMGU com m and m u st be execu ted after the IMGL
com m an d to cau se th e im age in th e ed it to d raw on th e u n it
u nd er test.
Exam p le: IMGL MY_IMG // Load "MY_IMG" dir in
// edit buffer
IMGU // Draw contents of buffer
6-141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGN
IMaGe New
Classification:
Im age ed itor control
IMGN [<nam e>]
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = op tion al valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
IMGN ?
<nam e>
The IMGN com m and initializes the im age ed it bu ffer. The nam e
<nam e> is assigned as the im age’s nam e. The qu ery w ill retu rn
th e n am e th at h as been assign ed as th e im age’s n am e.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Examples: IMGN // Init edit buffer without
// assigning a new name
or
IMGN MY_IMG // Init edit buffer with
// name of "MY_IMG"
IMGP
IMaGe Path
Classification:
Im age m em ory m anagem ent
IMGP <nam e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
IMGP?
<nam e>
Th e FMTP com m an d sets th e cu rren t im age p ath n am e to a
given d irectory. Th e qu ery w ill retu rn th e cu rren t im age p ath
nam e.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: IMGP FOCUS // List Images in FOCUS dir
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-142
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGQ
IMaGe Query pointer
Classification:
Im age m em ory m anagem ent
None
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Lim its:
IMGQ? <ind ex> <nu m ber>
<in d ex> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
<n u m ber> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
List of sp ecified im age n am es
Qu ery Resp on se:
Descrip tion:
Th e qu ery retu rn s <n u m ber> im age n am es from th e list of all
the im ages stored in im age m em ory beginning at <ind ex>. The
im ages are kep t in alp h an u m eric ord er.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Examples: IMGQ? 1 5 // List the first five images
// in memory
or
IMGQ? 1 9999 // List all images in
// memory
IMGR
IMaGe Read image from image memory
location
Classification:
Im age m em ory m anagem ent
IMGR <location>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<location>
-1 th rou gh -26 (EPROM)
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
Th e IMGR com m an d cop ies th e im age resid in g in th e im age
m em ory w ith location <location > in to th e im age bu ffer. Th e
IMGR com m and d oes not cau se the selected im age to be d raw n.
See the IMGU com m and for actu ally d raw ing the im age. Using
th e IMGL com m an d to load im ages by n am e is th e p referred
m eth od of selectin g im ages.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e IMGU com m an d d raw s th e im age. Th e ALLU com m an d
upd ates hard w are to the new setting and red raw s the test im age.
Exam p le: IMGR 1 // Select first custom image in
// memory
IMGU // Draw the image
6-143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGS
IMaGe Save
Classification:
Im age m em ory m anagem ent
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
IMGS
None
The IMGS command saves the current contents of the generator’s
cu stom im age ed it bu ffer back to th e m em ory location from
w h ich it w as origin ally read .
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: IMGS
IMGU
IMaGe Use
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Im age m em ory m anagem ent
IMGU
IMGU?
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
<location>
Th e IMGU com m an d d raw s an im age based on th e cu rren t
con ten ts of th e im age . Th e IMGU? qu ery retu rn s th e im age
m em ory location <location> from w hich the cu rrent contents of
th e im age w ere read . See th e IMGR com m an d for settin g th e
con ten ts of th e im age.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: IMGL BriteBox // Select the BriteBox
// test image
IMGU // Draw the selected test image
INIT
INITialize to factory default settings
Classification:
Direct p rocessor control
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Description:
IN IT
None
The IN IT com m and restores the contents of all of the generator’s
RAM storage locations to factory-default conditions. The generator
th en goes th rou gh
p roced u re.
a
com p lete self-test an d self-calibration
WARN IN G : Th e IN IT com m an d p erm an en tly an d irreversib ly
rem oves all u ser-created form ats, cu stom im ages, test seq u en ces
an d d irectories from m em ory.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: INIT
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-144
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IVER
Image VERsion
Classification:
System p aram eter settin g / Sequ en ce p aram eter settin g
IVER <m od e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<m od e>
0 = N orm al
1 = In vert or d isp lay altern ate version
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
IVER?
<m od e>
The IVER command is context sensitive. When ed iting a sequence
(w h ile betw een a set of SEQB an d SEQE com m an d s), th e IVER
com m and d eterm ines w hich version of an im age is u sed for the
step bein g w orked on . Th e IVER? qu ery retu rn s th e version
cu rren tly assign ed to th e step .
Outsid e of the sequence ed itor, the IVER com m and selects w hich
version of the cu rrent im age is d raw n w hen either an ALLU or
IMGU command is executed. The IVER? query returns the current
settin g of IVER.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e IMGU com m an d red raw s an im age u sin g th e n ew settin g.
Th e ALLU com m an d u p d ates h ard w are an d red raw s th e test
im age w ith th e n ew settin g.
Exam p le: IMGL Text_9 // Select image with white
// text on black
IVER 1 // Select inverted with black on
// white
IMGU // Draw the image as selected
JRAT
Justify pixel clock RATe
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at ed itor control
JRAT <p ixel rate>
Lim its:
<p ixel rate> = Floatin g p oin t n u m ber equ al to th e d esired
p ixel in MH z
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
The JRAT com m and scales the horizontal tim ing p aram eters of
the format currently in the ed it buffer. The parameters are scaled
to p rod u ce th e given p ixel rate w h ile keep in g th e h orizon tal
scan rate as close as p ossible to its original valu e. The follow ing
p aram eters are scaled : H orizontal total p ixels, H orizontal active
pixels, H orizontal sync d elay in pixels and H orizontal sync pulse
w id th in p ixels. The p aram eters are scaled so that their p eriod s,
in m icrosecond s, are as close as p ossible to their original valu es.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
The ALLU com m and u p d ates hard w are to the new settings and
red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: JRAT 28.322 // Adjust timing to a
// 28.322 MHz clock
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEYY
KEY toggle
Classification:
System p aram eter setting
KEYY <bu tton #>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<bu tton #>
1 = Im age (/ Step ) version
2 = Red gatin g
3 = Green gatin g
4 = Blu e gatin g
5 = ACS gatin g
6 = DCS gatin g
7 = DSS gatin g
8 = Ou tp u ts gatin g
Qu ery Syntax:
Description:
None
The KEYY com m and can toggle the status of the follow ing item s:
Im age version of th e cu rren tly d isp layed im age, Red , Green
and Blue video gating, ACS / DCS / DSS Sync gating and Outputs
gating. The ord er of the buttons m atches the ord er of the bu ttons
fou nd on the front p anel of the generator. The cu rrent statu s of
th e bu tton s can be ch ecked u sin g th e LEDS? qu ery.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: KEYY 8 // Toggle current status of
// output gates
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-146
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KNOB
rotate KNOB
Classification:
System p aram eter setting
KN OB <nu m ber> <clicks>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<nu m ber>
1 = u p p er Format kn ob
2 = low er Image kn ob
<clicks>
p ositive in teger = kn ob clicks in a clockw ise d irection
n egative in teger = kn ob clicks in a cou n terclockw ise
d irection
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
The KN OB com m and has the sam e affect on generator op eration
as if an op erator w ere m anu ally tu rning either the “Form at” or
“Im age” kn obs on th e gen erator.
When a sequ ence is ru nning, the “Form at” knob load s sequ ences
from th e d irectory selected by th e SEQP com m an d . Clockw ise
rotation increases the index pointer for the directory. The “Image”
kn ob is u sed to go back an d forth th rou gh th e sequ en ce step s.
Clockw ise rotation selects h igh er step n u m bers.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: KNOB 2 1 // Move Image knob 1 click
// CW
LCDS
LCD Status
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
System p aram eter setting
None
Qu ery Syntax:
LCDS?
Qu ery Resp onse:
Resp onse in norm al form at/ im age selection m od e…
H <Horiz Rate>
<Fmt Mem Loc> = <Fmt Name<>cr><lf>
V<Vert Rate>
<Img Mem Loc> = <Img Name>
Descrip tion:
The LCDS? qu ery retu rns text string d ata that m atches w hat is
sh ow n in th e LCD w in d ow of th e gen erator.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: LCDS? // Return text similar to text
// below
// H32 15=VGA_m3 <cr><lf>
// V60 51=SMPTE133
6-147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LEDS
LED Status
Classification:
System p aram eter setting
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
None
LEDS?
<decimal number from 0 to 255>
Th e LEDS? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t statu s of th e gen erator’s
sign al gen eratin g h ard w are as a sin gle d ecim al n u m ber. Th e
nu m ber corresp ond s to the statu s of the lighted p u sh-bu tton on
the generator in norm al op eration. The easiest w ay to interp ret
th e n u m ber is to first con vert it to an eigh t (8) d igit bin ary
n u m ber. A on e (1) in a given p osition , from MSB to LSB,
corresp on d s to th e follow in g h ard w are settin gs:
Master ou tp u t con trol gated ON
Digital Sep arate (H S&VS) Sync selected
Digital Com p osite Sync selected
Analog Com p osite Sync selected
Blu e vid eo en abled
(MSB)
Green vid eo en abled
Red vid eo en abled
Alternate im age version selected
(LSB)
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: LEDS? // Return the following number
// when the outputs are gated ON,
// separate HS & VS is selected,
// the red, green and blue video
// channels are enabled and the
// primary version of an image is
// selected.
206 // Binary equivalent = 11001110
LIMI
draw video LIMIts markers
Classification:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
LIMI <color>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<color> = available colors
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Places nine (9) m arkers that d efine the active vid eo area. An L-
shap ed m arker is at each corner. T-shap ed m arkers are centered
alon g each ed ge of vid eo an d a sm all cross is at th e cen ter of
vid eo. Th e p rim itive u ses a sin gle p aram eter … color.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: LIMI white // Place white markers that
// define active video area
ALLU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-148
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LINE
draw a LINE
Classification:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
Com m an d Syn tax:
LIN E <color> <X start coord in ate> <Y start coord in ate> <X
en d coord in ate> <Y en d coord in ate>
Lim its:
<color> = available colors
<X start coord in ate> <Y start coord in ate> <X en d
coord in ate> <Y en d coord in ate> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
Draw s a lin e betw een an y tw o p oin ts. Th e lin e is on e (1) p ixel
thick. The p rim itive u ses five (5) p aram eters, the color and the
X an d Y coord in ates for both en d p oin ts.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: LINE yellow 20 5 320 240 // Draw yellow
// line from X=20, Y=5 to X=320,
// Y=240
ALLU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE
communications MODE
Classification:
System p aram eter setting
Com m an d Syn tax:
MODE <bau d > [<p arity> [<d ata > [<stop > [<h an d sh ake> [<
p rotocol>]]]]]
Lim its:
<bau d rate>
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bits/
sec
<p arity>
N = N on e, E = Even or O = Od d
<# d ata bits>
7 or 8
<# stop bits>
1 or 2
<hand shake>
N = N on e, S = Softw are (XON / XOFF) or
H = H ard w are (CTS/ RTS)
< p rotocol >
N = N on e, Y=Y-Mod em
Qu ery Syntax:
MODE?
Qu ery Resp on se:
<bau d > <p arity> <d ata > <stop > <h an d sh ake> < p rotocol>
or
<ISA ad d r>
Descrip tion:
Th e MODE com m an d is n orm ally u sed to set th e serial p ort
com m u nications p aram eters of a stand -alone m od el generator.
The changes take effect as soon as the com m and is entered . The
com m and has no affect on the ISA ad d ressing configu ration of
the -ISA mod el generators. The MODE? query returns the current
serial p ort com m u nications settings of a stand -alone generator
or th e ISA ad d ress of an -ISA m od el gen erator.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Examples: MODE 9600 N 8 1 H N // Set a stand
// alone generator to communicate
// at 9600 Baud, No parity, 8 data
// bits, 1 stop bit, RTS//CTS
// handshaking and No protocol
or
MODE 2400 // Change only the baud rate
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-150
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MSIZ
light Meter SIZe
Classification:
System p aram eter setting
Com m and Syntax:
MSIZ <w id th>, <height>
or
MSIZ <com m on size> (for a squ are box)
Lim its:
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
<size> = p ositive floatin g p oin t n u m ber
MSIZ?
<w id th>, <height>
The MSIZ command establishes the physical size of the lightmeter
box(es) d isplayed in the BriteBox test image. The unit of measure
u sed is based on th e cu rren t settin g of th e system level USIZ
p aram eter. It also affects th e size of th e cu rsor boxes in th e
Persist im age. Ch an gin g th e size w ill not change th e cu rren tly
d isp layed im age. The MSIZ? qu ery retu rns the cu rrent settings
of MSIZ based on th e cu rren t settin g of th e system level USIZ
p aram eter.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e correct u n it of m easu re sh ou ld be selected w ith th e USIZ
com m an d p rior to settin g th e size.
Exam p le: USIZ 1 // Select inches for units
MSIZ 2.0 // Set size to 2.0 inches IMGL
// BriteBox Select BriteBox test
// image IMGU Draw selected image
// using new size
NAMF
NAMe Find
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Directory ed itor control
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Lim its:
N AMF? <nam e>
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
<ind ex>
The qu ery w ill retu rn the ind ex nu m ber of the entry w ith nam e
<nam e> in the d irectory ed it bu ffer. The first nam e in the bu ffer
has an ind ex valu e of 1. If <nam e> is not fou nd , a valu e of zero
(0) is retu rn ed .
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: NAMF? VGA_m4 // Return position of
// VGA_m4 in directory
6-151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NAMI
NAMe Insert
Classification:
Directory ed itor control
N AMI <ind ex> <nam e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
The N AMI command first moves all the names w ith ind ex values
equ al to or greater than <ind ex> to the next higher ind ex valu e
in the d irectory ed it bu ffer. It then inserts the nam e <nam e> in
the d irectory ed it bu ffer at position <ind ex>. A negative nu m ber
or a zero (0) u sed for <ind ex> w ill pu t <nam e> at ind ex position
on e (1). Usin g a n u m ber for <in d ex> beyon d th e last n am e in
th e bu ffer w ill ad d <n am e> to th e in d ex p osition ju st beyon d
th e last n am e. Th e com m an d d oes n ot ch eck if a file called
<n am e> is stored in th e gen erator.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Examples: NAMI 5 FOCUS1 // Put FOCUS1 in fifth
// position
or
NAMI -6 BARS // Put BARS at beginning
// of dir
or
NAMI 999999 HATCH // Put HATCH at end
// of dir
NAMK
NAMe Kill
Classification:
Directory ed itor control
N AMK <nam e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
The N AMK com m and d eletes the given nam e from the d irectory
ed it bu ffer. All nam es w ith ind ex valu es greater than the ind ex
of the d eleted nam e are m oved to the next low er ind ex valu e in
the buffer. Nothing happens if <name> is not found in the buffer.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: NAMK VGA_m4 // Remove VGA_m4 from dir
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-152
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NAMQ
NAMe Query
Classification:
Directory ed itor control
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp on se:
Descrip tion:
None
N AMQ? <ind ex> <nu m ber>
List of sp ecified en try n am es from d irectory ed it bu ffer
Th e qu ery retu rn s <n u m ber> n am es from th e list of n am es in
th e d irectory ed it bu ffer begin n in g at <in d ex>.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Examples: NAMQ? 1 10 // List the first ten names
// in the buffer
or
NAMQ? 1 9999 // List the entire buffer
NAMY
NAMe Yank
Classification:
Directory ed itor control
N AMY <ind ex>
None
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Th e N AMY com m an d d eletes th e n am e at th e given <in d ex>
n u m ber from th e d irectory ed it bu ffer. All n am es w ith in d ex
valu es greater than the ind ex of the d eleted nam e are m oved to
th e n ext low er in d ex valu e in th e bu ffer. N oth in g h ap p en s if
<ind ex> is beyond the ind ex nu m ber of last nam e in the bu ffer.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: NAMY MyFMT // Remove MyFMT from dir
NOGA
use NO GAmma correction
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
N OGA
None
Lim its:
Qu ery Syntax:
Description:
None
Tem porarily d isables any gam m a correction that m ay be selected
in a form at. All color intensity levels in all p arts of the cu stom
im age are ou tp u t w ithou t gam m a correction. Gam m a correction
is d isabled on ly for as lon g as th e im age is d isp layed .
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: NOGA
6-153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OUTG
OUTputs Gate
Classification:
System p aram eter setting
OUTG <m od e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<m od e>
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
OUTG?
<m od e>
Th e OUTG com m an d gates all vid eo an d syn c ou tp u ts of th e
generator ON and OFF. Gating the outputs OFF forces all outputs
to be tu rn ed off. Gatin g th e ou tp u ts ON tu rn s on all ou tp u ts
w h ose in d ivid u al gatin g settin gs are tu rn ed ON . Th e OUTG?
qu ery retu rns the cu rrent statu s of the ou tp u ts of the generator.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: OUTG 0 // Disable all outputs
OVAL
draw an OVAL
Classification:
Com m an d Syn tax:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
OVAL <color> <w id th > <h eigh t> <x> <y> <fill p attern >
<color> = available colors
Lim its:
<w id th > = total n u m ber of h orizon tal p ixels
<h eigh t> = total n u m ber of lin es
<x> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
<y> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
<fill p attern > = available fill p atern s
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Draw s an oval w h ose axes are p arallel to th e vertical an d
horizontal axes of d isp layed vid eo. The size and p osition of the
oval are d efined by its fram ing rectangle. The fram ing rectangle
is a rectan gle w h ose sid es are both tan gen t to th e oval at fou r
p oin ts an d are p arallel to th e vertical an d h orizon tal axis of
vid eo. It’s n ot d raw n as p art of th e p rim itive.
Oval u ses six (6) p aram eters. The first is color. The next tw o are
the p ixel w id th and height of the fram ing rectangle. The fou rth
an d fifth p aram eters are th e X an d Y coord in ates for th e top
left-hand corner of the fram ing rectangle. The last p aram eter is
th e fill.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: OVAL red 240 150 20 10 GrayPat0 // Draw
// a red oval 240 pixels wide by
// 150 pixels high. Start framing
// rectangle at X=20, Y=10. Fill =
// none
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-154
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
draw a PAGE of repeating characters
Classification:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
Com m an d Syn tax:
PAGE <color> <w id th > <h eigh t> <x> <y> <fon tn am e>
<character>
Lim its:
<color> = available colors
<w id th > = w id th of p age in p ixels
<h eigh t> = h eigh t of p age in lin es
<x> = p osition of left ed ge of p age in p ixels
<y> = p osition of top ed ge of p age in p ixels
<fon tn am e> = available fon ts
<ch aracter> = cod e n u m ber of ch aracter
m in = 0
m ax = 255
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
Fills a rectan gu lar area (p age or block) w ith a ch aracter th at
rep eats horizontally and vertically. The <color> p aram eter sets
the color u sed to d raw the character. The <w id th> and <height>
p aram eters d eterm ine the size of the block to be filled . The <x>
and <y> p aram eters d eterm ine the top left corner of the block.
Th e <fon tn am e> p aram eter selects w h ich fon t is u sed to d raw
th e ch aracter. Th e <ch aracter> p aram eter selects a sp ecific
character (by number). For full alphanumeric fonts, the character
nu m ber is the sam e as the character’s ASCII cod e nu m ber. The
sp acin g betw een th e ch aracters is fixed by th e ch aracter block
size in th e fon t an d can n ot be ch an ged . Partial ch aracters are
n ot d raw n to com p letely fill th e rectan gu lar area. Rath er, th e
largest p ossible block of fu ll ch aracters is cen tered in th e
rectangu lar area.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: PAGE blue 40 30 10 10 opix9 69 // Draw
// a small block of blue E
// characters in the upper left
// corner
6-155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCPG
Pixel Clock Pulse Gate
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
PCPG <m od e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<m od e>
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
PCPG?
<m od e>
The PCPG com m and enables and d isables the p ixel clock p u lse
ou tp u t on gen erators th at h ave a p ixel clock ou tp u t available.
Th e PCPG? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of PCPG.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
FMTU or ALLU
Exam p le: PCPG 1 // Enable pixel clk output in
// buffer
FMTU // Update hardware with format
// data
PUTA
PUT Absolute
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Direct p rocessor control
PUTA <ad d ress> <valu e>
Lim its:
<ad d ress>
0 to 4,294,967,295 u n sign ed d ecim al (BASE = 10)
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)
0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)
-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)
<valu e>
0 to 2^ (SIZE)-1
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
Th e PUTA com m an d w rites th e sp ecified valu e <valu e> in to
m em ory at the specified ad d ress <ad d ress>. The tw o param eters
<ad d ress> and <valu e> are interp reted accord ing to the cu rrent
setting of BASE (see the BASE command). The number and format
of th e bits w ritten d ep en d on th e cu rren t settin g of SIZE (see
th e SIZE com m an d ).
N ote – This com m and w ill norm ally be u sed only w ith cu stom
ap p lications and com m and files created by Qu antu m Data.
Ind iscrim inate u se of this com m and can cau se the generator to
stop op erating and / or the loss of stored d ata in nonvolatile
RAM.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
PUTA exp ects p aram eters form atted accord in g to th e cu rren t
rad ix set by th e BASE com m an d .
Exam p le: Use only with code supplied by Quantum
Data!
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-156
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUTR
PUT Relative
Classification:
Direct p rocessor control
PUTR <valu e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<valu e> = 0 to 2^ (SIZE)-1
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Th e PUTR com m an d w rites th e sp ecified valu e <valu e> in to
th e location p oin ted to by th e ad d ress register (see th e ADDR
com m and ). The p aram eter <valu e> is interp reted accord ing to
the current setting of BASE (see the BASE command). The number
and form at of the bits w ritten d ep end on the cu rrent setting of
SIZ E (s e e t h e SIZ E co m m a n d ). Th e a d d r e s s r e g is t e r is
autom atically increm ented by SIZE bits after the current location
h as been w ritten to.
N ote – This com m and w ill norm ally be u sed only w ith cu stom
ap p lications and com m and files created by Qu antu m Data.
Ind iscrim inate u se of this com m and can cau se the generator to
stop op erating and / or the loss of stored d ata in nonvolatile
RAM.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
PUTR exp ects p aram eters form atted accord in g to th e cu rren t
rad ix set by th e BASE com m an d .
Exam p le: Use only with code supplied by Quantum
Data!
RATC
pixel RATe Calibration factor
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
System p aram eter setting
RATC <factor>
Lim its:
<factor> = Floatin g p oin t n u m ber equ al to calibration factor
Typ ical m in . = 0.99990
Typ ical m ax = 1.00010
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
RATC?
<factor>
The RATC com m and sets an internal m u ltip lication factor u sed
in settin g th e p ixel clock frequ en cy. Th e m u ltip lication factor
can be set to com p ensate for the frequ ency error of the internal
referen ce crystal. H avin g to u se a factor ou tsid e of th e typ ical
ran ge m ay in d icate a failu re of gen erator’s h ard w are. Re-
in itializin g th e gen erator’s m em ory sets th e calibration factor
to a factory-d efau lt settin g of 1.00000.
N ote – The RATC p aram eter is a system level p aram eter that
w ill affect the p ixel clock frequ ency of all Form ats that are
recalled . The RATC valu e w ill be retained w hen the generator
is p ow ered d ow n and back u p again. Qu ery the cu rrent setting
of RATC if you are exp eriencing p roblem s w ith the p ixel clock
or scan rate being off in frequ ency.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: RATC 1.00007 // Increases pix clk by
// factor of 1.00007
6-157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RECT
draw a RECTangle
Classification:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
Com m an d Syn tax:
Lim its:
RECT <color> <w id th > <h eigh t> <x> <y> <fill p attern >
<color> = available colors
<w id th > = total n u m ber of h orizon tal p ixels
<h eigh t> = total n u m ber of lin es
<x> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
<y> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
<fill p attern > = available fill p atern s
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Draw s a rectan gle w h ose sid es are p arallel to th e vertical an d
h orizon tal axes of d isp layed vid eo. It u ses six (6) p aram eters.
Th e first is th e color of th e lin e. Th e n ext tw o p aram eters are
th e p ixel w id th an d h eigh t of th e rectan gle. Th e fou rth an d
fifth p aram eters are th e X an d Y coord in ates for th e top left-
h an d corn er of th e rectan gle. Th e last p aram eter is th e fill.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: RECT gray50 15 20 50 40 GrayPat50
// Draw a 50% gray rectangle 15
// pixels wide and 20 pixels high
// with top left corner at X=50,
// Y=40 Fill with 50% active pixels
ALLU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
SCAL
Self CALibrate
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Direct p rocessor control
SCAL
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
Th e SCAL com m an d cau ses gen erator equ ip p ed w ith self-
calibration circu itry to go th rou gh its self-calibration cycle.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: SCAL // Have generator go through self
// cal
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-158
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCAN
SCAN fields per frame
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
SCAN <field s>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<field s>
1 = p rogressive (non-interlaced )
2 = in terlaced
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
SCAN ?
<field s>
Th e SCAN com m an d establish es th e n u m ber of field s scan n ed
p er fram e. Set to on e (1) for p rogressive (n on -in terlaced ) scan
an d tw o (2) for in terlaced scan . Th e SCAN ? qu ery retu rn s th e
cu rren t settin g of SCAN .
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: SCAN // Select interlace in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
SDLY
Sequence step DeLaY
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Sequ ence p aram eter setting
SDLY <d elay>
Lim its:
<d elay> Delay tim e in secon d s as a floatin g p oin t n u m ber
m in = 0.0 secon d s
m ax = 1.70E38 secon d s (in fin ity for all p ractical p u rp oses)
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
SDLY?
<d elay>
Th e SDLY com m an d sets h ow lon g a sequ en ce step w ill p au se
before ad van cin g to th e n ext step in th e Au to ru n m od e. A
sequ ence step w ill u se the last valu e set by the SDLY com m and .
Th e SDLY? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of SDLY.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
SMOD setting m u st be equ al to three (3) in ord er for the SDLY
settin g to h ave an y affect on sequ en ce op eration .
Exam p le: SDLY 5.0 // Set delay to five seconds
// per step
6-159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQA
SEQuence save As
Classification:
Sequ ence m em ory m anagem ent
SEQA <nam e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
The SEQA com m and saves the cu rrent contents of the sequ ence
ed it bu ffer u sin g th e given n am e.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: SEQA MY_SEQ // Save with the name
// "MY_SEQ"
SEQB
SEQuence editing Begin
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Sequ ence ed itor control
SEQB
Descrip tion:
The SEQB com m and m arks the beginning of a sequ ence ed iting
session . Th is com m an d d oes n oth in g in th e cu rren t firm w are
version , bu t is u sed for com p atibility w ith fu tu re version s of
firm w are.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
Either a SEQL com m and to load an existing sequ ence or a SEQN
com m an d to create a n ew sequ en ce. SEQE w h en en d in g th e
ed iting session.
Exam p le: SEQN // Initialize sequence edit buffer
SEQB // Start sequence editing session
// One or more sequence editing
// commands
// ...
SEQE // End sequence editing session
SEQE
SEQuence editing End
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Sequ ence ed itor control
SEQE
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
The SEQE command marks the end of a sequence ed iting session.
Th is com m an d d oes n oth in g in th e cu rren t firm w are version ,
bu t is u sed for com p atibility w ith fu tu re versions of firm w are.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
SEQB w h en startin g th e ed itin g session . Use SEQA or SEQS to
save changes.
Exam p le: SEQB // Start sequence editing session
// One or more sequence editing
// commands
// ...
SEQE // End sequence editing session
SEQA MYSEQ_02 // Save edited sequence as
// MYSEQ_02
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-160
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQK
SEQuence Kill
Classification:
Sequ ence m em ory m anagem ent
SEQK <nam e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Lim its:
SEQK? <nam e>
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
0 or 1
Th e SEQK com m an d d eletes a sequ en ce by n am e. Th e qu ery
returns a one (1) if the named sequence can be deleted. If sequence
is read -on ly or n on existen t, th e qu ery retu rn s a zero (0).
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: SEQK MY_SEQ // Delete seq called
// "MY_SEQ"
SEQL
SEQuence Load
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Sequ ence m em ory m anagem ent
SEQL <nam e>
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Lim its:
SEQL? <nam e>
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
0 or 1
Th e SEQL com m an d cop ies th e sequ en ce h avin g a n am e equ al
to <nam e> from sequ ence m em ory into the sequ ence ed it bu ffer.
The query returns a one (1) if the named sequence can be load ed ,
oth erw ise a zero (0) is retu rn ed .
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
An SEQU com m and m u st be execu ted after the SEQL com m and
to start ru n n in g th e sequ en ce.
Exam p le: SEQL MY_SEQ // Load "MY_SEQ" dir in
// edit buffer
SEQU // Start running the sequence in
// the buffer
6-161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQN
SEQuence New
Classification:
Sequ ence ed itor control
SEQN [<nam e>]
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = op tion al valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
SEQN ?
<nam e>
Th e SEQN com m an d in itializes th e sequ en ce ed it bu ffer. Th e
n am e <n am e> is assign ed as th e sequ en ce’s n am e. Th e qu ery
w ill retu rn th e n am e th at h as been assign ed as th e sequ en ce’s
nam e.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Examples: SEQN // Init edit buffer without
// assigning a new name
or
SEQN MY_SEQ // Init edit buffer with
// name of "MY_SEQ"
SEQP
SEQuence Path
Classification:
Sequ ence m em ory m anagem ent
SEQP <nam e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<n am e> = a valid MS-DOS filen am e
(8 ch aracters m in u s an y exten sion )
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
SEQP?
Cu rrent sequ ence p ath nam e
Th e FMTP com m an d sets th e cu rren t im age p ath n am e to a
given d irectory. Th e qu ery w ill retu rn th e cu rren t im age p ath
nam e.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: SEQP BURN // Sequences in BURN directory
// will be listed
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-162
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQQ
SEQuence Query pointer
Classification:
Sequ ence m em ory m anagem ent
None
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Lim its:
SEQQ? <ind ex> <nu m ber>
<in d ex> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
<n u m ber> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
List of sp ecified sequ en ce n am es
Qu ery Resp on se:
Descrip tion:
Th e qu ery retu rn s <n u m ber> sequ en ce n am es from th e list of
all th e sequ en ce n am es stored in sequ en ce m em ory begin n in g
at <in d ex>. Th e d irectories are kep t in alp h an u m eric ord er.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Examples: SEQQ? 1 5 // List the first five
// directories in memory
or
SEQQ? 1 9999 // List all directories
// in memory
SEQS
SEQuence Save
Classification:
Sequ ence m em ory m anagem ent
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
SEQS
None
Th e SEQS com m an d saves cu rren t con ten ts of th e gen erator’s
sequ en ce bu ffer back to th e m em ory location from w h ich th ey
w ere originally read .
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: SEQS
SEQU
SEQuence Use
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
SEQU
SEQU?
<nam e>
The SEQU com m and starts to ru n the sequ ence cu rrently stored
in the sequence edit buffer. The SEQU? query returns the sequence
n am e cu rren tly set in th e sequ en ce ed it bu ffer.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e sequ en ce in th e ed it bu ffer m u st h ave a n on zero SMOD
settin g in ord er to ru n .
Exam p le: SEQL MY_SEQ // Load "MY_SEQ" dir in
// edit buffer
SEQU // Start running the sequence in
// the buffer
6-163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIZE
SIZE of bit field
Classification:
Direct p rocessor control
SIZE <size>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<size>
-32 to -1 or 1 to 32 bits
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
SIZE?
<size>
Th e SIZE com m an d sets th e field size (in base 10) u sed in
connection w ith the GETA, GETR, PUTA, and PUTR com m and s.
If a n egative size is sp ecified , th en valu es given (or retu rn ed )
are sign exten d ed to 32 bits. For exam p le, if SIZE = -16 an d a
16 bit field con tain in g FFFF h ex is fetch ed , th en th e valu e
FFFFFFFF hex is retu rned . The SIZE? qu ery retu rns the cu rrent
settin g of SIZE in base 10. SIZE is p reset to 16 each tim e th e
gen erator is p ow ered on .
N ote – This com m and w ill norm ally be u sed only w ith cu stom
ap p lications and com m and files created by Qu antu m Data.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: Use only with code supplied by Quantum
Data!
SMOD
Sequence operating MODe
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Sequ ence p aram eter setting
SMOD
Lim its:
<m od e>
0 = Disable
1 = En able m an u al step m od e th at stop s at last step
2 = En able m an u al step m od e th at w rap s to first step
after last step
3 = En able con tin u ou s au to step p in g
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Description:
SMOD?
<m od e>
The SMOD com m and sets the sequence m od e. The SMOD? query
retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of SMOD.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
The SEQL com m and load s the sequ ence and SEQU starts to ru n
it.
Exam p le: SEQL MY_SEQ // Load "MY_SEQ" dir in
// edit buffer
SEQU // Start running the sequence in
// the buffer
SMOD 3 // Set the sequence mode
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-164
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNUM
draw sequence Step NUMber
Classification:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
SN UM <color> <x> <y>
<color> = available colors
<x> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
<y> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
None
Com m an d Syn tax:
Lim its:
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Disp lays the sequ ence step nu m ber to an im age w hen it’s d raw n
as p art of a test sequ en ce. Th e n u m ber, alon g w ith th e w ord
Step, ap p ears in a sm all box. Seq. Step u ses three (3) p aram eters.
The first is the color u sed for the text and box bord er. The next
tw o p aram eters are the X and Y coord inates for the p osition of
th e box.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
The d isp laying of sequ ence step nu m bers m u st be enabled w ith
th e DN UM com m an d an d th e cu stom im age m u st h ave been
load ed as p art of a sequ en ce in ord er for th is p rim itive to be
d raw n.
Exam p le: SNUM white 50 50 // Display seq. num.
// in box with top left corner at
// X=50, Y=50
6-165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSST
Select Sync Signal Type
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
SSST <typ e>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<typ e>
0 = n o syn c
1 = d igital sep arate h orizon tal & vertical syn c ( DH S &
DVS )
2 = d igital sep arate com p osite syn c ( DCS )
3 = an alog com p osite syn c ( ACS )
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
SSST?
<typ e>
Th e SSST com m an d selects th e typ e of syn c sign al th at’s u sed
to synchronize the d isplay. In general, any one of three d ifferent
typ es of syn c can be selected to syn ch ron ize th e d isp lay. Th e
availability of d ifferent sync typ es is sp ecified u sing the ASCT,
DSCT, and DSST com m and s. Som e d isp lays m ay not accep t one
(or m ore) typ es of syn c. For exam p le, a d igital vid eo m on itor
can n ot accep t an alog com p osite syn c becau se an alog sign al
tran sm ission is n ot u sed . Also, a PGA d isp lay can n ot accep t
d igital separate H S & VS because only one sync w ire is provid ed
in th e cablin g. In th ese cases, on e (or m ore) of th e syn c typ es
(ASCT, DSCT, or DSST) is set to zero (0) in d icatin g th at th ey
are not supported . If a non-supported sync type is selected using
the SSST com m and , then the corresp ond ing sync ou tp u ts of the
gen erator w ill rem ain d isabled . Th e SSST? qu ery retu rn s th e
typ e of syn c (if an y) th at’s cu rren tly selected .
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e d esired syn c typ e select m u st n ot be set to void w ith th e
ASCT, DSCT, or DSST command s. To actually output the selected
syn c sign al it m u st be gated on w ith th e ap p rop riate ASSG,
ASBG, ASGG, ASRG, CSPG, H SPG an d VSPG settin gs.
Examples: DSST 1 // Set Amer. H&V in buffer
HSPG 1 // Enable H sync in buffer
VSPG 1 // Enable V sync in buffer
SSST 1 // Select sep H&V sync in
// buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-166
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP
sequence STEP number
Classification:
Sequ ence p aram eter setting
STEP <step #>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<step >
m in = 1
m ax = See d escrip tion
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
STEP?
<step >
Th e STEP com m an d selects a step in th e sequ en ce ed it bu ffer.
It is context sensitive. While ed iting a sequ ence (betw een SEQB
an d SEQE com m an d s), th e STEP com m an d selects a step to be
ed ited . Ou tsid e of th e sequ en ce ed itor an d w h ile ru n n in g a
sequ en ce, th e com m an d selects a step to be execu ted .
When running a sequence, the maximum limit for the step number
is th e n u m ber of th e last step in th e sequ en ce. Wh en ed itin g a
sequ ence to be saved in m em ory, the m axim u m nu m ber of step s
w ill d ep en d u p on th e gen erator firm w are version as w ell as
how m any other sequ ences are stored in sequ ence m em ory and
how many steps they contain. Generators w ith firmw are versions
below 2.605 can store a total of abou t 400 sequ en ce step s.
Generators w ith firm w are versions greater than or equal to 2.605
can store a total of abou t 1280 sequ ence step s. The STEP? qu ery
retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of STEP.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
When running a sequence, the SEQU command must be executed
after th e STEP com m an d to load th e form at an d d isp lay th e
im age selected in th e step .
Exam p le: STEP 5 // Select fifth step in current
// sequence
SEQU // Load format and draw image in
// current step
6-167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TEXT
draw TEXT string
Classification:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
Com m an d Syn tax:
Lim its:
Text <color> <x> <y> <fon tn am e> <“text “>
<color> = available colors
<x> = p osition of left ed ge of p age in p ixels
<y> = p osition of top ed ge of p age in p ixels
<fon tn am e> = available fon ts
<text> = ap p rox. 30 ch aracters (m u st be en closed by qu otes)
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Draw s a u ser-d efin ed text strin g. It u ses five (5) p aram eters.
The first is color. The next tw o are the X and Y coord inates for
th e u p p er left corn er of th e startin g p osition of th e strin g. Th e
fou rth p aram eter selects th e fon t. (Recall th at on ly #0 Sys 16
an d #1 OPIX 9 are fu ll alp h an u m eric sets.) Th e last p aram eter
is the text string. If the string is longer than one w ord , it m u st
be con tain ed in sid e qu otation m arks.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: TEXT red 50 40 opix9 "HELLO WORLD"
// Draw red "HELLO WORLD" at x=50
// y=40 in opix9 font
TOBL
set levels relative TO BLanking
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
None
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Tem p orarily ch an ges h ow th e sign al levels are d eterm in ed for
a given color intensity level. The d efau lt m ethod u ses black as
the 0% reference level and peak vid eo as the 100% level. Inserting
TOBL m oves th e 0% referen ce p oin t to th e blan kin g (blacker
than black) p ed estal level. The reference p oint rem ains shifted
on ly for as lon g as th e im age is d isp layed .
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: TOBL
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-168
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRIA
draw a TRIAngle
Classification:
Cu stom im age p rim itive
Com m an d Syn tax:
Lim its:
TRIA <color> < x1> <y1> <x2> <y2> <x3> <y3> <fill>
<color> = available colors
<x1> <y1> <x2> <y2> <x3> <y3> = p ositive in teger n u m ber
<fill> = available fill p attern
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
None
Draw s a triangle d efined by its three end p oints. The p rim itive
u ses eight (8) p aram eters. The first is line color. The next three
p airs of p aram eters are th e X an d Y coord in ates for th e th ree
points. The last parameter is the fill. More complex filled polygons
can be bu ilt u p u sin g a series of join ed filled trian gles.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: TRIA red50 10 5 10 25 40 15 GrayPat50
// Draw a red50 triangle at x=10,
// y=5; x=10, y=25; x=40, y=15 with
// 50% active pixel fill
ALLU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
UIDN
User IDeNtification
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
System p aram eter setting
UIDN <text string>
<text strin g> ≤ 80 ch aracters in len gth
UIDN ?
Lim its:
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
<text string>
The UIDN com m and sets u p the text string that’s p laced in the
upper portions of the SMPTE133 and Cubes images. The command
can be u sed to ad d you r com p any’s nam e or other id entification
to the images. The command will not change the text in a currently
d isp layed im age. It m u st be red raw n to u se th e n ew text. Th e
factory d efault string is Quantum Data. The UIDN ? query returns
th e cu rren t text strin g.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e IMGU com m an d red raw s th e last selected test im age. Th e
ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws
th e test im age.
Exam p le: UIDN "XYZ Monitor Mfg." // Change text
// string
IMGL SMPTE133 // Select image that uses
// string
IMGU // Draw the image
6-169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USIZ
Unit of measure used for physical SIZes
Classification:
Form at an d System p aram eter settin g
USIZ <u nits>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<u nits>
0 = sizes n ot given (u se d efau lt)
1 = in ch es
2 = m m
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
USIZ?
<u nits>
The USIZ com m and sets the u nits of m easu re assu m ed by H SIZ
and VSIZ com m and s to establish the p hysical size of the im age
that appears on the CRT (context sensitive - see FMTB and FMTE).
Th e USIZ? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of USIZ.
N ote – Ch an gin g th e USIZ p aram eter betw een in ch es an d
m illim eters w ill convert the cu rrent H SIZ and VSIZ valu es to
m atch the new u nit of m easu re. For exam p le, if USIZ is in
inches and the cu rrent H SIZ is 10 (inches), changing USIZ from
inches to mm w ill change HSIZ to 25.4 (mm). The USIZ command
sh ou ld be sen t before sp ecifyin g p h ysical sizes in form at
com m and files.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
The ALLU com m and u p d ates hard w are to the new setting and
red raw s th e test im age, takin g th e n ew u n its in to accou n t.
Exam p le: FMTB // Begin editing session
// One or more format editing
// commands
// ...
USIZ 1 // Select inches as unit of
// measure in buffer
HSIZ 10.4 // Set width to 10.4 in
// buffer
VSIZ 7.8 // Set height to 7.8 in buffer
ALLU // Test the new settings
// One or more format editing
// commands
// ...
FMTE // End editing session
VERF
VERsion of Firmware
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Miscellaneou s system p aram eter
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
VERF?
<version>
Descrip tion:
Th e VERF? qu ery retu rn s th e firm w are revision n u m ber.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: VERF? // Return firmware revision number
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-170
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VERH
VERsion of Hardware
Classification:
Miscellaneou s system p aram eter
Com m and Syntax:
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
None
VERH ?
<version>
The VERH ? qu ery retu rns a five d igit hard w are version nu m ber.
The number ind icates w hen a major mod ification to the hard w are
was last implemented. The significance of each digit is interpreted
as follow s:
31995
La st 2 Di gi ts of Yea r
Da y of th e Month
Month
(1-9 = Ja n. - Sept., A = Oct.,
B = N ov., C = Dec)
The version nu m ber in the exam ple, 31995, w ou ld be interpreted
as March 19, 1995.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
None
Exam p le: VERH? // Return hardware design revision
// date
VRES
Vertical RESolution
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at p aram eter setting
VRES <lines>
Lim its:
<lines>
m in = 1 (w h en SCAN = 1) or
2 (w h en SCAN = 2)
m ax = th e lesser of
1024 (for th e 801GP, GC, GX or 801GC-ISA) or
2048 (for th e 801GF or 801GF-ISA) or
VTOT-1 (w h en SCAN = 1) or
VTOT-3 (w h en SCAN = 2)
Mu st be an even n u m ber w h en SCAN = 2.
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
VRES?
<lines>
The VRES com m and establishes the nu m ber of active lines p er
fram e. Th e VRES? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of VRES.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
The ALLU com m and u p d ates hard w are to the new setting and
red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: VRES 480 // Set 480 active lines in
// buffer
ALLU // Configure hardware and redraw
// image
6-171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VSIZ
Vertical SIZe
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
VSIZ <p hysical size>
<p h ysical size> = p ositive valu e (floatin g p oin t accep ted )
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
VSIZ?
<p hysical size>
The VSIZ com m and establishes the vertical p hysical size of the
image on the display. Units expected (or returned) vary according
to th e last m od e set w ith USIZ com m an d . Th e VSIZ com m an d
is con text sen sitive an d m u st ap p ear betw een begin an d en d
commands: FMTB and FMTE. The VSIZ? query returns the current
settin g of VSIZ.
N ote – Make su re that the USIZ p aram eter is p rop erly set before
u sing the VSIZ com m and . Changing the USIZ setting after
entering VSIZ w ill convert the size to m atch the new u nit of
m easu re.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
The units of measure must be properly set by USIZ before entering
VSIZ. The ALLU com m and u p d ates hard w are to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age, takin g th e n ew size in to accou n t.
Exam p le: FMTB // Begin editing session
// One or more format editing
// commands
// ...
USIZ 1 // Select inches as unit of
// measure in buffer
HSIZ 10.4 // Set width to 10.4 in
// buffer
VSIZ 7.8 // Set height to 7.8 in buffer
ALLU // Test the new settings
// One or more format editing
// commands
// ...
FMTE // End editing session
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-172
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VSPD
Vertical Sync Pulse Delay
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
VSPD <lines>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<lines>
m in
0 (w h en SCAN = 1) or
1 (w h en SCAN = 2)
m ax
VTOT-VRES-VSPW (w h en SCAN = 1) or
[(VTOT-VRES-1) / 2]-VSPW (w h en SCAN = 2)
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
VSPD?
<lines>
The VSPD com m and establishes the d elay betw een lead ing ed ge
of blan kin g in th e first (or even ) field an d th e lead in g ed ge of
the vertical sync p u lse. When interlacing, d elay betw een end of
vid eo and lead ing ed ge of vertical sync before second (or od d )
field is 0.5 line shorter than the w hole-line d elay sp ecified . The
VSPD? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of th e vertical syn c
p u lse d elay.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: VSPD 11 // Set V sync delay to 11 lines
// in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
VSPG
Vertical Sync Pulse Gate
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at p aram eter setting
VSPG <m od e>
Lim its:
<m od e>
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
VSPG?
<m od e>
Th e VSPG com m an d en ables an d d isables th e d igital vertical
sync output. The VSPG? query returns the current mode of VSPG.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
In ord er to u se d igital vertical sync, d igital sep arate H &V sync
m u st be selected w ith the SSST com m and . The FMTU com m and
in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew settin g. Th e ALLU
com m an d u p d ates h ard w are to th e n ew settin g an d red raw s
th e test im age.
Exam p le: VSPG 1 // Enable V sync output in
// buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VSPP
Vertical Sync Pulse Polarity
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
VSPP <p olarity>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<p olarity>
0 = active-low (n egative goin g p u lse)
1 = active-h igh (p ositive goin g p u lse)
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
VSPP?
<m od e>
Th e VSPP com m an d establish es th e logic sen se of th e d igital
vertical sync outputs. Setting polarity to one (1) causes the leading
ed ge of vertical syn c to be a low -to-h igh tran sition . Settin g
p olarity to zero (0) cau ses th e lead in g ed ge of vertical syn c to
be a high-to-low transition. The VSPP? qu ery retu rns the cu rrent
p olarity of VSPP.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
In ord er to u se d igital vertical syn c, it m u st be gated on w ith
th e VSPG com m an d an d d igital sep arate H &V syn c m u st be
selected w ith the SSST com m and . The FMTU com m and instru cts
the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command updates
h ard w are to th e n ew settin g an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: VSPP 1 // Set active hi V sync in
// buffer
VSPG 1 // Enable V sync output in
// buffer
SSST 1 // Select H&V sync type in
// buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
VSPW
Vertical Sync Pulse Width
Classification:
Com m and Syntax:
Form at p aram eter setting
VSPW <lines>
<lines>
Lim its:
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
VSPW?
<lines>
The VSPW com m and establishes the w id th of the vertical sync
p u lse in lines. If the typ e sp ecified for the selected sync signal
(see SSST, ASCT, DSCT, or DSST com m and s) is one of the CCIR
typ es, then the actu al sync p u lse w id th ou tp u t by the generator
w ill be 1/ 2 lin e sh orter th an th e w h ole n u m ber sp ecified . Th e
VSPW? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of VSPW.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: VSPW 3 // Set V sync width to 3 lines
// in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-174
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VTOT
Vertical TOTal lines per frame
Classification:
Form at p aram eter setting
VTOT <lines>
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
<lin es> m u st be an od d n u m ber w h en SCAN = 2
m in = 2
m ax
801GC-ISA = 4096 @ SCAN =1; 4097 @ SCAN =2
801GF-ISA = 4096 @ SCAN =1; 8191 @ SCAN =2
801GP = 2048
801GC, GX = 4096 @ SCAN =1; 4097 @ SCAN =2
801GF = 4096 @ SCAN =1; 8191 @ SCAN =2
Qu ery Syntax:
Qu ery Resp onse:
Descrip tion:
VTOT?
<lines>
Th e VTOT com m an d establish es th e total n u m ber of lin es p er
fram e. Wh en in terlacin g (SCAN =2), VTOT m u st be od d . Th e
VTOT? qu ery retu rn s th e cu rren t settin g of VTOT.
Th e fram e or p ictu re refresh rate is equ al to th e qu otien t of
H RAT d ivid ed by VTOT.
The field or vertical rate is equ al to the fram e rate w hen SCAN
= 1 (non-interlaced op eration).
Th e field or vertical rate is equ al to tw ice th e fram e rate w h en
SCAN = 2 (n on -in terlaced op eration ).
N ote – The cu rrent version of the firm w are d oes not allow you
to d irectly enter a sp ecific field or fram e rate w hen setting u p
a form at. If you r test sp ecifications call for a sp ecific field ,
fram e or vertical refresh rate, enter su itable valu es for H RAT,
SCAN and VTOT to give you the d esired rate.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: VTOT 525 // Set total lines//frame to
// 525 in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
6-175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*WAI
WAIt for completion suffix
Classification:
Direct p rocessor control
<com m and >; *WAI
<com m and >
Com m and Syntax:
Lim its:
FMTU, IMGU, ALLU, BOOT, IN IT, or SCAL
None
Qu ery Syntax:
Descrip tion:
Normally, the generator returns a prompt immediately after either
an FMTU, IMGU, ALLU, BOOT, IN IT, or SCAL com m an d is
received - even before these com m and s have finished execu ting.
If th e system con trollin g th e gen erator m u st kn ow w h en a
com m an d h as fin ish ed execu tin g, u se a sem icolon to ap p en d
the su ffix … ;*WAI. This cau ses the generator to w ait u ntil all
p rocesses h ave been com p leted before sen d in g th e > p rom p t.
Other Requ ired Cm d s:
The *WAI com m and is u sed as a su ffix w ith the FMTU, IMGU,
ALLU, BOOT, IN IT an d SCAL com m an d s.
Exam p le: FMTL vga_m3 // Load a format from memory
// to buffer
IMGL SMPTE133 // Load the SMPTE RP-133
// image to buffer
ALLU;*WAI // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents and delay
// prompt until all done
XVSG
Video Signal Gating
Classification:
Com m an d Syn tax:
Form at p aram eter setting
XVSG <red m od e>, <green m od e>, <blu e m od e>
Lim its:
< m od e>
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Descrip tion:
The XVSG com m and d eterm ines w hich vid eo ou tp u ts are active
w hen the form at is selected . The sam e com m and controls both
th e an alog an d d igital vid eo ou tp u ts.
Oth er Requ ired Cm d s:
Th e FMTU com m an d in stru cts th e gen erator to u se th e n ew
setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting
an d red raw s th e test im age.
Exam p le: XVSG 1 1 1 // Enable all color channels
FMTU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-176
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
801G Memory (Information) Flow Diagram
6-177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
6-178
Chapter 6: Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power-on
Computer Interfacing
If all else fails
Chapter 7: Troubleshooting
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power-on
Und er normal cond itions, the pow er light w ill come
on as soon as the 801G* is tu rned on. The follow ing
m essage w ill be the first thing to appear in the LCD
ju st after the generator is p ow ered -u p :
Normalpower-on
The top nu m ber ind icates the op erating firm w are
revision level, w hile the bottom nu m ber ind icates
the hard w are revision level. Please note these nu m -
bers if you w ill be contacting Qu antu m Data w ith
any questions or problems concerning the operation
of the u nit.
If no p roblem s are encou ntered , the generator w ill
ou tp u t the form at and test im age that w ere active
w hen the u nit w as last p ow ered d ow n.
If the last active im age w as anim ated , the LCD w ill
continu e to d isp lay the firm w are and hard w are re-
vision levels u ntil a bu tton is p u shed or a knob is
tu rned . Otherw ise, the d isp lay w ill change by itself
after abou t tw o second s.
Power-on
message
remains
The information that next appears w ill d epend upon
the op erating m od e that has been p rogram m ed into
the 801G*. The left-hand exam p le show n below is
typ ical for the norm al (d efau lt) op erating m od e of
the 801G*. The exam ple on the right show s a typical
d isp lay in the test sequ ence m od e.
Horizontal Rate
(To nearest KHz)
Signal Format Number
Signal Format Name
H31 15=VGA_m18
V6018=Grill_11
Test Image Name
Vertical Rate
(To nearest Hz)
Test Image Number
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX ¥ Rev. A
7-2
Chapter 7: Troubleshooting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• See Chapter 2 of this manual for infor-
m ation on u sing the 801G* in the nor-
m al op erating m od e.
Error message at
power-on
• See th e “Program m in g” ch ap ter for
inform ation on setting-u p and ru nning
the 801G* in the test sequ ence m od e.
If any other m essages ap p ear, it w ill be be-
cau se one or m ore p roblem s w ere fou nd
d u ring the generator’s p ow er-on self test.
• See "System Error Messages" in Chap -
ter 8.
If the p ow er light fails to com e on w hen the
p ow er sw itch is tu rned on, first check you r
pow er connection and line voltage selection,
then check the fu se.
Unit will not
power-on
• See "AC Line Connection" in Chap ter
5.
ComputerInterfacing
Inform ation on trou bleshooting problem s related to
the RS-232 and IEEE-488 p orts can be fou nd in the
“Program m ing” chap ter.
❖ Please note that leaving any u nu sed equ ip m ent
connected to the 801G*’s p orts m ay cau se the
front p anel d isp lay and controls to hang. If this
shou ld hap p en, d isconnect the equ ip m ent and
cycle the p ow er on the 801G*.
Power-on and Computer Interfacing
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If All Else Fails
It is p ossible for a u ser p rogram m ing error of the
system p aram eters to cau se the 801G* to ap p ear to
be broken. The “Program m ing” chap ter has infor-
mation on checking and changing the settings of the
parameters.
The firm w are inclu d es a w ay of restoring the 801G*
to know n factory d efault cond itions. This proced ure
w ill reset all system settings to their nominal values
and erase all u ser p rogram m ed signal form ats, test
sequ ences and cu stom im ages from m em ory. The
form at m em ory is then load ed w ith the factory d e-
fined form ats as d escribed in Chap ter 3 of this
m anu al. The im age list is reset to all available im -
ages in the ord er given in Chap ter 4 of this m anu al.
To restore the 801G* to its factory d efau lt settings
hold d ow n both the “ACS” and “DSS” sync gate
bu ttons w hile tu rning on the p ow er. Release the
buttons w hen the “Memory Blank” message appears
on the LCD. The firmw are w ill then take a few more
second s to reset the 801G*.
If rep rogram m ing the system p aram eters or reset-
ting the 801G* d oes not restore norm al op eration
you r u nit m ay need to be rep aired . Chap ter 9 of
this m anu al covers rep airs that can be d one by the
u ser. The u nit shou ld be retu rned to Qu antu m Data
or one of our authorized service centers for all other
repairs. Chapter 10 has inform ation on getting you r
801G* rep aired .
Please contact an applications engineer at Qu antu m
Data if you have any qu estions or concerns abou t
the op eration of you generator.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
7-4
Chapter 7: Troubleshooting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Errors
Format Errors
System Error Message Summary
Format Error Message Summary
Chapter 8: Error Messages
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SystemErrors
This section d iscu sses system error m essages that
may be displayed by the generator from time to time.
Power-on Self Test Messages
The integrity of the d ata stored in non-volatile
m em ory is checked every tim e the 801GX is tu rned
on. The follow ing tests are p erform ed :
1. The system configuration memory is checked. The
memory remembers what the generator was doing
w hen it w as last p ow ered d ow n. The m em ory
also stores all system w id e p aram eters su ch as
calibration factors and the light m eter size. It is
also checked to see if it is com p atible w ith the
cu rrent version of op erating firm w are. If every-
thing is in ord er, then the generator goes on to
step 2.
Otherw ise, a "System corru p t!" m essage is d is-
p layed for 2 second s. This m essage is im m ed i-
ately follow ed by a "Mem ory blank" m essage,
w hich is d isp layed for 2 second s w hile the for-
mat memory is re-initialized . Memory initializa-
tion involves clearing the entire non-volatile
memory and loading it with factory default data.
Any and all d ata created or ed ited by the u ser
w ill be w ip ed ou t. The calibration factors are
restored to the original valu es u sed at the fac-
tory to test and calibrate the u nit. The generator
then continu es w ith step 3.
❖ System corru p tion is very rare. It m ay be an
ind ication of a bad m em ory backu p battery
or a d am aged generator.
❖ If you u p d ate the firm w are EPROM in you r
u nit, you r system w ill ap p ear to be corru p t
at the next p ow er-on.
2. The remainder of non-volatile memory is checked
to see if any d ata has been corru p ted since the
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX ¥ Rev. A
8-2
Chapter 8: Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
last tim e the generator w as u sed . This check
includes each of the 300 format storage locations.
All user created custom images and test sequences
are also checked . If no p roblem s are fou nd , the
generator goes on to step 3.
If one (or m ore) item s have been corru p ted , a
message containing a tally of the d efective items
is d isp layed for 2 second s. A m essage for tw o
corru p ted item s is show n here. Please note that
the checking rou tine d oes not id entify the typ es
of items (format, custom image or test sequence)
that are corru p ted . It is u p to the u ser to check
the contents of the ind ivid ual items. Attempting
to load a corru p ted item w ill rep ort and error
for that item .
❖ A corru p ted form at can be rep aired be ei-
ther ed iting it or by d ow nload ing a new set
of d ata from a com p u ter.
❖ In m ost cases, a corru p ted cu stom im age or
test sequence can not be repaired. This is due
to the variable d ata stru ctu re u sed . You w ill
need to recreate and save the d ata back into
memory.
❖ Repeated corruption of the d ata in non-vola-
tile m em ory u su ally ind icates a w eak bat-
tery. Battery replacement information can be
fou nd in the chap ter on “Maintenance”.
3. A power-on message, indicating the current firm-
w are and hard w are revision levels, w ill ap p ear
for 2 second s at the end of the self test p roce-
d ure.
❖ If an anim ated im age is d isp layed at p ow er-
on, this m essage w ill not d isap p ear u ntil a
bu tton is p u shed or a knob is tu rned .
System Messages
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Fail Message
Whenever the AC p ow er line voltage d ip s below
the m inim u m sp ecified , this m essage is d isp layed
and the generator’s m icrop rocessor is halted .
If you see this m essage d u ring norm al op eration, it
p robably ind icates that a p ow er sag or short d u ra-
tion d rop -ou t has occu rred . To clear this cond ition,
cycle the pow er going to the generator. If the pow er
is good , the generator should resum e norm al opera-
tion. If you still have a problem , you m ay also w ant
to check to see that the line voltage selector (next to
the p ow er inlet) is set correctly for the p ow er being
fed into the 801GX.
FormatErrors
Und er norm al operating cond itions, a properly pro-
gram m ed m od el 801GX generator shou ld never re-
p ort any Form at error m essages. If you d o get get
an error m essage w hile load ing a form at it is for
one of tw o reasons. The generator d istingu ishes
between invalid data, entered in one of the program-
ming modes, and corrupted data caused by a memory
failu re. In either case, the generator w ill shu t all of
its ou tp u ts off. The ou tp u ts rem ain off u ntil a valid
form at is load ed .
Invalid Data Error Messages
The example on the left show s a typical invalid d ata
error message. The top line of the d isplay show s the
form at’s storage location nu m ber and nam e. The
bottom line show s the error num ber. Error num bers
w ill be in the range of of 2000 throu gh 2999. Differ-
ent numbers ind icate w hat type invalid d ata or com-
bination of d ata is cau sing the error.
The follow ing p ages exp lain the cau se of each of
the error nu m bers and offers su ggestions on how to
correct the p roblem .
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
8-4
Chapter 8: Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Corrupt Data Error Messages
The exam p le on the left show s a coru p ted d ata er-
ror m essage. The top line of the d isp lay show s the
form at’s storage location nu m ber and nam e. The
bottom line show s the error nu m ber. Error nu m ber
9450 id entifies the cau se of the error as corru p ted
d ata. This typ e of error either ind icates the signs of
a failing m em ory backu p battery or a m ore seriou s
hard w are failu re in the generator.
Corru p ted form ats can corrected by either ed iting
them or by d ow nload ing a clean cop y of the form at
from a com p u ter. The “Program m ing” chap ter ex-
p lains both m ethod s in d etail.
Format Error Messages
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Error Message Summary
Problem fou nd w ith the configu ration d ata stored
in battery backed m em ory. All 150 form at storage
locations w ill be cleared and the ind u stry stand ard
form ats installed . The m em ory back up battery m ay
need to be rep laced .
All 150 Form at storage locations are being erased .
Ind u stry stand ard form ats are being installed in lo-
cations 1 thru 44.
One or m ore form ats, stored in battery backed for-
m at m em ory, has (have) been corru p ted . Ed it bad
form at(s) or re-initialize the form at m em ory to cor-
rect the p roblem . The m em ory back u p battery m ay
need to be rep laced .
The selected form at has been corru p ted . Ed it the
form at or re-initialize the form at m em ory to correct
the problem. The memory back up battery may need
to be rep laced .
AC line voltage is low or a p ow er glitch has oc-
cu rred . Check the line-voltage and selector-sw itch
settings; then cycle the p ow er.
Refer to the format error summary on the next page.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
8-6
Chapter 8: Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Format Error Messages
2030
2040
2050
SCAN less th an 1
An invalid scan setting exists in the file.
❖
Reed it the scan setting.
SCAN greater th an 2
An invalid scan setting exists in the file.
❖
Reed it the scan setting.
H orizon tal total too sm all
The generator d oes not su p p ort a horizontal p eriod (active
+ blanked ) less than 144 p ixels p er horizontal scan line.
❖
Increase the horizontal p eriod so that it’s m ore than
143 p ixels.
2060
2071
H orizon tal total too large
The generator d oes not su p p ort a horizontal p eriod (active
+ blanked ) of m ore than 4096 p ixels p er horizontal scan
line.
❖
Decrease the horizontal p eriod so that it’s less than
4096 p ixels.
Pixel rate too h igh
The p ixel rate exceed s the m axim u m rate su p p orted by the
currently selected generator mod el for the given vid eo type
selection.
❖
❖
❖
Make su re vid eo typ e is correct.
Decrease the p ixel rate.
Decrease the horizontal p eriod (in p ixels) for a given
horizontal rate.
2072
Pixel rate too h igh
The p ixel rate exceed s the m axim u m rate su p p orted by the
currently selected generator mod el for the given vid eo type
selection.
❖
❖
❖
Make su re vid eo typ e is correct.
Decrease the p ixel rate.
Decrease the horizontal p eriod (in p ixels) for a given
horizontal rate.
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2080
Pixel rate too low
The p ixel rate is below the m inim u m rate su p p orted by the
generator.
❖
Increase the valu e of H TOT.
Increase the valu e of H RAT.
❖
2090
2091
H orizon tal total n ot even
The generator d oes not su p p ort an od d nu m ber of total
p ixels p er scan line.
❖
Make the horizontal period (in pixels) an even number.
H orizon tal total m u st b e m u ltip le of 4 at p ixel
rate
The generator does not support horizontal pixel totals (active
+ blanking) that cannot be evenly d ivid ed by four (4) at the
given p ixel rate.
❖
Make the total horizontal p ixels p er line to be evenly
d ivisible by 4.
❖
Decrease the p ixel rate.
2130
2140
H orizon tal active too sm all
The number of active pixels per horizontal scan line is below
the m inim u m su p p orted by the generator.
❖
Increase the horizontal active p ixels.
H orizon tal b lan k in g too sm all
The nu m ber of blanked p ixels p er horizontal scan line is
below the m inim u m su p p orted by the generator.
❖
Increase the horizontal p eriod (in p ixels).
Decrease horizontal active (in p ixels).
❖
2141
2150
H orizon tal b lan k in g too sm all
The number of blanked pixels per horizontal scan line (HTOT
- H RES) is below the minimum supported by the generator.
❖
❖
Increase the horizontal p eriod (in p ixels).
Decrease horizontal active (in p ixels).
H orizon tal b lan k in g too sm all
The number of blanked pixels per horizontal scan line (HTOT
- H RES) is below the minimum supported by the generator.
❖
Increase the horizontal p eriod (in p ixels).
Decrease horizontal active (in p ixels).
❖
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
8-8
Chapter 8: Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2151
2152
H orizon tal total < h orizon tal res.
The number of active pixels per horizontal scan line is greater
than the total nu m ber of p ixels p er line (hor. p eriod ).
❖
Increase the horizontal p eriod (in p ixels).
Decrease horizontal active (in p ixels).
❖
H orizon tal active too large or H orizon tal total
too sm all
The generator d oes not su p p ort the given com bination of
the horizontal pixel total and the number of horizontal active
pixels.
❖
Increase the number of blanked or horizontal total pixels
p er line.
❖
Decrease the nu m ber of active p ixels p er line.
2155
H orizon tal b lan k in g too sm all
The number of blanked pixels per horizontal scan line (HTOT
- H RES) is below the minimum supported by the generator.
❖
Increase the horizontal p eriod (in p ixels).
Decrease horizontal active (in p ixels).
❖
2180
2181
H orizon tal p u lse w id th less th an 1
The horizontal sync p u lse m u st be at least 1 p ixel w id e.
❖
Increase the valu e of horizontal sync p u lse w id th so
that it’s greater than zero.
H orizon tal syn c p u lse w id th m u st b e even at
cu rren t p ixel rate
The generator does not support horizontal sync pulse widths
(in p ixels) that cannot be evenly d ivid ed by tw o (2) at the
given p ixel rate.
❖
Make the sync pulse w id th (in pixels) evenly d ivisible
by 2.
❖
Decrease the p ixel rate.
2190
H orizon tal syn c p u lse w id th too sm all for
HDTV
The generator d oes not su p p ort the given horizontal sync
p u lse w id th for H DTV vid eo typ es.
❖
Increase the sync p u lse w id th.
Change the vid eo signal typ e.
❖
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2191
H orizon tal syn c p u lse w id th m u st b e even for
HDTV
The generator does not support horizontal sync pulse widths
(in p ixels) that cannot be evenly d ivid ed by tw o (2) for
H DTV vid eo typ es.
❖
Make the sync pulse w id th (in pixels) evenly d ivisible
by 2.
❖
Change the vid eo signal typ e.
2200
2201
H orizon tal p u lse w id th too large
The generator does not support a horizontal sync pulse width
greater than the nu m ber of blanked p ixels p er horizontal
scan line.
❖
❖
❖
Decrease the horizontal p u lse w id th.
Increase the horizontal p eriod (in p ixels).
Decrease the nu m ber of active p ixels p er line.
H orizon tal syn c p u lse d elay m u st b e even at
cu rren t p ixel rate
The generator d oes not support horizontal sync pulse d elay
(in p ixels) that cannot be evenly d ivid ed by tw o (2) at the
given p ixel rate.
❖
Make the sync pulse w id th (in pixels) evenly d ivisible
by 2.
❖
Decrease the p ixel rate.
2230
H orizon tal p u lse d elay exten d s syn c b eyon d
blanking
The generator d oes not support horizontal sync pulses w ith
any portion of the pulse occurring outsid e of the horizontal
blanking p eriod .
❖
❖
❖
❖
Decrease the horizontal p u lse w id th.
Decrease the horizontal p u lse d elay.
Increase the horizontal p eriod (in p ixels).
Decrease the nu m ber of active p ixels p er line.
2240
Vertical total too sm all
There m u st be at least a total of 2 horizontal scan lines p er
fram e w ith non-interlaced m od e.
❖
Increase the vertical p eriod so that it’s greater than 1
line.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
8-10
Chapter 8: Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2250
Vertical total too sm all
There m u st be at least a total of 5 horizontal scan lines p er
fram e w ith interlaced op eration.
❖
Increase the vertical p eriod so that it’s greater than 4
lines.
❖
Sw itch to non-interlaced op eration.
2270
2280
Vertical total is even
There m u st be an od d nu m bered total of horizontal scan
lines p er fram e w ith interlaced op eration.
❖
Change the vertical period (in lines) to an even number.
Sw itch to non-interlaced op eration.
❖
Vertical total too large
The generator d oes not su p p ort the given vertical p eriod .
❖
Decrease the vertical p eriod to less than 4096 lines
p er fram e if non-interlaced .
❖
Decrease the vertical p eriod to less than 4097 lines
p er fram e if interlaced .
2300
2310
Vertical active too sm all
There m u st be at least 1 active horizontal scan line w ith
non-interlaced operation.
❖
Increase vertical active so that it’s greater than 1 line.
Vertical b lan k in g too sm all
There m u st be at least 1 line of vertical blanking w ith non-
interlaced op eration.
❖
Increase the vertical p eriod .
Decrease vertical active.
❖
2320
Vertical active too sm all
There m u st be at least 2 active horizontal scan lines w ith
interlaced op eration.
❖
Increase vertical active so that it’s greater than 2 lines.
Sw itch to non-interlaced op eration.
❖
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2321
Vertical active m u st b e even w h en in in ter-
laced scan m od e
The generator d oes not su p p ort vertical active p eriod s (in
lines) that cannot be evenly d ivid ed by tw o (2) w hen
interlaced op eration is selected .
❖
Make the vertical active period (in lines) evenly divisible
by 2.
❖
Change to p rogressive (non-interlaced ) scan m od e.
2330
2350
2370
Vertical b lan k in g too sm all
There m u st be at least 3 lines of vertical blanking w ith
interlaced op eration.
❖
❖
❖
Increase the vertical p eriod .
Decrease vertical active.
Sw itch to non-interlaced op eration.
Vertical p u lse too sm all
The generator d oes not su pport a vertical sync pu lse w id th
valu e of less than one scan line in d u ration. The firm w are
m akes the p u lse a half-line shorter than the entered valu e
w hen Eu rop ean typ e sync is selected .
❖
Increase the vertical sync p u lse w id th.
Vertical p u lse too large
The generator d oes not su pport a vertical sync pu lse w id th
greater than the nu m ber of blanked scan lines p er fram e
w ith non-interlaced op eration.
❖
❖
❖
Decrease the valu e of vertical sync p u lse w id th.
Increase the valu e of vertical p eriod (in lines).
Decrease vertical active.
2390
Vertical p u lse too large
The generator d oes not su pport a vertical sync pu lse w id th
greater than the least nu m ber of blanked scan lines ((Vp er
- Vact - 1) ÷ 2 ) betw een field s w ith interlaced op eration.
❖
❖
❖
Decrease the valu e of vertical sync p u lse w id th.
Increase the valu e of vertical p eriod (in lines).
Decrease vertical active.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
8-12
Chapter 8: Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2391
2392
2393
In com p atib le ACS & D CS typ es
The analog composite sync and digital composite sync settings
must be compatible when analog and digital composite sync
are both active.
❖
Make the ACS and DCS settings the sam e.
Change the Sync select setting.
❖
In com p atib le ACS & D SS typ es
The analog composite sync and digital separate sync settings
must be compatible when analog and digital composite sync
are both active.
❖
Change the ACS and / or DSS settings.
Change the Sync select setting.
❖
AVST req u ires ASCT to b e 3 or 8
ACS setting not com patible w ith TV setting for vid eo kind .
❖
Change ACS to “American w/ serr & EQ” or “European
w / serr & EQ”.
❖
Change Vid eo kind to non-TV setting.
2394
2395
ACS availab le on green on ly
The 801GP supports adding composite sync only to the green
analog vid eo channel.
❖
Change the ACS On setting "- - -" or "- G -."
AVST req u ires SSST to b e 3-7
Analog com p osite sync m u st be active w hen vid eo kind is
set to TV.
❖
Change Sync select to “ACS,” “ACS & DSS,” “ACS &
DCS” or “ACS & DSS & DCS.”
❖
Change Vid eo kind to non-TV setting.
2396
2397
In valid ACS typ e
An invalid analog com p osite sync typ e selection exists in
the file.
❖
Reed it the analog com p osite sync typ e setting.
In valid D CS typ e
An invalid d igital com p osite sync typ e selection exists in
the file.
❖
Reed it the d igital com p osite sync typ e setting.
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2398
In valid D SS typ e
An invalid d igital sep arate sync typ e selection exists in the
file.
❖
Reed it the d igital sep arate sync typ e setting.
2399
2400
In valid syn c typ e
An invalid sync select exists in the file.
❖
Reed it the sync select setting.
D igital sep arate syn c typ e selection n ot
com p atib le w ith an alog an d /or d igital syn c
type
The generator d oes not su p p ort the given com bination of
d igital sep arate sync (H &V) selection w ith one or both of
the analog or d igital com p osite sync typ e selections.
❖
Select only one sync typ e.
2430
Vertical p u lse d elay exten d s syn c b eyon d
blanking
The generator d oes not su p p ort vertical sync p u lses w ith
any p ortion of the p u lse occu rring ou tsid e of the vertical
blanking p eriod .
❖
❖
❖
❖
Decrease the vertical sync p u lse w id th.
Decrease the vertical sync p u lse d elay.
Increase the vertical p eriod (in lines).
Decrease the vertical active (in lines).
2450
Vertical p u lse d elay exten d s syn c b eyon d
blanking
The generator d oes not su p p ort vertical sync p u lses w ith
any portion of the pulse occurring outsid e of either vertical
blanking p eriod w ith interlaced op eration.
❖
❖
❖
❖
Decrease the vertical sync p u lse w id th.
Decrease the vertical sync p u lse d elay.
Increase the vertical p eriod (in lines).
Decrease the vertical active (in lines).
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
8-14
Chapter 8: Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2490
2495
EQ b efore too large
The interval d u ring w hich p re-equ alization p u lses occu r
cannot be greater than the vertical sync p u lse d elay.
❖
Decrease EQ Before.
❖
Increase the vertical sync p u lse d elay.
EQ after too large
The interval d u ring w hich p ost-equ alization p u lses occu r
cannot be greater than the interval betw een the end of the
vertical sync pulse and the end of the shorter vertical blanking
interval betw een field s w ith interlaced op eration.
❖
❖
❖
❖
❖
Decrease EQ After.
Decrease the vertical sync p u lse w id th.
Decrease vertical sync p u lse d elay.
Increase the vertical p eriod (in lines).
Decrease the vertical active.
2496
EQ after too large
The interval d u ring w hich p ost-equ alization p u lses occu r
cannot be greater than the interval betw een the end of the
vertical sync p u lse and the end of the vertical blanking.
❖
❖
❖
❖
❖
Decrease EQ After.
Decrease the vertical sync p u lse w id th.
Decrease vertical sync p u lse d elay.
Increase the vertical p eriod (in lines).
Decrease the vertical active.
2550
N ot en ou gh vid eo m em ory
The generator d oes not have enough memory space to store
the total nu m ber of active p ixels requ ired for one p ictu re.
❖
Decrease the vertical active.
Decrease the horizontal active.
❖
2704
2705
H orizon tal p h ysical size too sm all
The p hysical horizontal size m u st be greater than zero.
❖
Change the horizontal p hysical size to a p ositive,
nonzero, valu e.
In valid p h ysical size u n its
An invalid p hysical size u nit of m easu re exists in the file.
❖
Reed it both p hysical sizes.
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2706
2714
Vertical p h ysical size too sm all
The p hysical vertical size m u st be greater than zero.
❖
Change the vertical physical size to a positive, nonzero
value.
Ped estal sw in g ou t of ran ge
The analog vid eo blanking p ed estal cannot be less than 0
IRE (%) or m ore than 100 IRE (%).
❖
Change the valu e of Ped estal level to be greater than
or equ al to 0 and less than or equ al to 100 IRE (%).
2715
2716
G am m a correction ou t of ran ge
The firm w are d oes not su p p ort gam m a correction factors
that are less than 0.1 or greater than 10.0.
❖
Change the valu e of Gam m a to be greater than or
equ al to 0.1 and less than or equ al to 10.0.
An alog vid eo sw in g ou t of ran ge
The hard w are d oes not su p p ort p eak-to-p eak analog vid eo
sw ings that are less than 0 or greater than 1.000 volts. The
sw ing d oes not inclu d e any com posite sync levels that m ay
be ad d ed .
❖
Change the Vid eo sw ing to be greater than or equ al
to 0 and less than or equ al to 1.000 volts.
2717
2719
Syn c sw in g ou t of ran ge
Th e h ard w are d oes n ot su p p ort p eak-to-p eak an alog
com p osite sync sw ings that are less than 0 or greater than
0.400 volts.
❖
Change the Sync sw ing to be greater than or equ al to
0 and less than or equ al to 0.400 volts.
Vid eo sw in g calib ration ou t of ran ge
One or m ore of the analog vid eo sw ing calibration factors
are ou t of range. These p aram eters are not actu ally p art of
a Form at that is stored in m em ory. They are system level
parameters that affect how all analog Formats are read from
m em ory and into the hard w are. The param eter settings are
m aintained w hile the 801GP is tu rned off.
❖
Re-initialize you r generator’s m em ory.
❖
Contact Qu antu m Data for fu rther assistance.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
8-16
Chapter 8: Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2720
Syn c sw in g calib ration ou t of ran ge
One or m ore of the analog sync sw ing calibration factors
are ou t of range. These p aram eters are not actu ally p art of
a Form at that is stored in m em ory. They are system level
parameters that affect how all analog Formats are read from
m em ory and into the hard w are. The param eter settings are
m aintained w hile the 801GP is tu rned off.
❖
Re-initialize you r generator’s m em ory.
❖
Contact Qu antu m Data for fu rther assistance.
2721
2722
2741
N TSC req u ires p ed estal (801GX Only)
N TSC p ed estal ou t of ran ge (801GX Only)
D igital vid eo typ e selection n ot su p p orted
The generator does not support the given digital video signal
type. Note – the 801GF, 801GC-ISA and 801GF-ISA generators
d o not have d igital vid eo ou tp u ts.
❖
Select a valid d igital vid eo signal typ e.
2742
2743
In valid d igital vid eo typ e
An invalid d igital vid eo typ e exists in the file.
❖
Ed it the Vid eo kind setting.
D igital vid eo p olarity m u st b e p ositive
An invalid d igital vid eo p olarity setting exists in the file.
❖
The file cannot be corrected w ith the ed itor. Create a
new file.
2745
2747
Can n ot h ave an alog an d d igital vid eo
An invalid d igital vid eo typ e exists in the file.
❖
Ed it the Vid eo kind setting.
An alog vid eo sign al typ e in valid
An invalid analog vid eo typ e exists in the file.
❖
Ed it the Vid eo kind setting.
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3000
3001
In valid color n am e
A com m and file containing an invalid color nam e selection
w as d ow nload ed to the generator.
❖
Check for sp elling errors of the color nam es u sed in
the com m and file.
❖
Use only color nam es that ap p ear in the color list.
In valid fill p attern n am e
A com m and file containing an invalid fill p attern nam e
selection w as d ow nload ed to the generator.
❖
Check for spelling errors of the fill pattern names used
in the com m and file.
❖
Use only fill pattern names that appear in the fill pattern
list.
3002
3003
3004
N o im age m em ory
This occu rs d u ring IMGN com m and and is cau sed by an
insu fficient am ou nt of m anaged m em ory for the bu ffer
requ est. This m ay be d u e to lack of m em ory or fragm ented
memory.
❖
Save all u sed ed it bu ffers and issu e FMTN , IMGN ,
and / or DIRN . This clears extra m em ory being u sed
by these bu ffers.
Im age m em ory fu ll
There is not enou gh free m em ory to save the im age that is
in the ed it bu ffer.
❖
Red u ce the nu m ber of p rim itives in the im age being
ed ited .
❖
Delete one or m ore custom im ages currently stored in
memory. You will need to abandon your current edited
im age to d o this.
In valid fon t n am e
A com m and file containing an invalid font nam e selection
w as d ow nload ed to the generator.
❖
Check for sp elling errors of the font nam es u sed in
the com m and file.
❖
Use only font nam es that ap p ear in the font list.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
8-18
Chapter 8: Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3005
Im g ed ru n n in g
This occu rs d u ring IMGB, IMGN , or IMGE com m and s. It
hap p ens w hen you are creating a cu stom im age w ith the
Custom Image Editor on a stand-alone generator and, during
that session, you begin an im age ed iting session via the
IMGB or IMGN com m and s.
❖
Do not use the IMGB or IMGN command s w hile using
GUI.
3006
3010
N oth in g to save
This occu rs d u ring IMGA or IMGS com m and s. It hap p ens
w hen you try to save the contents of the im age ed iting
register w hen none is initialized .
❖
You m u st u se IMGN before IMGS or IMGA.
In valid Look u p Tab le (LUT) level (8-b it D AC)
The 801GX, 801GC, 801GC-ISA and 801GP generators d o
not su p p ort analog vid eo DAC settings beyond the range
of 0 throu gh 255.
❖
The levels u sed w ith the FRGB com m and m u st be
between 0 and 255 when used on the generator models
listed above.
3015
3050
In valid Look u p Tab le (LUT) level (10-b it D AC)
The 801GF and 801GF-ISA generators do not support analog
vid eo DAC settings beyond the range of 0 throu gh 1023.
❖
The levels u sed w ith the FRGB com m and m u st be
between 0 and 1023 when used on the generator models
listed above.
In valid gray level
The generator does not support gray level percentages beyond
the range of 0 throu gh 100. This error shou ld never occu r
u nd er norm al op eration.
❖
Please con tact Qu an tu m Data's tech n ical su p p ort
d ep artm ent if you get this m essage.
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4002
4003
N o seq u en ce m em ory
This occu rs d u ring the SEQN com m and . It hap p ens w hen
there’s an insu fficient am ou nt of m anaged m em ory for the
bu ffer requ est.
❖
Save all u sed ed it bu ffers and issu e FMTN , IMGN ,
and / or DIRN . This clears extra memory used by these
buffers.
Seq u en ce m em ory fu ll
There is not enou gh free m em ory to save the sequ ence that
is in the ed it bu ffer.
❖
Red u ce the nu m ber of step s in the sequ ence being
ed ited .
❖
Delete one or m ore sequ ences cu rrently stored in
memory. You will need to abandon your current edited
sequ ence to d o this.
4005
Seq ed ru n n in g
This occu rs d u ring SEQB, SEQN , or SEQE com m and s. It
happens w hen you have used the Sequence Ed itor and then
try to u se the SEQB or SEQN com m and .
❖
Exit the generator's GUI sequence editor before editing
a sequ ence u sing com m and s via the com m u nications
port.
4006
4007
N o seq u en ce to save
This occu rs d u ring SEQA or SEQS com m and s. It hap p ens
w hen you try to save the contents of the sequ ence ed iting
register and none is initialized .
❖
You m u st u se SEQN before SEQS or SEQA.
Seq u en ce b u ffer fu ll
N o m ore step s can be ad d ed to the cu rrent sequ ence being
ed ited .
❖
Red u ce the nu m ber of step s in the sequ ence.
Break u p th e testin g in to tw o or m ore sep arate
sequences.
❖
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
8-20
Chapter 8: Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4008
In valid d elay tim e in seq u en ce
A com m and file containing a sequ ence step d elay w as
d ow nload ed to the generator.
❖
Only u se d elay tim es (in second s) that corresp ond to
the list of available d elays.
4010
4020
Fon t in d ex ou t of ran ge
You tried to u se a font at an invalid ind ex.
N o fon t p resen t at given in d ex
You tried to access a font at a valid ind ex bu t the sp ecified
ind ex is em p ty becau se of a p reviou s d elete.
4030
4576
In valid fon t location
You tried to install a font that has not been transferred to
memory.
Can ’t con vert to in ch es, n ot valid u n its
The format unit (inches or millimeters) is unknow n because
a new form at w as not initialized before it w as created .
Con version betw een th e form at’s u n it an d th e u ser’s
p reference fails.
❖
Alw ays use the FMTN com m and before ed iting a new
format.
4579
5002
Can ’t con vert to m m , n ot valid u n its
The format unit (inches or millimeters) is unknow n because
a new form at w as not initialized before it w as created .
Con version betw een th e form at’s u n it an d th e u ser’s
p reference fails.
❖
Alw ays use the FMTN com m and before ed iting a new
format.
N o d irectory m em ory
This occurs during DIRN and NAMI commands when there’s
an insu fficient am ou nt of m anaged m em ory for the bu ffer
request.
❖
Save all u sed ed it bu ffers and issu e FMTN , IMGN ,
and / or DIRN . This clears extra m em ory being u sed
by these bu ffers.
8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5003
D irectory m em ory fu ll
This occurs d uring DIRA and DIRS command s w hen there’s
insu fficient room in the d irectory m em ory p ool for the
requ ested save.
❖
Use DIRK to d elete one or m ore d irectories from the
d irectory p ool.
5006
5009
N o d irectory to save
This occu rs d u ring DIRA and DIRS com m and s w hen you
try to save a nonexistent d irectory.
❖
A d irectory m u st resid e in the ed it bu ffer w hich is
created w ith DIRN or DIRL.
D irectory list fu ll
This occu rs d u ring DIRA and DIRS com m and s w hen you
try to save m ore than 10 d irectories.
❖
Use DIRK to d elete one or m ore d irectories.
8450
8455
Can ’t rem ove, fon t n ot p resen t
This occu rs d u ring FN TK com m and w hen you try to d elete
a nonexistent font.
Can ’t rem ove, RO M fon t
This occu rs d u ring FN TK com m and w hen you try to d elete
a bu ilt-in font. Bu ilt-in fonts are sys16, focu s12, focu sm ac,
op ix9, m em esony, kanjikan, focu sat5, focu sat6, focu sat7,
focu sat8, and m em ep lu s.
❖
Don’t try to rem ove bu ilt-in fonts.
8460
Fon t alread y exists in m em ory
You tried to transm it a font to the generator w hich alread y
contained a font w ith the sam e nam e.
❖
Change the nam e of the font to be transm itted .
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
8-22
Chapter 8: Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9450
9451
In valid form at location
This occu rs d u ring FMTR com m and w hen the integrity of
the d ata stored in the sp ecified form at m em ory location is
corrupt.
❖
Delete the form at from nonvolatile RAM u sing the
YAN K com m and . Then recreate and save the form at.
A corru p ted form at in EPROM requ ires at least the
rep lacem ent of the firm w are EPROM set.
Bad location for form at, failed verify
This occurs during FMTV command and FMTV? query when
you attem p t to verify d ata integrity at an invalid location.
❖
Use a range of -1 throu gh -nn for p erm anent form ats
in EPROM or 1 throu gh 300 for form ats saved in
nonvolatile RAM.
9452
9453
9454
9456
Bad location for form at verify
This occurs during a FMTZ? query when you try to determine
if an invalid location has been erased .
❖
Use a range of 1 throu gh 300 for form ats saved in
nonvolatile RAM.
Can ’t ch an ge EPRO M con ten ts
This occu rs d u ring FMTW or FMTZ com m and s w hen you
try to overw rite or zero ou t an EPROM form at.
❖
Use a range of 1 throu gh 300 for form ats saved in
nonvolatile RAM.
Bad location for form at erase
This occu rs d u ring FMTE com m and w hen you try to access
an invalid form at m em ory location.
❖
Use a range of 1 throu gh 300 for form ats saved in
nonvolatile RAM.
Bad location for form at read /w rite
This occu rs d u ring FMTR or FMTW com m and s w hen you
try to read or w rite to an invalid form at m em ory location.
❖
Use a range of -1 throu gh -nn for p erm anent form ats
in EPROM or 1 throu gh 300 for form ats saved in
nonvolatile RAM. Use a range of from 1 throu gh 300
to save form ats in nonvolatile RAM w ith the FMTW
command .
8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9457
9458
Bad location for form at n am e read
This occu rs d u ring FMTR? qu ery w hen you try to read or
w rite to an invalid form at m em ory location.
❖
Use a range of -1 throu gh -nn for p erm anent form ats
in EPROM or 1 throu gh 300 for form ats saved in
nonvolatile RAM w ith the FMTR? qu ery.
Bad location for form at cop y
This occu rs d u ring FMTD com m and w hen you try d u ring
cop ying to access an invalid form at m em ory location.
❖
Use a range of -1 throu gh -nn for p erm anent form ats
in EPROM or 1 throu gh 300 for form ats saved in
nonvolatile RAM as the sou rce location. Use a range
of 1 throu gh 300 as the d estination location to save
form ats in nonvolatile RAM.
9459
9460
Can ’t ch an ge EPRO M con ten ts
This occu rs d u ring FMTD com m and w hen you try d u ring
cop ying to overw rite an EPROM form at.
❖
Use a range of -1 throu gh -nn for p erm anent form ats
in EPROM or 1 throu gh 300 for form ats saved in
nonvolatile RAM.
Bad location for form at d u p licate
This occu rs d u ring FMTD and FMTI com m and s w hen you
try to u se one or m ore invalid form at m em ory locations as
the com m and argu m ents.
❖
Use a range of -1 throu gh -nn for p erm anent form ats
in EPROM or 1 throu gh 300 for form ats saved in
nonvolatile RAM as the sou rce location. Use a range
of 1 throu gh 300 as the d estination location to save
form ats in nonvolatile RAM.
9467
Bad location for form at erase
This occu rs d u ring FMTZ com m and w hen you try to m ake
one or more invalid format memory locations as the command
arguments.
❖
All form ats to be erased from nonvolatile RAM m u st
be in the range of 1 throu gh 300.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
8-24
Chapter 8: Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9470
9471
Can ’t ch an ge EPRO M con ten ts
An attem p t w as m ad e to insert a form at u sing the FMTI
com m and into an EPROM form at m em ory location.
❖
Use a range of 1 throu gh 300 as the insertion location
for form ats in nonvolatile RAM.
Bad location for form at yan k
This occu rs w hen you try to rem ove (yank) one or m ore
form ats from invalid form at m em ory locations u sing the
FMTY com m and .
❖
All formats to be removed from nonvolatile RAM must
be in the range of m em ory locations 1 throu gh 300.
9472
Can ’t ch an ge EPRO M con ten ts
This occu rs w hen you try to rem ove (yank) one or m ore
form ats from EPROM form at m em ory locations u sing the
FMTY com m and .
❖
Only form ats in m em ory locations 1 throu gh 300 can
be rem oved .
9475
9477
Can ’t ch an ge EPRO M con ten ts
One or m ore EPROM form at locations w as given as the
d estination location for the FMTD com m and .
❖
Use a range of 1 throu gh 300 as the d estiny location
to cop y form ats to nonvolatile RAM.
Error d u p licatin g form ats
The <first> memory location parameter used with the FMTD
com m an d is greater th an th e <last> m em ory location
parameter.
❖
Make the <first> memory location parameter less than
or equ al to the <last> m em ory location p aram eter.
9480
Form at d ata m issin g
The FMTR com m and tried to read a form at from an em p ty
form at storage location.
❖
Use a m em ory location know n to contain a form at or
u se the FMTL com m and to load a form at by nam e.
8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9500
Seq u en ce d ata n ot fou n d
❖
Use a m em ory location know n to contain a form at or
u se the FMTL com m and to load a form at by nam e.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
8-26
Chapter 8: Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
New Product Warranty
Product Updates
Service Agreements
Authorized Service Centers
Chapter 9: Service
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
New Product Warranty
Qu antu m Data p rod u cts are w arranted against
d efects in m aterials an d w orkm an sh ip . Th is
w arranty ap p lies for one (1) year from the d ate
of d elivery. Qu antu m Data w ill, at its op tion,
rep air or rep lace equ ip m ent w hich p roves to be
d efective d u ring the w arranty period . This w ar-
ranty inclu d es labor and p arts. All rep airs u n-
d er this w arranty m u st be p erform ed by either
Qu antu m Data or by an au thorized service cen-
ter. Equipment returned to either Quantum Data
or to an authorized service center for repair must
be shipped freight prepaid . Repairs necessitated
by m isu se of the equ ip m ent are not covered by
this w arranty.
NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IM-
PLIED, IN CLUDIN G, BUT N OT LIMITED TO,
TH E IMPLIED WARRAN TIES OF MERCH AN T-
ABILITY AN D FITN ESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. QUAN TUM DATA SH ALL N OT BE
LIABLE FOR CON SEQUEN TIAL DAMAGES.
Please contact ou r cu stom er service d ep artm ent or
an au thorized Qu antu m Data service center to ob-
tain an RMA (Retu rn Material Au thorization) nu m -
ber and instructions prior to returning any equipment.
They w ill need to know the serial nu m ber of the
unit.
UserRegistrationCard
Please be su re to fill ou t and send in the registra-
tion card inclu d ed w ith you r 801G* Vid eo Genera-
tor. This w ill assu re you , the end u ser, of receiving
the latest u p d ate notices, service bu lletins, ap p lica-
tion notes and new sletters w ith the least am ou nt of
d elay.
❖ You d o not need to retu rn the registration card
to m ake you r new p rod u ct w arranty valid .
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX ¥ Rev. A
9-2
Chapter 9: Service
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ProductUpdates
Qu antu m Data reserves the right, at any tim e and
w ithou t notice, to change the d esign or sp ecifica-
tions of the hard w are, firmw are and softw are of any
prod ucts.
Prod u ct u p d ate notices are u su ally p rinted in ou r
new sletter. The new sletter is sent to all registered
users of Quantum Data prod ucts. In other cases, the
notices w ill be sent as a sep arate m ailing to all reg-
istered u sers.
The cost of u p grad es d ep end s on the typ e of u p -
grad e involved and on w hether or not a p articu lar
u nit is still covered by a new p rod u ct w arranty or
a service agreem ent.
ServiceAgreements
It is the intent of Qu antu m Data to p rovid e its cu s-
tom ers w ith the highest qu ality service both before
and after the sale. The 801G* has been d esigned for
years of d ep end able op eration. H ow ever, like any
com p lex p iece of equ ip m ent, a sched u led p lan of
insp ection and calibration checks w ill insu re that
your unit w ill be operating w ithin all specifications.
For ou r cu stom ers in the United States, FULL Ser-
vice Su pport Agreem ents beyond the stand ard w ar-
ranty period may be purchased. This Service Support
p rogram covers rep airs, p erform ance testing and
hard w are u p d ates as w ell as telep hone assistance.
Service su p p ort agreem ents that inclu d e the u se of
service loaners w hile covered u nits are in for re-
p airs are also available.
In the U.S.A.
Please contact Qu antu m Data's cu stom er service
d ep artm ent or you r sales rep resentative for infor-
m ation concerning the exact term s and cond itions
of service agreem ents.
Warranty, Product Updates & Service Agreements
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For ou r cu stom ers in Eu rop e, service contracts m ay
be available d irectly from ou r au thorized service
center in The Netherlands. Please contact Matrix Eu-
rop e BV for inform ation concerning the exact term s
and cond itions of their service contracts.
In Europe
GettingYour 801G* Repaired
We d o not recom m end m ost typ es of rep airs be at-
tem p ted by the u ser. We d o not cu rrently p u blish
schem atic d iagram s or u ser service m anu als for the
801G*.
All rep air w ork shou ld be d one by Qu antu m Data
or by one of ou r au thorized service centers. They
are listed on the next tw o p ages. Please contact ou r
cu stom er service d ep artm ent or the au thorized ser-
vice center for an RMA (Return Material Authoriza-
tion) Number and instructions prior to returning any
equ ip m ent. You w ill need to tell them the serial
nu m ber of the u nit being retu rned . Equ ip m ent re-
tu rned to either Qu antu m Data or to an au thorized
service center for rep air m u st be ship p ed freight
prepaid .
Returningthe
801G*
❖ Keep a record of all form ats, cu stom im ages,
image lists and test-sequences that you have cre-
ated or ed ited . Units sent in for service w ill
probably have their storage locations reset to the
factory d efau lt settings. You w ill need to re-en-
ter the d ata w hen the u nit is retu rned .
AuthorizedServiceCenters
The follow ing list of ou r sales offices and au tho-
rized service centers is correct as of Janu ary, 1996.
Please contact the ap p rop riate facility to obtain a
Retu rn Materials Au thorization (RMA) nu m ber be-
fore send ing any equ ipm ent in for repair or calibra-
tion. Please contact ou r facility in the U.S.A. if you
have any problems in contacting or dealing with any
of the other locations show n.
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
9-4
Chapter 9: Service
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
North America: Manufacturing, Sales and Service
Q u an tu m D ata In c.
Attn: Cu stom er Service Dep t.
2111 Big Tim ber Road
Elgin, IL 60123
U.S.A.
Telep hone: +1 - 847-888-0450
Facsim ile:+1 - 847-888-2802
Internet e-m ail:
sales@quantumd ata.com
Europe: Service Only
(Please contact our U.S.A. office, above, for sales)
M atrix Eu rop e BV
Attn: Service Dep artm ent Manager
Mail Ad d ress:
P.O. Box 992
Street Ad d ress:
N ijverheid sw eg Zu id 4
N L-3800 AZ Am ersfoort 3812 EB Am ersfoort
The N etherland s The N etherland s
Telep hone: +31 - 33-4620410
Facsim ile: +31 - 33-4633644
Telex: 70387 m atrix nl
Japan: Sales Representative and Service
N ih on Bin ary Com p an y, Ltd .
Minam izu ka-Bld g. 2-17-3
Shibu ya, Shibu ya-Ku
Tokyo 150, Jap an
Telep hone: +81 - 33-407-9751
Facsim ile: +81 - 33-407-9752
Telex: BIN ARY J27876
Autorized Service Centers
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Korea: Sales Representative and Service
B & P In tern ation al Co., Ltd .
Attn: Service Dep artm ent Manager
Room 1809, Geop you ng Tow n #A
203-1 N onhyu n-Dong
Kangnam-Ku
Seou l, Korea
Telep hone: +82 2-546-1457
Facsim ile: +82 2-546-1458
Telex: K29230 MUSESUH
Singapore: Sales Representative and Service
Test System s In tegration (TSI)
Block 6024
Ang Mo Kia Ind u strial Park 3 #03-08
Singap ore 2056
Telep hone: +65 - 481-1346
Facsim ile: +65 - 481-9506
Taiwan: Sales Representative and Service
Su p erLin k Tech n ology Corp oration
339 H o Ping Road , Section 2, 9th Floor
Taip ei, Taiw an ROC
Telep hone: +886 2-705-7090
Facsim ile: +886 2-708-3398
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
9-6
Chapter 9: Service
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timing Ranges
Output Descriptions
Standard Formats
Standard Images
User Interface Items
Physical Dimensions
Power and Environment
Appendix A: Specifications
Appendix A: Specifications
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 801GC, 801GF and 801GX Specifications
Signal Formats
Over 100 built-in formats
Test Images
Over 100 built-in imagess
All models share a common library of
built-in images. Not all images may work
on all models of generators. See chapter 5
for more information.
All models share a common library of
built-in formats. Not all formats may work
on all models of generators. See chapter 4
for more information.
Partial Listing:
Format
ColorBar
GrayBar
Raster
BrightBox
Dot_10
TV encoded color video (801GX only):
Format spreadsheet
Color bars, up to 16 bars
Gray bars, up to 16 bars
Active pixels set to black
Five light meter boxes
Hatch/dots, small
NTSC:
PAL:
5
5
HDTV analog video:
European:
Japanese:
3
3
Dot_12
Hatch/dots, medium
Dot_24
Hatch/dots, large
Hatch_10
Hatch_12
Hatch_24
Grill_44
Grill_44(I)
Grill_33
Grill_33(I)
Grill_22
Grill_22(I)
Grill_11
Grill_11(I)
Linearity
SMPTE133
Focus_Cx
Focus_H
Focus_Oo
Text_9
Crosshatch, 10 boxes
Crosshatch, 12 boxes
Crosshatch, 24 boxes
Vertical stripes, 4 pixels
Horiz stripes, 4 pixels
Vertical stripes, 3 pixels
Horiz stripes, 3 pixels
Vertical stripes, 2 pixels
Horiz stripes, 2 pixels
Vertical stripes, 1 pixel
Horiz stripes, 1 pixel
Xhatch with tics, circles
Medical test image
Computer analog video:
PAL:
3
RS-170:
Barco:
HP:
3
6
7
IBM:
Intergraph:
Mac:
NEC-PC:
Sony:
16
4
13
2
3
Sun:
VESA:
10
33
Full screen "C" w/ "x"
Full screen of "H"
Full screen of "O" and "o"
Random small text
Computer digital video (801GC & 801GX only):
AT&T:
IBM:
3
7
Text_16
Cubes
Random larger text
Animated rotating cubes
Persist
17 moving boxes
Flat
Outline
All active pixels white
White border around active area
TV vectorscope
TV 20% gray levels
TV waveshape
TV 100% multiburst
Full screen of ÒMEÓ for focus
SMPTEBar
Stairs20
PulseBar
Burst_100
MEME
CustomFormats
Storage capacity: 300 + built-in formats
Edit method: screen editor on UUT or via
commands over computer ports
CustomImages
Storage capacity: Total # of primitives ≈ 2048 -
# of images
Edit method: Screen editor on UUT or via
commands over computer ports
Edit functions: exit, draw, insert, delete, move, cur
sor, save, change
CustomSequences
Storage capacity: totalsteps≈ 2133-#ofsequences
Edit method: Screen editor on UUT or via
commands over computer ports
Parameters:
Primitives:
dot, line, rectangle, oval, triangle,
characters, text string, format data,
grid, croshattches, H-grill, V-grill,
centermark, limits
Select Format
Select Image & version
Auto step delay:
Sequencename:
0.1 Sec. to 24 Hr.
8 characters
Colors:
Up to 15 colors (+black) from a
palette of 63 colors and grays
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX ¥ Rev. A
A-2
Appendix A: Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 801GC, 801GF and 801GX Specifications
UserInterface
ComputerPorts
Displays:
16 X 2 character LCD
IEEE-488 INTERFACE
Protocol:
LED power indicator
Format selector
IEEE-488.2
Connector: 24 pos. microribbon
SERIAL INTERFACE
Knobs:
Image selector
Buttons:
Image / STEP
Type:
RS-232C
Video gate(R, G/I, B/V)
Sync gate (ACS, DCS and DSS)
Outputs on/ off
Protocol:
Baud Rates: 300 thru 38,400
full duplex
Data Bits:
Stop Bits:
7, 8
1, 2
Parity Bits: none, odd, even
Handshake: none, RTS/CTS
Power-OnDefaultSettings:
2400 Baud, 8 Data bits, 1 Stop bit,
No parity, No handshake
Connector: 9 pin D-Sub receptacle
Pin 2 Ñ Data in (Rx)
Pin 3 Ñ Data out (Tx)
Pin 4 Ñ DTR in
Pin 5 Ñ Signals ground
Pin 7 Ñ RTS out
Pin 8 Ñ CTS in
Pins 1, 6, 9 Ñ No connections
OutputConnectors
GENERAL PURPOSE
Connector: 5 BNC receptacles
Signals:
analog R,G,B; digital HS/CS, & VS/CS
SuppliedSoftware
MS-DOS¨ compatible software and files on 3-1/2
inch HD floppy. Disk contains example programs for
communicating with the generator via its serial port.
Sample command files also included.
VGA
Connector: HD female 15-pin D-Sub
Signals:
analog R,G,B; digital HS/CS, & VS/CS
SUN WORKSTATION
Connector: Female 13W3 D-Sub
Misc.
Signals:
analog R,G,B; digital HS,VS, & CS
AC MAINS
Voltage:
MAC
86-132VAC (standard as shipped)
180-250 VAC (via switch on cabinet)
Connector: Female 15-pin D-Sub
Signals:
analog R,G,B; digital HS, VS, & CS
Frequency: 48 to 66 Hz
Power:
26 watts (801GC & 801GX)
28 watts (801 GF)
MDA, CGA & EGA (801GC & 801GX only)
Connector: Female 9-pin D-Sub
Signals:
digital VI (MDA); digital RGB
digital RGBI (CGA)
Fuse:
1/2 Amp @ 250 VAC slow-blow, 5 mm
dia x 20 mm long, type 239.500
digital RrGgBb (EGA)
digital HS & VS sync
SIZE
Unpacked:
Inches:
mm:
Shipping Box:
Weight
NTSC-TV / PAL-TV (801GX Only)
Connector: BNC receptacle
≈12.2 W x ≈7.7 D x ≈3.8 H
≈31 W x ≈20 D x ≈10 H
Signals:
analog E (composite)
17x11.5x7 in. (43x29x18 mm.)
S-VIDEO (801GX Only)
Connector: 4-pin Mini-DIN receptacle
Unpacked:
Shipping:
≈ 7 lbs. (3.2 kg.)
≈ 12 lbs. (5.5 kg.) w/ all standard
accessories
Signals:
Y(luminance); C (chrominance)
Appendix A: Specifications
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Model 801GC and 801GX Specifications
PixelTiming
DigitalSync
Frequency Range (MHz):
9.375 to 150 (RGB analog)
Modes:
Separate Horiz. & Vert.
Composite
9.375 to 18 (801GX only TV, S-VIDEO)
9.375 to 55 (TTL digital video)
1.465 Hz
Composite Configurations:
American HS OR'ed with VS
American Serrated
American Serr. &Eq.(interlaced only)
European HS OR'ed with VS
European Serrated
Step:
Jitter:
≤800ps line-to-line (1 sigma)
Accuracy: 50 ppm
European Serr. & Eq.(interlaced only)
Eq. Pulse Width: HSwidth / 2 pixels
Serr. Pulse Width: Htot - HSwid pixels (progressive)
[Htot/2] - HSwid pxls (interlace)
HorizontalTiming
Frequency Range: 2.29 Ð 130KHz
Total pixels per line:
Equalization Interval:
Before:
After:
Step:
0 to Vtot - Vact -VSwid - EqAfter Lines
0 to Vtot - Vact -VSwid - EqBefore Lines
1 line
Range:
144 to 4096 pixels
(must be even below 125 MHZ pixel
clock rates and must be evenly
divisible by 4 above 125 MHz)
2 pixels below 125 MHz pixel clock
4 pixels above 125 MHz pixel clock
Interval Modes:
American (interval is equal to programmed value)
European (interval =1/2 line < programmed value)
Step:
Active pixels per line:
Range:
16 to 2048 (limit Htotal - 32 pixels )
(RGB analog and TTL)
16 to 1024 pxls (TV and S-Video)
1 pixel below 125 MHz pixel clock
2 pixels above 125 MHz pixel clock
Step:
Sync pulse width:
Range:
Step:
1 to Htot - Hact -HSdel pixels
1 pixel below 125 MHz pixel clock
2 pixels above 125 MHz pixel clock
Outputs
RGB ANALOG VIDEO OUTPUTS
Source Z: 75-ohms
Sync delay (front porch):
Range:
Step:
Output levels:
Video Swing: 0 to +1.0 V
Sync Swing: 0 to Ð 400 mV
1 to Htot - Hact -HSwid pixels
1 pixel below 125 MHz pixel clock
2 pixels above 125 MHz pielx clock
Setup:
0 to 100 IRE
Autocal: autoadjust (internal precision ref.)
Output protection: Output buffer/75 Ω series term
Rise / Fall: 2 nSec. (typical)
VerticalTiming
Overshoot: ≤ 10% (all outputs terminated)
Frequency Range:1 to 650Hz
Vertical total scan lines per frame:
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Source Z: 75-ohms ±2%
Range:
Step:
2 to 4096 lines (progressive)
5 to 4097 lines (interlace)
1 line (progressive)
2 lines (interlace)
Levels:
Ô0Õ = 0 V Ô1Õ = 5 V open circuit
Ô0Õ = 0 VÔ1Õ = 2.5 V (term)
Rise / Fall : < 4.0 nSec
Vertical active scan lines / frame:
Range:
Step:
1-1024 lines (Vtotal - 1)
1 line (progressive)
2 lines (interlace)
TV OUTPUT (801GX Only)
Source Z:
Video Signal: Composite (lum.,chrom. & burst)
Rise / Fall: per RS-170A & CCIR stds
75-ohms ±2%
Vertical Sync pulse width:
Range:
Step:
1 to Vtot - Vact -VSdel lines
1 line
S-VIDEO OUTPUT (801GX Only)
Source Z: 75-ohms 2%
Modes:American or European
Vertcal Sync delay (front porch):
Range:
Step:
0 to Vtot - Vact -VSwid lines
1 line
Signals:
Y(luminance); C ( chrominance)
Rise / Fall: per RS-170A & CCIR stds
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
A-4
Appendix A: Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AdditionalModel801GFSpecifications
PixelTiming DigitalSync
Frequency Range:3.9975 MHz to 250 MHz
Modes:
Separate Horiz. & Vert.
Step:
Jitter:
Accuracy: 25 ppm
0.035 Hz
≤800 pS line-to-line (1 sigma)
Composite
Composite Configurations:
American HS OR'ed with VS
American Serrated
American Serr. &Eq.(interlaced only)
European HS OR'ed with VS
European Serrated
HorizontalTiming
Frequency Range: 1.00 Ð 130KHz
Total pixels per line:
European Serr. & Eq.(interlaced only)
Eq. Pulse Width: HSwidth / 2 pixels
Serr. Pulse Width: Htot - HSwid pixels (progressive)
[Htot/2] - HSwid pxls (interlace)
Range:
Step:
144 to 65,535 pixels
1 pixel
Equalization Interval:
Active pixels per line:
Before:
After:
Step:
0 to Vtot - Vact -VSwid - EqAfter Lines
0 to Vtot - Vact -VSwid - EqBefore Lines
1 line
Range:
16
to
2048
pixels
typical
(up to 32,768 pixels under special
conditions)
Interval Modes:
Step:
1 pixel
American (interval is equal to programmed value)
European (interval =1/2 line < programmed value)
Sync pulse width:
Range:
Step:
1 to Htot - Hact -HSdel pixels
1 pixel
Sync delay (front porch):
Range:
Step:
1 to Htot - Hact -HSwid pixels
1 pixel
VerticalTiming
Frequency Range:1 to 650Hz
Vertical total scan lines per frame:
Range:
Step:
2 to 4096 lines (progressive)
5 to 8191 lines (interlace)
1 line (progressive)
2 lines (interlace)
Vertical active scan lines / frame:
Range:
1 to 2048 lines (progressive)
2 to 2048 lines (interlace)
(up to 4096 lines under special
conditions)
1 line (progressive)
2 lines (interlace)
Outputs
Step:
RGB ANALOG VIDEO OUTPUTS
Source Z:
Config:
Output levels:
Video Swing:
Sync Swing:
Setup:
75-ohms
R, G, B or Y, Pr, Pb
Vertical Sync pulse width:
Range:
Step:
1 to Vtot - Vact -VSdel lines
1 line
Modes:American or European
Vertcal Sync delay (front porch):
0 to +1.0 V
0 to Ð 400 mV
0 to 100 IRE
autoadjust(internalprecisionref.)
Range:
Step:
0 to Vtot - Vact -VSwid lines
1 line
Autocal:
Output protection: Output buffer / 75 Ω series term
Rise / Fall:
Overshoot:
Horizontal actives beyond 2048
pixels require a reduced vertical
active limit. Vertical actives
beyond 2048 lines require a
reduced horizontal active limit.
Required limit reductions shown
in table. Horizontal actives
beyond 4096 pixels repeat the
information contained in the first
4096 pixels of each scan line.
V Active
lines
1.5 nSec. (typical)
≤ 10% (all outputs terminated)
H Active pixels
513-1024
1025-2048
2049-4096
4097-8192
8193-16384
16385-32768
4096
2048
1024
512
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Source Z: 75-ohms ±2%
Levels:
Ô0Õ = 0 VÔ1Õ = 5 V open circuit
256
Ô0Õ = 0 VÔ1Õ = 2.5 V (term)
Rise / Fall : < 4.0 nSec
128
Appendix A: Specifications
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
A-6
Appendix A: Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
An alphabetically sorted list of
subjects covered in this manual.
Page numbers in boldface indicate
where the main discussion of a topic
may be found.
Index
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS170 video 3-7
Sun Micro workstation 3-6
VESA 3-5
A
AC Power
Changing Input Range 5-2
Cord 5-3
Indicator 2-4
Built-in Images
Blank Raster 5-52
BLU_EM+ 5-6
BLU_PIC 5-7
Box_50mm 5-9
Box_64mm 5-9
BriteBox 5-10
Check_11 5-15
Check511 5-13
CheckBy3 5-14
CirclesL 5-16
CirclesS 5-17
ColorBar 5-18
Crosshatch 5-31, 5-33, 5-34
Crosshatch w/ Circles 5-37, 5-39
Cubes 5-19
Input Range 5-2
AC Select Switch 2-7
“ACSSync Gate” Button 2-10
Analog Video
Turning on and off 2-9
Analog video
repairing 6-96
B
“BVideo Gate” Button 2-9
Barrel distortion test 5-45
Bias 6-46
Custom 5-20
Dot_10 5-21
Dot_12 5-21
Dot_24 5-21
Flat 5-7
Flat Gray 5-7
Flat_B 5-7
Blanking Pedestal
Programming 6-46
Brightness measurements 5-9, 5-
10, 5-50
Flat_G 5-7
Brightness uniformity test 5-11
Flat_R 5-7
Built-in Formats
Focus_@6 5-24
Focus_@7 5-24
Focus_@8 5-24
Focus_Cx 5-25
Focus_H 5-26
Focus_Oo 5-27
Format 5-28
AT&T 3-4
Barco 3-7
Generator diagnostics 3-8
HDTV component video 3-8
Hewlett Packard 3-7
IBM analog 3-4
IBM digital 3-4
GRAY_PIC 5-7
GrayBar 5-29
Grill_11 5-30
Grill_22 5-30
Grill_33 5-30
Grill_44 5-30
GRN_EM 5-5
GRN_EM+ 5-6
GRN_HTCH 5-31
IBM workstation 3-4
Intercolor workstation 3-7
Japanese NEC 3-6
Japanese Sony monitor 3-7
Macintosh 3-6
NTSC encoded video 3-8
PAL component video 3-7
PAL encoded video 3-8
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX ¥ Rev. A
II
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hatch_10i 5-31
Hatch_10o 5-31
Hatch_12i 5-31
Hatch_12o 5-31
Hatch_24i 5-31
Hatch_24o 5-31
Hatch_G 5-31
Hatch_M 5-31
Hatch64W 5-34
Hatch8x8 5-33
KanjiKan 5-36
Linearty (Linearity) 5-37
LinFocus 5-39
MAGENTA 5-31
MEMEPlus 5-6
MEMESony 5-5
MEPlus_B 5-6
MEPlus_G 5-6
MEPlus_R 5-6
MESony_B 5-5
MESony_G 5-5
MESony_R 5-5
Outline0 5-41
Outline1 5-41
Persist 5-47
Buttons 2-8
“ACSSync Gate” 2-10
“BVideo Gate” 2-9
“DCSSync Gate” 2-10
“DSSSync Gate” 2-10
“G Video Gate” 2-9
“Image Step” 2-8
Not lighting when pressed 2-10
“Output” 2-10
“R Video Gate” 2-9
“Sync Gate” 2-10
“Video Gate” 2-9
C
Color Bars 5-70
Color Bars Test Pattern 5-61
Color bars test pattern 5-18
Color tracking test 5-29
Commands and Queries
alphabetical listing 6-86
Direct Processor Control 6-85
directory editor control 6-83
directory memory management
6-84
QuartBox 5-50
Raster 5-52
RED_EM 5-5
finder 6-75
Format Editor Control 6-77
Format Memory Management 6-78
format parameter settings 6-76
image memory management 6-82
Image Memory Management
Settings 6-79, 6-82
language 6-75
miscellaneous system parameters
6-85
sequence editor control 6-82
sequence memory management
6-83
sequence parameter settings 6-83
system parameter settings 6-84
RED_EM+ 5-6
RED_PIC 5-7
Regulate 5-53
SMPTE133 5-55
Stairs20 5-66
Strokes0 5-67
Strokes1 5-67
Text_16 5-68
Text_9 5-68
WHT_EM 5-5
WHT_EM+ 5-6
WHT_PIC 5-7
Burn-in Tesing
Using a sequence 6-41
Commands and queries 6-75
Connecting your display 5-4
Burst Image 5-12
III
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connectors, Output
BNC 5-6
F
D-Sub 5-4
Features of the 801GP 1-2
Contrast and brightness check test
5-59
Field Rate
Programming 6-175
Contrast Ratio Measurements 5-14
Controls, an overview 1-3
Fimrware Version 6-170
focus adjustment 5-22
Convergence Test 5-32, 5-73
Focus adjustment test 5-24, 5-25,
5-26, 5-27, 5-36, 5-40
Custom Image Editor
Activating 6-7
Focus Test 5-22
Drawing Primitives 6-25
Using 6-24
Focus test 5-5, 5-6
“Format”
Knob 2-5
Custom Images
Adding to knob 6-21
Format Editor
Activating 6-7
Using 6-9
D
“DCSSync Gate” Button 2-10
Format Files
Definitions
Creating your own 6-43
Formats 1-3
Format List Editor
Activating 6-7
Using 6-19
Deflection linearity test 5-59
Digital Video
Turning on and off 2-9
Format Name
On front panel window 2-4
Directory Memory Management
command and queries 6-84
Format Number
On front panel window 2-4
Display Code 6-108
On front panel window 2-4
Format Parameter Settings
Commands and Queries 6-76, 6-77
Display Size Test 5-43
Format Test Image 5-28
“DSSSync Gate” Button 2-10
Formats
E
Definition 1-3
Memory Capacity 1-3
Selecting with knob 2-5
Supplied in the 801GP 1-3
Editors, built-in
Activating 6-7
Excessive overscan and off-center
alignment test 5-60
Frame Rate
Programming 6-175
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
IV
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Panel Display
Current Format 2-4
“Image”
Knob 2-5
Current Test Image 2-4
Format Number 2-4
Format Scan Rates 2-4
Under normal operation 2-4
Why some images will not
draw 2-5
“Image” Button 2-8
Image Descriptions
Burst 5-12
Ramp 5-51
G
SMPTEBar 5-61
TVBar 5-70
“G Video Gate” Button 2-9
Gamma Correction 6-46
Image Editor
Activating 6-7
Using 6-24
Programming 6-47
Gray Scale Test Pattern 5-29
Gray Stairstep Test Pattern 5-29
GRN_PIC 5-7
Image List Editor
Activating 6-7
Using 6-21
GUI Editors
Activating 6-7
Image Memory Management
Commands and Queries 6-79, 6-82
H
Image Name
On front panel window 2-4
Hardware Version 6-171
Image Number
On front panel window 2-4
Help
Authorized Service Centers 9-4
Repairs and Service 9-4
Images
Adding to knob 6-21
Demo Cycle 2-6
Selecting via serial port 6-143
Selecting with knob 2-5
Supplied in the 801GP 1-3
Why some images will not draw 2-5
High contrast resolution test 5-59
High voltage regulation test 5-53
Horizontal Rate
On front panel window 2-4
I
Intensity Bit, Digital Video
Turning on and off 2-9
IEEE-488
Interlace
Turning on and off 6-159
Address 6-62
Bus Commands 6-69
Commands 6-62
Common Commands 6-69
Configuration 6-62
Status Reporting 6-67
Interlace flicker test 5-60
V
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
K
O
Knob
“Output” Button 2-10
“Format” 2-5
“Image” 2-5
Programming Mode 2-6
Output Connectors
BNC 5-6
D-Sub 5-4
Outputs
L
Turning Colors on and off 2-9
Turning Digital Syncs on and off
2-10
Light Meter
Setting target size 6-151
Turning on and off 2-9, 2-10
Line Cord
Overview of the 801GP 1-3
P
Connecting 5-3
Type 5-3
Line Voltage
Input Range 5-2
Setting Input Range 5-2
Parallelogram Distortion Test 5-43
Persistence
Testing 5-48
Linearity (Deflection) Test 5-38,
5-40, 5-74
Pincushion Distortion Test 5-45
"Power"Indicator 2-4
Loaner Units 9-3
“Loop Enabled” message 2-6
Looping Test Images 2-6
Power Cord
Connecting 5-3
Low contrast resolution and noise
test 5-59
Power Line
Changing Voltage Range 5-2
Input Voltage Range 5-2
M
Power Switch 2-7
Memory Management
Commands 6-78
Primary Video, Digital Video
Turning on and off 2-9
Programming
With a Computer 6-60
N
Name
Programming Mode
Activating 6-7
Adding to test images 6-169
Normal Operating Mode
Activating 6-8
Purity adjustment test 5-7
Q
Quick gamma check test 5-59
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
VI
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shadow Mask Warping Test 5-8
SMPTE RP-133 5-55
SMPTEBar 5-61
R
“R Video Gate” Button 2-9
Ramp Image 5-51
“Step Image” Button 2-8
Switches 2-7
Raster Centering Test 5-52
Registration Card 9-2
“Sync Gate”
Buttons 2-10
Repairing
Analog Video 6-96
Not lighting when pressed 2-10
Repairs
Obtaining 9-4
System Level Control
Commands and Queries 6-85
Resolution, Testing 5-13, 5-15, 5-30
System Parameter Settings
Commands and Queries 6-83,
6-84, 6-85
Return Material Authorization 9-2,
9-4
RMA Numbers 9-2, 9-4
T
S
Test Sequence 6-38
Continuous cycle 6-41
Running 6-41
Sales Representatives
Names & Locations 9-4
Test Sequence Editor
Activating 6-7, 6-36
Using 6-38
Secondary Bit, Digital Video
Turning on and off 2-9
Sequence
Continuous cycle 6-41
Running 6-41
Test Sequence Knob list
Editing 6-7, 6-36
Tests 5-5
Sequence Editor
Activating 6-7, 6-36
Using 6-38
brightness control adjustment 5-50
brightness control adjustment
test 5-9, 5-10
Sequence Editor Control
commands and queries 6-82
brightness uniformity 5-11
contrast and brightness check 5-59
Contrast ratio 5-14
convergence adjustment (color
monitors only) 5-32
Deflection linearity 5-59
display size correction 5-43
excessive overscan and off-center
alignment 5-60
Sequence Knob list
Editing 6-7, 6-36
Sequence Memory Management
commands and queries 6-83
Sequence Parameter Settings
commands and queries 6-83
focus 5-5, 5-6
Service Agreements 9-3
Service Centers 9-4
VII
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus adjustment 5-26, 5-27
focus adjustment 5-24, 5-25,
5-36, 5-40
U
Updates
high contrast resolution 5-59
high voltage regulation 5-53
interlace flicker 5-60
linearity adjustment 5-38, 5-40
low contrast resolution and noise
5-59
parallelogram distortion check 5-43
phosphor persistence 5-48
pin and barrel distortion correc-
tion 5-45
purity adjustment 5-7
quick gamma check 5-59
raster centering 5-52
shadow mask warping 5-8
trapezoid distortion correction 5-44
verify monitor resolution 5-13,
5-15, 5-30
Verify that all video channels are
functional 5-18
video amplifier stability 5-60
video color tracking (color moni-
tors) 5-29
Policy 9-3
V
Vertical Rate
On front panel window 2-4
Programming 6-175
Video amplifier stability test 5-60
Video Bit, Digital Video
Turning on and off 2-9
Video Decoder Testing 5-49
Video gain linearity and gamma
test 5-59
Video Gain Linearity Test 5-29
Video gain linearity test 5-66
“Video Gate”
Buttons 2-9
W
video gain linearity 5-66
video gain linearity (monochrome
monitors) 5-29
video gain linearity and gamma
5-59
word processor simulation 5-69
yoke tilt correction 5-42
yoke winding orthogonality
check 5-42
Warranty 9-2
Authorized Service Centers 9-4
Extending 9-3
Getting Repairs 9-2
Registration Card 9-2
Terms & Conditions 9-2
Word processor simulation 5-69
Y
Tilt Test 5-42
Trademark Acknowledgments ii
Trapezoid Distortion Test 5-44
TVBar Image 5-70
Yoke Tilt Test 5-42
Yoke Winding Test 5-42
Model 801GC, 801GF & 801GX¥Rev. A
VIII
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
®
2111 Big Timber Road
Elgin, IL 60123-1100 USA
Phone: (847) 888-0450
Fax: (847) 888-2802
BBS: (847) 888-0115
[
≤19.2KB, 8-N-1 protocol]
Please note that on January 20, 1996 our phone, fax
and BBS area codes changed from 708 to 847.
Internet Connections
World Wide Web Site:
Sales & Service E-mail:
Technical Support E-mail:
http://www.quantumdata.com
Model 801GC, 801GF
&
801GX Owner’s
&
Programmers Manual • Part# 68-00157 (rev.
A
21-Feb-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|